NodeB V100R010

NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

Issue Date Part Number

01 2008-06-25

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1 1 Introduction to NodeB Initial Configuration.......................................................................1-1
1.1 Definition of NodeB Initial Configuration......................................................................................................1-2 1.2 NodeB Initial Configuration Scenarios...........................................................................................................1-2 1.3 NodeB Initial Configuration Tool...................................................................................................................1-2 1.4 NodeB Initial Configuration Methods.............................................................................................................1-2

2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration.....................................2-1
2.1 NodeB Basic Data...........................................................................................................................................2-2 2.2 NodeB Equipment Layer Data........................................................................................................................2-4 2.3 NodeB Transport Layer Data........................................................................................................................2-32 2.4 NodeB Radio Layer Data..............................................................................................................................2-72

3 NodeB Initial Configuration....................................................................................................3-1 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial)........................................................4-1
4.1 NodeB Template File......................................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial)..................................................................................................................4-2 4.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing the Template File (Initial).............................................................4-6 4.4 Reconfiguring NodeB Data (Initial)................................................................................................................4-8 4.5 Refreshing the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (Initial)..........................................................................4-9

5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial)...............................................5-1
5.1 NodeB Configuration File...............................................................................................................................5-2 5.2 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial)..................................................................................................................5-2 5.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing a Configuration File (Initial).........................................................5-6 5.4 Reconfiguring NodeB Data (Initial)................................................................................................................5-8 5.5 Refreshing the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (Initial)..........................................................................5-9

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial).......................................................................................6-1
6.1 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial)..................................................................................................................6-3 6.2 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A (Initial).......................................................6-7 6.2.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).......................................................................................6-9 6.2.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial)..........................................................................6-16 6.2.3 Adding an Uplink/Downlink Baseband Resource Group and the CMB (Initial, Macro NodeB)........6-20 6.2.4 Adding an RRU (Initial, Macro NodeB)..............................................................................................6-24 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd i

Contents

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6.2.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial)................................................................................................................6-32 6.2.6 Adding an NGRU (Initial)....................................................................................................................6-33 6.2.7 Adding an NCMU (Initial, BTS3812AE)............................................................................................6-34 6.2.8 Adding an NPMU (Initial, Macro NodeB)...........................................................................................6-36 6.2.9 Adding NPSUs (Initial, BTS3812AE/BTS3812A)..............................................................................6-38 6.2.10 Adding Batteries (Initial, BTS3812AE/BTS3812A).........................................................................6-39 6.2.11 Adding an ALD (Initial).....................................................................................................................6-40

6.3 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812E (Initial)...........................................................................6-45 6.3.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).....................................................................................6-48 6.3.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial)..........................................................................6-54 6.3.3 Adding an Uplink/Downlink Baseband Resource Group and the CMB (Initial, Macro NodeB)........6-59 6.3.4 Adding an RRU (Initial, Macro NodeB)..............................................................................................6-63 6.3.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial)................................................................................................................6-71 6.3.6 Adding an NGRU (Initial)....................................................................................................................6-72 6.3.7 Adding an NEMU (Initial, BTS3812E)...............................................................................................6-73 6.3.8 Adding an NPMU (Initial, Macro NodeB)...........................................................................................6-75 6.3.9 Adding NPSUs (Initial, BTS3812E)....................................................................................................6-77 6.3.10 Adding Batteries (Initial, BTS3812E)................................................................................................6-79 6.3.11 Adding an ALD (Initial).....................................................................................................................6-80 6.4 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the DBS3800 (Initial).............................................................................6-85 6.4.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).....................................................................................6-87 6.4.2 Adding a BBU (Initial).........................................................................................................................6-93 6.4.3 Adding an Uplink/Downlink Baseband Resource Group and the CMB (Initial, Distributed NodeB) .......................................................................................................................................................................6-98 6.4.4 Adding an RRU (Initial, Distributed NodeB)....................................................................................6-102 6.4.5 Adding an NEMU (Initial, Distributed NodeB).................................................................................6-110 6.4.6 Adding an NPMU (Initial, Distributed NodeB).................................................................................6-111 6.4.7 Adding an ALD (Initial).....................................................................................................................6-112 6.5 Manually Adding the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over ATM)....................................................6-117 6.5.1 Adding Links at the Physical Layer (Initial)......................................................................................6-118 6.5.2 Adding Transmission Resource Group (Initial, over ATM)..............................................................6-144 6.5.3 Adding SAAL Links (Initial).............................................................................................................6-146 6.5.4 Adding an NBAP (Initial)..................................................................................................................6-150 6.5.5 Adding an ALCAP (Initial)................................................................................................................6-153 6.5.6 Adding AAL2 Path Data (Initial).......................................................................................................6-155 6.5.7 Adding an OMCH of the NodeB (Initial, over ATM).......................................................................6-160 6.5.8 Adding a Treelink PVC (Initial).........................................................................................................6-164 6.6 Manually Adding Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over IP)...............................................................6-168 6.6.1 Adding a Link at the Data Link Layer (Initial)..................................................................................6-169 6.6.2 Adding an IP Route (Initial)...............................................................................................................6-188 6.6.3 Adding SCTP Links (Initial)..............................................................................................................6-191 6.6.4 Adding an IPCP (Initial)....................................................................................................................6-195 6.6.5 Adding Transmission Resource Group (Initial, over IP)...................................................................6-197 ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

Contents

6.6.6 Adding IP Path Data (Initial).............................................................................................................6-200 6.6.7 Adding an OMCH of the NodeB (Initial, over IP).............................................................................6-205 6.6.8 Adding A Bound Destination Network Segment to the Transmission Resource Group (Initial, IP) .....................................................................................................................................................................6-209 6.6.9 Adding IP Clock Links (Initial).........................................................................................................6-211 6.6.10 Modifying IP QoS Data (Initial)......................................................................................................6-215 6.7 Refreshing the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (Initial)......................................................................6-216 6.8 Adding Radio Layer Data...........................................................................................................................6-220 6.8.1 Adding Sites.......................................................................................................................................6-221 6.8.2 Adding Sectors and Cells (Macro NodeB).........................................................................................6-222 6.8.3 Adding Sectors and Cells (Distributed NodeB).................................................................................6-236

7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration..............................................................7-1
7.1 Cell Related Concepts.....................................................................................................................................7-2 7.1.1 Sector, Carrier, and Cell.........................................................................................................................7-2 7.1.2 Physical Resources of Cells...................................................................................................................7-3 7.1.3 Local Cell and Logical Cell...................................................................................................................7-6 7.2 ATM Protocol-Related Terms.........................................................................................................................7-6 7.2.1 ATM User Plane, ATM Control Plane, and ATM Management Plane.................................................7-7 7.2.2 ATM Physical Layer, ATM Layer, and AAL........................................................................................7-7 7.3 IP Protocol-Related Terms..............................................................................................................................7-8 7.3.1 Data Link Layer Protocols.....................................................................................................................7-9 7.3.2 IP..........................................................................................................................................................7-11 7.3.3 SCTP....................................................................................................................................................7-14 7.4 NodeB Treelink PVC....................................................................................................................................7-15 7.5 NodeBs in Direct/Cascading Connections....................................................................................................7-17 7.5.1 Definitions of NodeBs in Direct/Cascading Connections....................................................................7-17 7.5.2 Configuration Differences Between NodeBs in Direct/Cascading Connections.................................7-18

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

iii

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

Figures

Figures
Figure 4-1 Physical NodeB Basic Information window......................................................................................4-6 Figure 4-2 Physical NodeB Basic Information window......................................................................................4-7 Figure 4-3 Create Physical NodeB dialog box.....................................................................................................4-8 Figure 4-4 Matching relations............................................................................................................................4-10 Figure 4-5 NodeB Selection window.................................................................................................................4-12 Figure 4-6 Port Match window..........................................................................................................................4-13 Figure 5-1 Physical NodeB Basic Information window......................................................................................5-6 Figure 5-2 NodeB Data Configuration File..........................................................................................................5-8 Figure 5-3 Matching relations............................................................................................................................5-10 Figure 5-4 NodeB Selection window.................................................................................................................5-12 Figure 5-5 Port Match window..........................................................................................................................5-13 Figure 6-1 Physical NodeB Basic Information window......................................................................................6-6 Figure 6-2 BTS3812AE/BTS3812A panel...........................................................................................................6-7 Figure 6-3 Create Physical NodeB dialog box...................................................................................................6-14 Figure 6-4 NodeB Equipment Layer window....................................................................................................6-15 Figure 6-5 Adding the boards in the baseband subrack.....................................................................................6-19 Figure 6-6 Adding an uplink baseband resource group......................................................................................6-23 Figure 6-7 Adding the RRU (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A/BTS3812E).................................................................6-31 Figure 6-8 Adding the MTRU and MAFU........................................................................................................6-33 Figure 6-9 Adding the NGRU (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A for instance).............................................................6-34 Figure 6-10 Adding an NCMU..........................................................................................................................6-36 Figure 6-11 Adding an NPMU...........................................................................................................................6-37 Figure 6-12 Modifying the NPMU attributes.....................................................................................................6-38 Figure 6-13 Adding an NPSU............................................................................................................................6-39 Figure 6-14 Adding Batteries.............................................................................................................................6-40 Figure 6-15 Adding the ALD.............................................................................................................................6-45 Figure 6-16 BTS3812E panel.............................................................................................................................6-46 Figure 6-17 Create Physical NodeB dialog box.................................................................................................6-53 Figure 6-18 NodeB Equipment Layer window..................................................................................................6-54 Figure 6-19 Adding the boards in the baseband subrack...................................................................................6-58 Figure 6-20 Adding an uplink baseband resource group....................................................................................6-62 Figure 6-21 Adding the RRU (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A/BTS3812E)...............................................................6-70 Figure 6-22 Adding the MTRU and MAFU......................................................................................................6-72 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd v

..........................6-185 Figure 6-61 Configuring the timeslot cross channel.......................6-163 Figure 6-55 NodeB ATM Transport Layer (Treelink PVC) window....................................................................................6-133 Figure 6-46 Configuring the SDT CES links.........................................................................................................................6-76 Figure 6-26 Modifying the NPMU attributes.....................................................................................................................................................................6-149 Figure 6-51 Configuring the NCP and the CCP...........................................................................................6-112 Figure 6-39 Adding the ALD.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-112 Figure 6-38 Adding the NPMU for the RRU............................................................................................................6-140 Figure 6-47 Configuring the UDT CES links................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-78 Figure 6-28 Adding Batteries..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Figures NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 6-23 Adding the NGRU (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A for instance).............................................6-93 Figure 6-33 Adding the BBU...........................................................................................................................................6-188 Figure 6-62 Adding an IP route.................................................................6-179 Figure 6-59 Adding a PPPoE link.............................6-130 Figure 6-45 Adding a fractional ATM link....................................................................6-80 Figure 6-29 Adding the ALD......................6-73 Figure 6-24 Adding an NEMU.......................................................................6-77 Figure 6-27 Adding an NPSU...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-75 Figure 6-25 Adding an NPMU.6-109 Figure 6-36 Adding an NEMU...............6-123 Figure 6-41 Search Iub Board window................................................................................................................................................................................6-101 Figure 6-35 Adding an RRU (DBS3800)....................................6-194 vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...................................6-85 Figure 6-30 DBS3800 panel..................................... Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .......................................................................................................................................6-98 Figure 6-34 Adding an uplink baseband resource group.........................................................................6-152 Figure 6-52 Adding the AAL2 node................................................................................................6-183 Figure 6-60 Configuring the DEVIP...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-125 Figure 6-43 Configure the UNI links individually..........................................................................................................................................................6-167 Figure 6-56 Adding a PPP link..........................................6-143 Figure 6-49 Configuring the transmission resource group............................6-124 Figure 6-42 Configuring the IMA links in batches........................................................................................................................................6-193 Figure 6-64 Configuring the destination IP address of the SCTP link......6-92 Figure 6-32 NodeB Equipment Layer window...............................................................................................................................................................................6-86 Figure 6-31 Create Physical NodeB dialog box.......................6-117 Figure 6-40 Configuring the IMA group and the IMA link individually..................................................................................................6-111 Figure 6-37 Adding an NPMU in the DBS3800 cabinet..........................................................................................6-146 Figure 6-50 Configuring the SAAL.......................................................................6-190 Figure 6-63 Adding an SCTP link................................................................6-129 Figure 6-44 Configure the UNI links in batches...................................6-174 Figure 6-57 Adding the MLPPP group and the MLPPP link.....................................................................................6-155 Figure 6-53 Configuring the AAL2 PATH.........6-141 Figure 6-48 Configuring the timeslot cross channel....................................................6-178 Figure 6-58 Search Iub Board window...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-159 Figure 6-54 Adding an OMCH....

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-214 Figure 6-74 Configuring the Diffserv priority on the transport layer ......................................................6-213 Figure 6-73 Configuring the IP address at the IP clock link server......................................................................................................................... and cell................................................................................................................................7-3 Figure 7-2 Physical RF resources mapped from sectors onto NodeB......................6-208 Figure 6-71 Adding a bound destination network segment to the transmission resource group (initial.............................................7-5 Figure 7-4 Reference model of the ATM protocol.........................................................6-219 Figure 6-77 Port Match window..........................................................6-246 Figure 7-1 Relations among a sector.................................................................................6-222 Figure 6-79 Configuring local sectors and cells....................................................... Ltd vii .....6-233 Figure 6-81 Configuring remote sectors and cells................................................................................................................................................................................................6-207 Figure 6-70 Adding a destination IP address of the OMCH...................................................................7-18 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..6-245 Figure 6-84 Configure distributed sectors and cells...............................................6-220 Figure 6-78 Adding Sites...................................................................................7-10 Figure 7-6 Five classes of IP addresses............................................................................................ over IP) ...................................................................................... carrier.6-232 Figure 6-80 Modifying Mac-hs and Mac-e related parameters.....................7-6 Figure 7-5 Hierarchy of the PPP....................................................................................................................................NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figures Figure 6-65 Configuring the NCP and the CCP........................................................................................................................6-235 Figure 6-83 Configuring remote sectors and cells.6-210 Figure 6-72 Adding an IPCLKLNK link.......6-203 Figure 6-68 Configuring the destination IP address of the IP PATH............................................................7-16 Figure 7-9 Treelink PVC principles.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-12 Figure 7-7 SCTP Message Structure...7-15 Figure 7-8 Treelink PVC......................................................................................6-216 Figure 6-75 Matching relations................................................6-234 Figure 6-82 Configure distributed sectors and cells...6-204 Figure 6-69 Adding an OMCH..........................................................................................................................................7-16 Figure 7-10 Direct and cascading connections..........................................6-217 Figure 6-76 NodeB Selection window...................................6-199 Figure 6-67 Configuring the IP PATH......................................................................................................................................................................................7-4 Figure 7-3 Rules of the mapping between NodeB sectors and MAFUs or MTRUs......................................................................................................................................................6-197 Figure 6-66 Adding the IP transmission resource group..................................................................

.

...............................................................................................2-2 Table 2-2 Negotiation and planned data of the physical NodeB....................2-63 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..............................................................2-53 Table 2-28 Negotiation and planned data of the ppp links........................................................................2-39 Table 2-20 Negotiation and planned data of the UDT CES...................................2-11 Table 2-5 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain...............................................................2-39 Table 2-19 Negotiation and planned data of the SDT CES..........................................................................................................................................2-28 Table 2-14 Data of the Iub transmission sharing function..................2-44 Table 2-22 Negotiation and planned data of the SAAL links..................................................................................................................................................................................................................2-51 Table 2-27 Negotiation and planned data of the treelink PVC..................2-45 Table 2-23 Negotiation and planned data of the NBAP.............................................................NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Tables Tables Table 1-1 DBS3800 initial configuration methods and scenarios.....................2-42 Table 2-21 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group (over ATM).....................................................................................2-27 Table 2-13 Negotiation and planned data of the ALD....................................2-62 Table 2-32 Negotiation and planned data of the timeslot cross links..........................................................................................................................................................................2-37 Table 2-18 Negotiation and planned data of the timeslot cross links.............................................2-55 Table 2-29 Negotiation and planned data of the MLPPP group and MLPPP links....2-11 Table 2-6 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2-35 Table 2-17 Negotiation and planned data of the fractional ATM links..............................2-47 Table 2-24 Negotiation and planned data of the ALCAP...................................................................................2-49 Table 2-26 Negotiation and planned data of the OMCH (ATM)........................2-58 Table 2-30 Negotiation and planned data of the PPPoE links..................2-60 Table 2-31 Negotiation and planned data of the DEVIP............................................................................................................................ 2-9 Table 2-4 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group.....................................................................................2-4 Table 2-3 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU........................................2-48 Table 2-25 Negotiation and planned data of the AAL2 PATH..........................................................................................................................2-15 Table 2-7 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB....................................2-22 Table 2-11 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU...2-32 Table 2-16 Negotiation and planned data of the UNI links.......1-3 Table 2-1 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB........................................2-25 Table 2-12 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB...............................................................................2-19 Table 2-10 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain........................................................................2-17 Table 2-8 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group..............................................................2-31 Table 2-15 Negotiation and planned data of the IMA group and IMA links......................................................................................2-18 Table 2-9 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU....................................................................................................................... Ltd ix .........

......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-46 Table 6-12 Negotiation and planned data of the physical NodeB............................6-10 Table 6-4 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU....................6-28 Table 6-9 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB...................................................................................................................................................................................................4-7 Table 4-3 Description of the configuration pane....................................2-64 Table 2-34 Negotiation and planned data of the SCTP links...................2-72 Table 2-43 Negotiation and planned data of the sector....................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-23 Table 6-7 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain................................6-30 Table 6-10 Negotiation and planned data of the ALD............................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-41 Table 6-11 Module information.............................6-3 Table 6-2 Module information...............................................2-67 Table 2-37 Negotiation and planned data of the IP PATH...............................................................................................6-64 Table 6-17 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU......................2-68 Table 2-38 Negotiation and planned data of the OMCH (IP)................................................................................................2-70 Table 2-39 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group whose destination IP network segment is bound.......................................6-102 x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-8 Table 6-3 Negotiation and planned data of the physical NodeB...6-67 Table 6-18 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB..................................................................................6-60 Table 6-15 Description of the configuration pane........................................6-48 Table 6-13 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................2-73 Table 2-44 Negotiation and planned data of the cell.................................................................4-3 Table 4-2 Description of the configuration pane...............................................................5-3 Table 5-2 Description of the configuration pane.............................6-55 Table 6-14 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group......................... Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-16 Table 6-5 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group.....................................2-72 Table 2-42 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB..................6-99 Table 6-24 Description of the configuration pane.......................................................................................................2-75 Table 4-1 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB..................2-71 Table 2-40 Negotiation and planned data of the IP clock links..6-25 Table 6-8 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU.....................................................................................................5-12 Table 6-1 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB.................2-71 Table 2-41 Negotiation and planned data of the IPQoS....6-101 Table 6-25 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain.6-69 Table 6-19 Negotiation and planned data of the ALD...............................2-66 Table 2-36 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group (over IP).............................................6-94 Table 6-23 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group..........................................................................................................................2-65 Table 2-35 Negotiation and planned data of the IPCP................................................................................................6-62 Table 6-16 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain..............................................................................................................................6-86 Table 6-21 Negotiation and planned data of the physical NodeB....6-87 Table 6-22 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU...............6-81 Table 6-20 Module information...................4-12 Table 5-1 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB.............................................Tables NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Table 2-33 Negotiation and planned data of the IP route.....................................................................................................................................................6-21 Table 6-6 Description of the configuration pane..................................

......................................6-156 Table 6-49 Description of the configuration pane........................................................................................6-152 Table 6-46 Negotiation and planned data of the ALCAP..................................................6-164 Table 6-53 Description of the configuration pane...................................................................6-142 Table 6-39 Description of the configuration pane........................6-147 Table 6-43 Description of the configuration pane....................................................................................................................................................................6-193 Table 6-66 Description of the configuration pane................................................................................6-140 Table 6-37 Description of the configuration pane....................................................6-189 Table 6-63 Description of the configuration pane...6-134 Table 6-35 Negotiation and planned data of the UDT CES.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-175 Table 6-56 Description of the configuration pane........................................6-146 Table 6-42 Negotiation and planned data of the SAAL links..................6-159 Table 6-50 Negotiation and planned data of the OMCH (ATM)...................................................................................6-188 Table 6-62 Negotiation and planned data of the IP route...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-190 Table 6-64 Negotiation and planned data of the SCTP links...............................................................6-155 Table 6-48 Negotiation and planned data of the AAL2 PATH..................................................................................................6-120 Table 6-30 Description of the configuration pane......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-170 Table 6-55 Negotiation and planned data of the MLPPP group and MLPPP links...................................................................................................6-187 Table 6-61 Description of the configuration pane................6-180 Table 6-58 Negotiation and planned data of the DEVIP........6-137 Table 6-36 Description of the configuration pane...............................6-184 Table 6-59 Description of the configuration pane...............6-131 Table 6-34 Negotiation and planned data of the SDT CES.6-153 Table 6-47 Description of the configuration pane......................................................................................6-163 Table 6-52 Negotiation and planned data of the treelink PVC.............................................................................................................................6-130 Table 6-33 Negotiation and planned data of the fractional ATM links..................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-168 Table 6-54 Negotiation and planned data of the ppp links....6-113 Table 6-29 Negotiation and planned data of the IMA group and IMA links....6-144 Table 6-41 Description of the configuration pane........6-179 Table 6-57 Negotiation and planned data of the PPPoE links...................................6-125 Table 6-31 Negotiation and planned data of the UNI links.............6-194 Table 6-67 Negotiation and planned data of the IPCP...................................6-191 Table 6-65 Description of the configuration pane............................................NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Tables Table 6-26 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU...........................................6-143 Table 6-40 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group (over ATM).......................................................................6-195 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co................................................................................................................................6-108 Table 6-28 Negotiation and planned data of the ALD.............................................................................................................................................................................6-141 Table 6-38 Negotiation and planned data of the timeslot cross links........................................................................6-151 Table 6-45 Description of the configuration pane........................6-161 Table 6-51 Description of the configuration pane.........................................................................................................6-185 Table 6-60 Negotiation and planned data of the timeslot cross links................6-126 Table 6-32 Description of the configuration pane...................................................................................................................................................... Ltd xi ................6-150 Table 6-44 Negotiation and planned data of the NBAP.........................................................6-106 Table 6-27 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB..............................................................................................................................................................................

........................................7-7 Table 7-2 Layers and functions of the reference model of the ATM protocol..................................................................................................................................................................................6-203 Table 6-73 Description of the configuration pane..................7-7 Table 7-3 Classification and range of IP addresses.........................................................................6-239 Table 6-92 Description of the configuration pane..............................6-237 Table 6-91 Negotiation and planned data of the cell.............................................................................................................................6-235 Table 6-89 Description of the configuration pane.............................................................................................6-224 Table 6-85 Negotiation and planned data of the cell....................................6-207 Table 6-76 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group whose destination IP network segment is bound......6-209 Table 6-77 Description of the configuration pane.....................7-18 xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.......................................................................................6-221 Table 6-84 Negotiation and planned data of the sector...........................................................6-219 Table 6-83 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB.................................................................................................................................................6-211 Table 6-78 Negotiation and planned data of the IP clock links...................................................................................................................................................................................6-201 Table 6-72 Description of the configuration pane......................................................................... Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) ................................................6-236 Table 6-90 Negotiation and planned data of the sector.................................................................................6-246 Table 7-1 Functions of the ATM user plane.......................................6-226 Table 6-86 Description of the configuration pane.............6-214 Table 6-81 Negotiation and planned data of the IPQoS......6-204 Table 6-74 Negotiation and planned data of the OMCH (IP)....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-212 Table 6-79 Description of the configuration pane..............................................................................................................................................6-200 Table 6-71 Negotiation and planned data of the IP PATH....................6-215 Table 6-82 Description of the configuration pane...............6-232 Table 6-87 Description of the configuration pane...........................................7-13 Table 7-4 Configuration differences between NodeBs in direct/cascading connections.................................................. and ATM management plane...............................................................................6-233 Table 6-88 Description of the configuration pane................................................................................................6-197 Table 6-69 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group (over IP)...............................................................................................6-198 Table 6-70 Description of the configuration pane.....6-206 Table 6-75 Description of the configuration pane...............................................Tables NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Table 6-68 Description of the configuration pane...............................................................6-213 Table 6-80 Description of the configuration pane.......................................... ATM control plane.............................................................................................6-245 Table 6-93 Description of the configuration pane................................................

the NodeB.. that is.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide About This Document About This Document This describes how to use the CME to configure a new site. BTS3812A. DBS3800. In addition. This document serves as a guideline on how to configure the initial data for the NodeB. That is. The content involves two parts. during network construction or network optimization. template files. and iDBS3800. Ltd 1 . Purpose NOTE This document describes the following models of NodeBs: BTS3812E. and configuration files. During network deployment or network optimization. this document also provides the reference information for the configuration. how to prepare data for NodeB initial configuration and how to add data to the NodeB through manual operations. you need to prepare the configuration file for each NodeB and load the file to the NodeB in commissioning so as to ensure that the NodeB works as designed. BTS3812AE. Versions Product Names WRAN CME Versions V100R005 NodeB Versions Product Names BTS3812A BTS3812AE BTS3812E DBS3800 iDBS3800 Versions V100R010 V100R010 V100R010 V100R010 V100R010 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration This provides the related concepts to be referenced during the process of the NodeB initial configuration. bandwidth resources. 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration This describes the preparations you must make before configuring initial data to the NodeB.. connections with other devices. This method is used to adjust the data after a template file or a configuration file is imported. 5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial) This describes how to add a NodeB through a configuration file if the configuration file is applicable to the NodeB. Change History For details. and methods of NodeB initial configuration.About This Document NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Intended Audience This document is intended for: l l l Field engineers Network operators System engineers Before you read this guide. refer to Changes in NodeB Initial Configuration Guide. 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial) This describes how to configure the NodeB through the template file if the configuration type of the NodeB is one of the typical configuration types of the template file. 3 NodeB Initial Configuration This describes how to add a NodeB on the CME. Organization 1 Introduction to NodeB Initial Configuration This provides the definition and describes the scenarios. The preparations must be based on the network planning. Conventions 1. 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) This describes how to manually add a NodeB. tools. Symbol Conventions The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows 2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and the NodeB hardware resources. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . it is recommended that you reference the CME User Guide.

if not avoided. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which.folders..} [ x | y | . Terminal display is in Courier New.. General Conventions Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New 3. Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.log in as user root . could result in minor or moderate injury.. Names of files. Book titles are in italics.and users are in boldface.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide About This Document Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk that.. Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. could cause equipment damage.. } * Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command Conventions Convention Boldface Italic [] {x | y | . Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save your time.A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected. Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.directories. Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. if not avoided.One is selected. ] { x | y | .. Command arguments are in italic. data loss. DANGER WARNING CAUTION TIP NOTE 2. will result in death or serious injury. Ltd 3 . For example. or unexpected results. if not avoided.One or none is selected.. Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars. and performance degradation. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that.

press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position. Mouse Operation Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.A minimum of zero or a maximum of all can be selected.For example.and dialog titles are in boldface..pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently..window.click OK. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Keyboard Operation Convention Key Key1+Key2 Key1.About This Document NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Convention [ x | y | .parameters. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Press the keys in turn. For example. 4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 6. GUI Conventions Convention Boldface > Description Buttons.choose File > Create > Folder ..For example. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. 5.tabs. ] * Description Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. 4.For example.Key2 Description Press the key.menus.A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.pressing Alt. For example.

4 NodeB Initial Configuration Methods This describes three methods of the NodeB initial configuration.xml format is generated.. a tool for NodeB initial configuration. 1.1 Definition of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB initial configuration is the process of preparing and configuring the data after the NodeB hardware components are installed. 1. this tool can be used for initial configuration and data reconfiguration for the NodeB and the RNC. Ltd 1-1 . and methods of NodeB initial configuration. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 NodeB Initial Configuration Tool WRAN CME. a data configuration file in . Select an appropriate configuration method depending on the scenario. and manually adding a NodeB. 1. provides an integrated solution to RAN data configuration. adding a NodeB through a configuration file. network planning. In addition.2 NodeB Initial Configuration Scenarios This describes the scenarios of the NodeB initial configuration. 1. tools. The configuration is based on the NodeB hardware components. and data negotiation between the NodeB and other equipment.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 1 Introduction to NodeB Initial Configuration 1 Introduction to NodeB Initial Configuration About This Chapter This provides the definition and describes the scenarios. You can perform the NodeB initial configuration through any of the following methods: Adding a NodeB through a template file. After the configuration.

For details about data reconfiguration. Select an appropriate configuration method depending on the scenario.2 NodeB Initial Configuration Scenarios This describes the scenarios of the NodeB initial configuration. The configuration is based on the NodeB hardware components. This ensures normal data exchange between the NodeB and the RNC. After the configuration. refer to the CME User Guide. 1. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . reconfigure the data in online configuration mode to expand the capacity of existing NodeBs. this tool can be used for initial configuration and data reconfiguration for the NodeB and the RNC. The scenarios are as follows: l l A new NodeB is required during the initial phase of network construction. network planning.1 Definition of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB initial configuration is the process of preparing and configuring the data after the NodeB hardware components are installed. 1.1 Introduction to NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 1. and data negotiation between the NodeB and other equipment. and manually adding a NodeB. You can perform the NodeB initial configuration through any of the following methods: Adding a NodeB through a template file. The GUI-based CME provides the operating platform for RAN data configuration. The Iub interface data at the transport layer is consistent with that at the RNC.4 NodeB Initial Configuration Methods This describes three methods of the NodeB initial configuration. NOTE During network optimization. provides an integrated solution to RAN data configuration. In addition. The configuration file must meet the following requirements: l l The data is intact. For details on how to use the WRAN CME.3 NodeB Initial Configuration Tool WRAN CME.xml format is generated. Table 1-1 lists the methods and scenarios of the NodeB initial configuration. 1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A new NodeB is required during network optimization. adding a NodeB through a configuration file. refer to RAN Reconfiguration Guide (CMEBased). a data configuration file in . 1. correct.. a tool for NodeB initial configuration. and compatible with the physical configuration of the equipment.

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 1 Introduction to NodeB Initial Configuration Table 1-1 DBS3800 initial configuration methods and scenarios Method 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial) 5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial) 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Scenario The actual configuration type is the same as or similar to the template file. If you need to configure multiple NodeBs with the same or similar configurations. you are recommended to manually perform data reconfiguration if required. After the template file or configuration file is imported. and then configure the other NodeBs by modifying the configuration file. Ltd 1-3 .. you can create a typical configuration file for a NodeB. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

.

and the NodeB hardware resources. 2. 2. 2. bandwidth resources.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration About This Chapter This describes the preparations you must make before configuring initial data to the NodeB.4 NodeB Radio Layer Data This describes the data to be prepared for configuring the NodeB radio layer.1 NodeB Basic Data This lists the basic data for configuring logical NodeBs. The preparations must be based on the network planning.. 2.3 NodeB Transport Layer Data This describes the data to be prepared for configuring the NodeB transport layer in the ATM and the IP mode. connections with other devices.2 NodeB Equipment Layer Data This describes the data to be prepared for configuring the NodeB equipment layer. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd 2-1 .

2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2. NON_SHARED: indicates that only the network operator specified by the CnOpIndex parameter can browse the information of this logical NodeB and the that of the corresponding physical NodeB 0 l Negotiati on with the destinati on Telecom operator index CnOpIndex This parameter is valid only when the SharingSupport parameter is set to NON_SHARED. The type must match the type of the interface board at the RNC. You can define the logical NodeB before configuring it as a physical NodeB. Value range: 0 through 3 Resource manageme nt mode RscMngM ode Defines the resource management mode when the bandwidth is allocated Optional parameters: l l SHARE SHARE EXCLUSIVE Issue 01 (2008-06-25) 2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Table 2-1 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB Input Data NodeB ID Field Name NodeB_Id Description The NodeB ID is automatically allocated.1 NodeB Basic Data This lists the basic data for configuring logical NodeBs. Ltd . You are recommended to name the NodeB according to its geographical location. Optional parameters: l l l Exampl e 1 Source Name of the NodeB NodeB_Na me NodeB_ 1 Network planning Bearer type IubBearerT ype ATM_T RANS ATM_TRANS IP_TRANS ATMANDIP_TRANS NON_S HARED Sharing support SharingSup port Whether to share NodeB information Optional parameters: l SHARED: indicates that all network operators can browse the information of this logical NodeB and that of the corresponding physical NodeB. This parameter indicates the name of the NodeB. Identify the transmission type of the Iub interface for the RNC..

Optional parameters: l l FALSE TRUE FALSE Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.164 address). this address is called E. This parameter is valid only when IubBearerType is set to IP_TRANS or ATMANDIP_TRANS. 15 digits) must be a BCD code.. This parameter is invalid when IubBearerType is set to IP_TRANS. If the DSP are not all 0s. called DSP. This parameter is valid only when TransDelay is set to SUPPORT.164A. If the following part. are all 0s. H'39 (indicating a DCC address) or H'47 (indicating an ICD address). You need to set the first byte of the ATM address to H'45 (indicating an E. The ATM addresses are allocated in the ATM network and cannot be repeated. Value range: 42 bytes (including the prefix H') Exampl e H'39010 1010101 01 0101010 1010101 01 0101010 101 Source Hybrid transport flag IPTransAp artInd Identifies whether hybrid transport is supported over the Iub interface.164e. Value range: 0 through 65535 - SatelliteInd Identifies the satellite transmission on the Iub interface. Ltd 2-3 .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data ATM Address Field Name NSAP Description The NodeB relevant ATM address in hexadecimal format. this address is called E. the following seven and a half bytes (that is. If the first byte is H'45. Optional parameters: l l - SUPPORT NOT_SUPPORT 10 Transmissi on delay on the Iub interface Transmissi on delay on the Iub interface in hybrid IP transport Satellite transmissio n indication TransDelay Initial round-trip transmission delay on the Iub interface in ATM circuit transport or IP dedicated transport Value range: 0 through 65535 IPApartTra nsDelay Initial round-trip transmission delay on the Iub interface in hybrid IP transport.

2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data NodeB type Field Name NodeBTyp e Description Identifies the type of the logical NodeB. Optional parameters: l l l Exampl e NORMA L Source NORMAL PICO_TYPE1 PICO_TYPE2 R6 Protocol Version ProtocolVe r Protocol version of the NodeB. LINE (clock source extracted from the Iub interface line) IP (IP clock source) l l l 2-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . This parameter is valid only when ClockWorkMode is set to MANUAL. Optional parameters: l l l l R99 R4 R5 R6 2. Optional parameters: l Example E1 Source ClockSource LINE Negotiati on with the destinatio n GPSCARD (GPS card clock source) BITS (BITS clock source): The outdoor BBU (HBBUC) cannot use this clock source.2 NodeB Equipment Layer Data This describes the data to be prepared for configuring the NodeB equipment layer. Data of the Physical NodeB Table 2-2 Negotiation and planned data of the physical NodeB Input Data Working mode of E1/T1 links Clock source Field Name E1T1WorkMod e Description The working mode of E1/T1 links depends on the state of DIP switches on the BBU or NUTI and the configuration file..

FREE (free-run mode): The free-run mode is the working mode for the clock source at an initial phase. Network planning l Working mode of the IP clock IPClockMode This parameter is valid only when ClockSource is set to IP..NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Working mode of the clock Field Name ClockWorkMod e Description Working mode of the system clock Optional parameters: l Example MANUA L Source MANUAL (manual mode): In this mode. the user specifies the clock source.) 0 Internal planning Network planning GPS feeder delay SNTP switch GPSCableDelay Delay of the GPS feeder Value range: 0 through 1000 SNTPSwitch Synchronization switch Optional parameters: l ON ON (SNTP client requires time synchronization) OFF (SNTP client does not require time synchronization) l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and automatically switching the system clock to other clock sources is not allowed. Optional parameters: l l AUTO (default value) MANUAL (This parameter is configured when the IP clock is already configured. Ltd 2-5 . such switching is not allowed. Even if the specified clock source is faulty.

10 l Synchroni zation period Demodula tion mode SyncPeriod The period in which nodes are synchronized. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .. when an E1 link is disconnected. which is important for centralized maintenance.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data IP address of the SNTP server Field Name SNTPServerIP Description The SNTP server is used to synchronize the time of multiple SNTP clients. This helps fault locating.11. Value range: 1 through 525600 DemMode Demodulation mode of the NodeB Optional parameters: l DEM_2_ CHAN DEM_2_CHAN (two-way demodulation mode) DEM_4_CHAN (four-way demodulation mode) DEM_ECON_4_CHAN (fourway economical demodulation mode) 1E-5 Network planning l l High BER thresholds of E1/T1 HighThreshold Optional parameters: l l l l 1E-3 1E-4 1E-5 1E-6 CLOSE Smooth power switch SMTHPWRSwi tch Optional parameters: l l OPEN CLOSE 2-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The SNTP server of the NodeB is the M2000: set SNTPServerIP to the M2000 host external IP address. l Example 10. The SNTP server of the NodeB can be either the M2000 or the RNC.1. especially for alarm management.1 Source Negotiati on with the destinatio n The SNTP server of the NodeB is the RNC (recommended): set SNTPServerIP to the BAM internal IP address. the NodeB and the RNC report the alarm at the same time based on SNTP. For example.

Frame structure of the optical port chip Optional parameters: l 17.1 5 255. Ltd 2-7 . 0. Optional parameters: l l AU3 AU4 TU12 Bypass unit Tu This parameter is valid only for the channelized optical interface.255.2..NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Lower and upper limits of timer setting NodeB resource distributio n mode Field Name LowerLimit Description Disabling the lower limit of the time range for the transmitter Value range: 0 through 255 Example 0 Source UpperLimit Disabling the upper limit of the time range for the transmitter Value range: 0 through 255 0 ResAllocateRul e Optional parameters: l PERFFIRST (handover performance priority mode) CAPAFIRST (capacity priority mode) PERFFI RST l NodeB IP address Subnet mask NMPT backup mode LocalIP LocalIPMask NMPTBackup Mode NAOIFrameMo de (macro NodeB) STM1FrameMo de (distributed NodeB) Au IP address of the NodeB for local maintenance Subnet mask of the NodeB IP address for local maintenance This parameter is available only for the macro NodeB.21.0 ENABLE Internal planning - STM-1 frame mode FRAMEMODE_SONET (in SONET mode) FRAMEMODE_SDH (in SDH mode) l FRAME MODE_ SDH AU3 Negotiati on with the destinatio n Managem ent unit This parameter is valid only for the channelized optical interface. Optional parameters: l l TU11 (the E1/T1 mode is T1) TU12 (the E1/T1 mode is E1) Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Only the baseboard held in slot 12 can be used. l 2-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Only the baseboard held in slot 14 can be used. SHARING (load sharing): Only the sub-board added to the NUTI held in slots 14 and 15 can be used. Group backup mode of the Iub interface board. The attributes of the board held in slot 15 remain unchanged. the NodeB uploads the CHR log to the FTP server that is at the NodeB side. The attributes of the board held in slot 13 remain unchanged. SHARING (load sharing): The NDTI and NUTI can be inserted in either slot 12 or 13. in slots 14 and 15 Optional parameters: l REDUNDANCY (active and standby backup): No sub-board can be added.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Power type of the macro NodeB Field Name PowerType Description Configuring the power type for the NodeB. namely the NDTI or the NUTI. Optional parameters: l l l Example -48 V DC Source -48 V DC 24 V DC 220 V AC OFF Report switch for call history record CHRSwitch When the NodeB CHR report switch is on. Both the board of the baseband subrack and the sub-board can be used. No subboard can be added. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . This parameter is available only for the macro NodeB. SHARIN G Internal planning l Iub interface board group backup mode IUBGroup2 Group backup mode of the Iub interface board.. namely the NUTI. in slots 12 and 13 Optional parameters: l IUBGroup1 SHARIN G REDUNDANCY (active and standby backup): The board must be the NUTI.

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration

Macro NodeB Equipment Layer Data
Table 2-3 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU Input Data NMPT Field Name NMPT Description
l

Example If backup is not required, configure the NMPT in slot 10.

Source

When the NMPT needs a backup, configure two NMPTs. The active NMPT is configured in slot 10, and the standby NMPT is configured in slot 11. When the NMPT does not need a backup, configure one NMPT. The NMPT is configured in slot 10.

l

NodeB monitoring unit

NMON

The NMON controls the RET controller and provides Boolean value monitoring interfaces such as the 32line Boolean input interface and 7-line Boolean output interface. According to the capacity of the HBBI/ NBBI, EBBI/EBOI, HULP/EULP, and HDLP/NDLP and the expected NodeB configuration, select applicable baseband boards. Optional parameters:
l

The NMON is configured in slot 16. The HBOI and the EBOI are configured in slots 0 and 1. The NUTI is configured in slot 13.

Baseboard

-

Internal planning

Transport boards

-

NDTI: One NDTI provides eight E1/ T1 ports. NUTI: One NUTI provides eight E1/ T1 ports and two FE ports. If the E1/ T1 sub-board is added to the NUTI, the NUTI can provide more E1/T1 ports.

l

Bearer mode

BearMod e

This parameter is valid only when the transport board is the NUTI. Optional parameters:
l l

IPV4

ATM IPV4

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-9

2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

Input Data IP clock switch

Field Name IPClock Switch

Description You need to set the IP clock switch on the NUTI baseboard to ENABLE if you plan to use the FE ports on the NUTI board to receive the IP clock signals. (This parameter is valid only when BearMode is set to IPV4.) Optional parameters:
l l

Example ENABLE

Source

ENABLE DISABLE 75

Line impedance

LineImp edance

Line impedance of the E1 line Optional parameters:
l l l

75 (E1 working mode) 100 (T1 working mode) 120 (E1 working mode)

HSDPA switch

HsdpaS witch

This parameter is available when the NUTI is configured or the unchannelized optical sub-board is configured on the NUTI. Optional parameters:
l

SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by R99 users, traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken into account. AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL: According to the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken into account. The RNC uses the R6 switch to perform this function. It is recommended that the RNC be used in compliance with the R6 protocol. NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or delay on the Iub interface. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the Uu interface reported by the NodeB. To perform this function, the reverse flow control switch must be enabled by the RNC.

l

AUTO_A DJUST_F LOW_CT RL

l

2-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration

Table 2-4 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group Input Data ID of the UL baseband resource group Field Name ULResou rceGroup Id Description
l

Example 1

Source

A board that is not added to the UL baseband resource group, that is, the HBBI/NBBI, EBBI/EBOI, and HULP/EULP, cannot process baseband services. An uplink baseband resource group can process a maximum of six cells. Insufficient uplink baseband resources may result in a cell setup failure. A board that is not added to the DL baseband resource group, that is, the HBBI/NBBI, EBBI/EBOI, and HDLP/NDLP, cannot process baseband services. The downlink processing units within the downlink resource group should belong to an uplink resource group. The amount of local cells supported by the resource group is determined by the amount and the specifications of the boards within the resource group.

l

l

ID of the DL baseband resource group

DLResou rceGroup Id

l

0

Internal planning

l

l

Table 2-5 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain Input Data Chain type Field Name Chain Type Description RRU topology structure Optional parameters:
l l

Example CHAIN

Source

CHAIN (chain topology) RING (ring topology) 0 Internal planning

Chain/ Ring head subrack number

Head Subrack No.

Number of the subrack that holds the head BBU in the chain or ring Value range: 0 through 1

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-11

2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

Input Data Chain/ Ring head board number Head port number

Field Name Head Board No.

Description Number of the slot that holds the head BBU in the chain or ring Optional parameters:0

Example 0

Source

Head Port No.

Number of the port on the head BBU that is connected to the RRU in the chain or ring Value range: 0 through 2

0

End subrack number

End Subrack No

Number of the subrack that holds the end BBU in the ring. This parameter is applicable only to the ring topology. Value range: 0 through 1

-

End board number

End Board No

Number of the slot that holds the end BBU in the ring. This parameter is valid for only the ring topology. Optional parameters:0

-

End port number

End Port No

Number of the port on the end BBU that is connected to the RRU in the chain or ring. This parameter is valid for only the ring topology. Value range: 0 through 2

-

2-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration

Input Data Break position 1

Field Name Break Position 1

Description This parameter indicates the position of the first break point. When you add and delete an RRU at a particular position in the current RRU topology (ring or chain), set a break point at this position. After the RRU is added or deleted, delete the break point to resume the data. For RRU chain, only one break point can be set. After the setting of break point, the RRU chain is divided into two parts:
l

Example OFF

Source

The first part refers to the section between the head of RRU chain and the break point. This part of RRU service is not affected. The second part refers to the post-break point section of the RRU chain. This part of RRU service is disrupted because it is in separate status.

l

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-13

2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

Input Data Break position 2

Field Name Break Position 2

Description Second position of the break point only for the ring topology When you add and delete an RRU at a particular position in the current RRU topology (ring or chain), set a break point at this position. After the RRU is added or deleted, delete the break point to resume the data. For the RRU ring, two break points can be set. After the setting of break point, the RRU chain is divided into three parts:
l

Example -

Source

The first part refers to the section between the head the of RRU ring and the first break point. This part of RRU service can be affected. The second part refers to the section between two break points of the RRU ring. This part of RRU service is disrupted because it is in separate status. The third part refers to the section between the second break point and the end of the RRU ring. This part of RRU service can be affected.

l

l

For the RRU ring, when only one break point is set, the actual case is that two break points are set in the same position, that is, two break points overlap.

2-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration

Table 2-6 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Input Data RF Module Field Name Description
l

Example Configure either the RRU or the WRFU

Source

In 1 x 1 configuration, configure one RF module. In 3 x 1 configuration, configure three RF modules. In 3 x 2 configuration, configure three or six RF modules. In 6 x 1 configuration, configure six RF modules.

l

l

Network planning

l

RRU name RRU chain number

RRUName RRUChainNo

Name of the MRRU This parameter indicates the number of the chain to which the RRU is connected. Value range: 0 through 249

Name 0

RRU number

RRUNo

The TRUNK position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position of the main chain or ring. The BRANCH position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position where the parent node is located. The parent node refers to the RHUB. Value range: 0 through 7

2

Internal planning

Board status

BoardStatus

Blocking status of the RRU Optional parameters:
l l

UnBlock

Block Unblock TRUNK Network planning

Topology position of the RRU

ToPoPosition

Optional parameters:
l l

TRUNK (in the main ring) BRANCH (under the RHUB node)

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-15

2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

Input Data Initial correction value for the RTWP

Field Name RTWPofCarrie rCarrier numberonRx RX channel number

Description Set the initial correction value for the RTWP of the carrier and TX channel specified by the RRU. Value range:
l

Example 0

Source

Number of Carrier: 0 to 3 (MRRU/WRFU), 0 to 1 (PRRU) RX channel number:0 to 1 Initial correction value for the RTWP: -130 to +130, unit: 0.1 dB MIDDLE

l l

RRU IF offset

IFOffset

Offset direction of the Intermediate Frequency (IF) filter Optional parameters:
l

BOTTOM: Offset to bottom, that is, to the minimum value (The interference signal frequency is greater than or equal to the current receive frequency.) MIDDLE: Offset to middle, that is, no offset (no interference) TOP: Offset to top, that is, to the maximum value (The interference signal frequency is smaller than the current receive frequency.) MINUS_50M (only four carrier RRU support) PLUS_50M (only four carrier RRU support) MINUS_75M (only four carrier RRU support) PLUS_75M (only four carrier RRU support) 0

l

l

l

l

l

l

Floor

Floor

Floor for installing the RRU Value range: -100 through +1000

2-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration

Input Data Vertical

Field Name Vertical

Description Vertical position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000

Example 0

Source

Horizontal

Horizontal

Horizontal position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000

0

Table 2-7 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB Input Data RRU name RRU chain number Field Name RRUName RRUChainNo Description Name of the MRRU This parameter indicates the number of the chain to which the RRU is connected. Value range: 0 through 249 RRU number RRUNo The TRUNK position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position of the main chain or ring. The BRANCH position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position where the parent node is located. The parent node refers to the RHUB. Value range: 0 through 7 Board status BoardStatus Blocking status of the RRU Optional parameters:
l l

Example Name 0

Source

2

Internal planning

UnBlock

Block Unblock TRUNK Network planning

Topology position of the RRU

ToPoPosition

Optional parameters:
l

TRUNK (in the main ring) BRANCH (under the RHUB node) 0

l

Floor

Floor

Floor for installing the RRU Value range: -100 through +1000

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-17

2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

Input Data Vertical

Field Name Vertical

Description Vertical position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000

Example 0

Source

Horizontal

Horizontal

Horizontal position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000

0

Equipment Layer Data of the Distributed NodeB
Table 2-8 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group Input Data ID of the UL baseband resource group Field Name ULResou rceGroup Id Description
l

Example 1

Source

A board such as the HBBU or the HBBUC that is not added to the UL baseband resource group cannot process baseband services. An uplink baseband resource group can process a maximum of six cells. Insufficient uplink baseband resources may result in a cell setup failure. A board such as the HBBU or the HBBUC that is not added to the UL baseband resource group cannot process baseband services. The downlink processing units within the downlink resource group should belong to an uplink resource group. The amount of local cells supported by the resource group is determined by the amount and the specifications of the boards within the resource group.

l

l

ID of the DL baseband resource group

DLResou rceGroup Id

l

0

Internal planning

l

l

2-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration

Table 2-9 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU Input Data Board status Field Name BoardStatus Description Blocking status of the board Optional parameters:
l l

Example UnBlock

Source

Block Unblock Port 0 Internal planning

Clock source

ClockSource 8K

E1/T1 ports for extracting the Iub interface clock signals. Optional parameters:
l l

None Port 0 to port 7 ATM

Bearer mode

BearMode

Optional parameters:
l

ATM: If the bearer mode is ATM, the IP transport layer cannot use the E1/T1 ports, that is, you cannot configure the PPP or MP links. IPv4: If the bearer mode is IPv4, the ATM transport layer cannot use the E1/T1 ports, that is, you cannot configure the physical links. DISABL E Negotiati on with the destinatio n

l

HSUPA switch

HSUPA

Optional parameters:
l

ENABLE (The HSUPA is supported) DISABLE (The HSUPA is not supported)

l

Clock Mode

ClockMode

For the cascaded NodeBs, the clock of the upper-level NodeB is set to MASTER and that of the lower-level NodeB is set to SLAVE. If the value is not specified, the original clock mode is retained. Optional parameters:
l l

SLAVE

Network planning

MASTER (primary mode) SLAVE (secondary mode) HDB3 Negotiati on with the destinatio n

Line Code

LineCode

Optional parameters:
l l l

HDB3 (for E1 mode) AMI (for E1 or T1 mode) B8ZS (for T1 mode)

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-19

2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

Input Data Frame Structure

Field Name FrameStru

Description Optional parameters:
l

Example E1_CRC 4_MULT I_FRAM E

Source

E1_DOUBLE_FRAME (double frame, for E1 mode) E1_CRC4_MULTI_FRAME (CRC-multiframe, for E1 mode) T1_SUPER_FRAME (super frame, for T1 mode) T1_EXTENDED_SUPER_FRA ME (extended super frame, for T1 mode)

l

l

l

HSDPA switch

HsdpaSwitch

Optional parameters:
l

SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by R99 users, traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken into account. AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL : According to the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken into account. The RNC uses the R6 switch to perform this function. It is recommended that the RNC be used in compliance with the R6 protocol. NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or delay on the Iub interface. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the Uu interface reported by the NodeB. To perform this function, the reverse flow control switch must be enabled by the RNC.

AUTO_A DJUST_ FLOW_C TRL

l

l

Time delay threshold

HsdpaTD

When the time delay is lower than this threshold, you can infer that the link is not congested. Value range:0 to 20

4

2-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

Default (default mode): indicates that the system detects and reports the alarms in default mode. CUSTOM (customized mode): indicates that the UE can change the binding relation. Optional parameters: l HIGH (alarms related to high impedance) LOW (alarms related to low impedance) l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the system reports the alarm and set the alarm Bool based on the customer specified ID. - l l Internal planning Alarm ID Alarm voltage AlarmId ALarmVolta ge This parameter is valid only when WorkMode is set to CUSTOM. In such mode. the UE cannot set the alarm ID of this port or other parameters related to this port. All ports work in such mode by default. the port does not detect the alarms.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Discard rate threshold Field Name HsdpaDR Description The link is not congested when frame loss ratio is not higher than this threshold. that is. This parameter is valid only when WorkMode is set to CUSTOM. Value range:0 to 1000 Example 1 Source Working Mode WorkMode Optional parameters: l OFF OFF (inhibited mode): indicates that the port works in inhibited mode. that is. Ltd 2-21 .. The system reports alarms based on its own fixed setting rather than the userdefined setting.

This parameter is applicable only to the ring topology. This parameter is valid for only the ring topology. Number of the subrack that holds the head BBU in the chain or ring Value range: 0 through 1 Head Board No. Number of the port on the head BBU that is connected to the RRU in the chain or ring Value range: 0 through 2 0 Internal planning - End subrack number End Subrack No Number of the subrack that holds the end BBU in the ring. Optional parameters:0 - End port number End Port No Number of the port on the end BBU that is connected to the RRU in the chain or ring. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Value range: 0 through 1 End board number End Board No Number of the slot that holds the end BBU in the ring. Value range: 0 through 2 - 2-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Table 2-10 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain Input Data Chain type Field Name Chain Type Description RRU topology structure Optional parameters: l l Example CHAIN Source CHAIN (chain topology) RING (ring topology) 0 Chain/ Ring head subrack number Chain/ Ring head board number Head port number Head Subrack No.. Number of the slot that holds the head BBU in the chain or ring Optional parameters:0 0 Head Port No. This parameter is valid for only the ring topology.

After the setting of break point. l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. set a break point at this position. delete the break point to resume the data. The second part refers to the post-break point section of the RRU chain. This part of RRU service is disrupted because it is in separate status. This part of RRU service is not affected. only one break point can be set.. After the RRU is added or deleted. When you add and delete an RRU at a particular position in the current RRU topology (ring or chain). For RRU chain. the RRU chain is divided into two parts: l Example OFF Source The first part refers to the section between the head of RRU chain and the break point.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Break position 1 Field Name Break Position 1 Description This parameter indicates the position of the first break point. Ltd 2-23 .

This part of RRU service is disrupted because it is in separate status. the actual case is that two break points are set in the same position. the RRU chain is divided into three parts: l Example - Source The first part refers to the section between the head the of RRU ring and the first break point. The second part refers to the section between two break points of the RRU ring. This part of RRU service can be affected. set a break point at this position.. that is. 2-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The third part refers to the section between the second break point and the end of the RRU ring. For the RRU ring. when only one break point is set. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . This part of RRU service can be affected. delete the break point to resume the data. After the setting of break point.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Break position 2 Field Name Break Position 2 Description Second position of the break point only for the ring topology When you add and delete an RRU at a particular position in the current RRU topology (ring or chain). two break points overlap. l l For the RRU ring. two break points can be set. After the RRU is added or deleted.

l l Network planning l RRU name RRU chain number RRUName RRUChainNo Name of the MRRU This parameter indicates the number of the chain to which the RRU is connected. The parent node refers to the RHUB. configure three or six RF modules. The BRANCH position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position where the parent node is located. configure three RF modules. Value range: 0 through 249 Name 0 RRU number RRUNo The TRUNK position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position of the main chain or ring. configure one RF module. In 3 x 2 configuration. In 6 x 1 configuration.. In 3 x 1 configuration.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Table 2-11 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Input Data RF Module Field Name Description l Example Configure either the RRU or the WRFU Source In 1 x 1 configuration. configure six RF modules. Ltd 2-25 . Value range: 0 through 7 2 Internal planning Board status BoardStatus Blocking status of the RRU Optional parameters: l l UnBlock Block Unblock TRUNK Network planning Topology position of the RRU ToPoPosition Optional parameters: l TRUNK (in the main ring) BRANCH (under the RHUB node) l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

to the maximum value (The interference signal frequency is smaller than the current receive frequency. unit: 0. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . that is.. that is.) MINUS_50M (only four carrier RRU support) PLUS_50M (only four carrier RRU support) MINUS_75M (only four carrier RRU support) PLUS_75M (only four carrier RRU support) 0 l l l l l l Floor Floor Floor for installing the RRU Value range: -100 through +1000 2-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 dB MIDDLE l l RRU IF offset IFOffset Offset direction of the Intermediate Frequency (IF) filter Optional parameters: l BOTTOM: Offset to bottom. 0 to 1 (PRRU) RX channel number: 0 through 1 Initial correction value for the RTWP: -130 to +130. that is. to the minimum value (The interference signal frequency is greater than or equal to the current receive frequency.) MIDDLE: Offset to middle. no offset (no interference) TOP: Offset to top. Value range: l Example 0 Source Number of Carrier: 0 to 3 (MRRU/WRFU).2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Initial correction value for the RTWP Field Name RTWPofCarrier Carrier numberonRxRX channel number Description Set the initial correction value for the RTWP of the carrier and TX channel specified by the RRU.

. The BRANCH position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position where the parent node is located. Ltd 2-27 .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Vertical Field Name Vertical Description Vertical position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000 Example 0 Source Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000 0 Table 2-12 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB Input Data RRU name RRU chain number Field Name RRUName RRUChainNo Description Name of the MRRU This parameter indicates the number of the chain to which the RRU is connected. Value range: 0 through 7 Board status BoardStatus Blocking status of the RRU Optional parameters: l l Example Name 0 Source 2 Internal planning UnBlock Block Unblock TRUNK Network planning Topology position of the RRU ToPoPosition Optional parameters: l TRUNK (in the main ring) BRANCH (under the RHUB node) 0 l Floor Floor Floor for installing the RRU Value range: -100 through +1000 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Value range: 0 through 249 RRU number RRUNo The TRUNK position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position of the main chain or ring. The parent node refers to the RHUB.

RET 1 Internal planning Example N0A Source Network planning Device Name 2-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. The maximum length is a string of 31 characters. this parameter is unavailable. When dual-polarized RET is configured and the value is NOA. DeviceName Name of the ALD.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Vertical Field Name Vertical Description Vertical position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000 Example 0 Source Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000 0 ALD Data Table 2-13 Negotiation and planned data of the ALD Input Data Antenna connector number Field Name AntennaNo Description In the 2G extended scenario. when single-polarized RET or STMA is configured. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . the value is NOA or NOB.

only one dual polarization RET can be installed to an ANT_Tx/RxA port. that is. and this RET is controlled through this port. Ltd 2-29 . SECTOR_SPLITTING: Sector splitting. The 2G RET is controlled through the NodeB. and these RETs are controlled through this port. that is. In other scenarios other than antenna cascading. It is an extended mode of cascaded NodeBs. this parameter is valid. that is. and these RETs are controlled through this port. The length is a 2-byte letter or number. the parameter value can be set to either DUAL (dual polarization antenna) or SINGLE (single polarization antenna).. DUAL l l Network planning l Antenna polarizatio n type RETType When the device type is either SINGLE_RET or MULTI_RET supported by the AISG protocol. a maximum of six RETs can be installed to an ANT_Tx/RxA port through a splitter.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Scenario Field Name UseCase Description Scenario of the antenna Optional parameters: l Example REGULA R Source REGULAR: Regular installation. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details about the relation between the vendor code and vendor name of the ALD. refer to the AISG protocol. Optional parameters: l In the scenario of antenna cascaded application. Internal planning l Vendor code VendorCode Vendor code of the ALD. DAISY_CHAIN: Antenna cascading. 2G_EXTENSION: 2G extension. the value of this parameter can only be DUAL. a maximum of six RETs installed to different ports can be cascaded to an ANT_Tx/RxA port through control signal cables.

AISG2.0 The subunit number of STMA and SASU can be 1 or 2. and is 0 by default. 0 l l l Antenna tilt angle Working mode of the STMA SASU gain AntTilt Downtilt of the RET antenna Value range: -100 through +300 Network planning BypassMode Optional parameters: l l NORMAL (normal mode) Bypass mode NORMA L l l GSMGain UMTSGa in According to different types of channels. The maximum length is a 17-byte letter or number. When multiple antennas support 6 subunits. the SASU gain can be divided into the following two types: l 0 GSMGain indicates the SASU gain in the GSM channel. the subunit number ranges from 1 to 2. the subunit number ranges from 1 to 6.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Equipmen t serial number Antenna subunit number Field Name SerialNo Description Serial number of the ALD.1 The subunit number of STMA can only be 0. Value range: 0 through 255.. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . l 2-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Value range: 0 through 255. When multiple antennas do not support 6 subunits. UMTSGain indicates the SASU gain in the UMTS channel. Select different subunit numbers according to different antenna device types: l Example - Source SubUnit 0 AISG1. The subunit number for a single antenna is not displayed.

Ltd 2-31 .. The SASU needs to inform the GSM that a TMA is connected to the BTS antenna when the UE sets a relatively high gain for the GSM Rx channel through the WCDMA NodeB.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data DC switch on the SASU antenna connector Field Name DCSwitch Description DC switch (on the SASU antenna connector) status When the status is set to GSM. The easiest method is that you add a DC load to the GSM BTS. Value range: 0 through 255 STMA gain Gain 0 Data of the Iub Transmission Sharing Function Table 2-14 Data of the Iub transmission sharing function Input Data Source logical cell ID Source FACH ID Destination logical cell ID Destination FACH ID Field Name SrcCellId SrcFachId DestCellId DestFachId Description Value range: 0 through 65535 Value range: 0 through 255 Value range: 0 through 65535 Value range: 0 through 255 Source Network planning Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the DC power load of the SASU GSM cannot be started. the GSM BTS is informed of the TMA connected to the antenna by checking the DC power of the antenna. Optional parameters: l Example UMTS Source GSM (The GSM feeder supplies the power) UMTS (The UMTS feeder supplies the power) OFF 20 l l SASU GSM DC power load DCload The DC power load is applied to the TMA that simulates the GSM system. In this situation.

2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2. Field Name SlotNo Description Number of slot where the NDTI or NUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15 hold only the NUTI) Value range: 12 through 15 Sub-board type SubBdType Type of the sub-board where the E1/ T1 port used by the IMA link is located Optional parameters: l l l Example 14 Source Baseboard E1 CoverBoard: E1 coverboard Channelled CoverBoard: channelized optical sub-board When SubBdType is BaseBoard. When SubBdType is E1 CoverBoard. Optional parameters: l l l l D128 D32 D64 D128 D256 2-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the value range is 0 through 3. Transport Layer Data (over ATM) Table 2-15 Negotiation and planned data of the IMA group and IMA links Input Data Slot No. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Therefore.3 NodeB Transport Layer Data This describes the data to be prepared for configuring the NodeB transport layer in the ATM and the IP mode. Channelle d CoverBoa rd IMA group ID IMAId l 0 Internal planning l l Transmit frame length IMATxFram eLength Longer transmit frame can enhance transmission efficiency but reduces error sensitivity. the default value is recommended. the value range is 0 through 3. When SubBdType is Channelled CoverBoard.. the value range is 0 through 1.

there is a change in the relative delay between links. Thus. If there are less than three active links. 25 l l Differentia l maximum delay IMADiffMa xDelay Different transmission links in an IMA group may result in different transmission delays.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Minimum active links Field Name IMAMinAct iveLinks Description Threshold for identifying the availability of the IMA group For example.. l Example 1 Source When SubBdType is BaseBoard. the value range is 1 through 32. if the value is 3. Value range: 4 through 100 Scramble mode ScrambleMo de Optional parameters: l ENABLE DISABLE (unavailable. When SubBdType is Channelled CoverBoard. the value range is 1 through 8. Ltd 2-33 . the scramble mode is disabled) ENABLE (The scramble mode must be enabled if the E1/T1 transmission uses AMI line codes. which is called link differential delay. the IMA group is unavailable. the bandwidth of each IMA link in the IMA group is added by 64 kbit/s. When SubBdType is E1 CoverBoard. The LODS alarms are reported when the link differential delay occurs. there are at least three active IMA links in an IMA group and thus this group is available.) DISABLE l Timeslot 16 support TimeSlot16 The channelized optical sub-board does not support this function. Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE After this parameter is enabled. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the value range is 1 through 8.

the value range is 0 through 7. When SubBdType is Channelled CoverBoard. l Example 0. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken into account. AUTO_A DJUST_F LOW_CT RL l l HSDPA switch HsdpaSwitc h Optional parameters: l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by R99 users. AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL : According to the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL. the value range is 0 through 62. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken into account.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Link number Field Name LinkNo Description Number of the E1/T1 ports for the links in an IMA group. the reverse flow control switch must be enabled by the RNC. To perform this function. The RNC uses the R6 switch to perform this function. 1. you can infer that the link is not congested. 2 Source Negotiati on with the destinati on When SubBdType is BaseBoard. l Internal planning l Time delay threshold HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower than this threshold. It is recommended that the RNC be used in compliance with the R6 protocol. When SubBdType is E1 CoverBoard. the value range is 0 through 7. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .. NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or delay on the Iub interface. Value range: 0 through 20 4 2-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the Uu interface reported by the NodeB.

the value range is 0 through 7. When SubBdType is Channelled CoverBoard. the scramble mode is disabled) ENABLE (The scramble mode must be enabled if the E1/T1 transmission uses AMI line codes. ENABLE l l Scramble mode ScrambleMo de Optional parameters: l DISABLE (unavailable.) l Internal planning Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When SubBdType is E1 CoverBoard.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Discard rate threshold Field Name HsdpaDR Description The link is not congested when frame loss ratio is not higher than this threshold. the value range is 0 through 62. the value range is 0 through 7. Ltd 2-35 . Value range: 0 through 1000 Example 1 Source Table 2-16 Negotiation and planned data of the UNI links Input Data Slot No. Field Name SlotNo Description Number of slot where the NDTI or NUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15 hold only the NUTI) Value range: 12 through 15 Sub-board type SubBdType Type of the sub-board where the E1/T1 port is located by the UNI link Optional parameters: l l Example 12 Source BaseBoard Internal planning Baseboard E1 CoverBoard: E1 coverboard Channelled CoverBoard: channelized optical sub-board 3 Negotiation with the destination l Link number LinkNo Number of the E1/T1 ports for UNI links l When SubBdType is BaseBoard..

To perform this function. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken into account. The RNC uses the R6 switch to perform this function. the reverse flow control switch must be enabled by the RNC. NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or delay on the Iub interface. AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CT RL: According to the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the Uu interface reported by the NodeB. HSDPA switch HsdpaSwitc h Optional parameters: l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by R99 users. AUTO_AD JUST_FLO W_CTRL l l Time delay threshold HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower than this threshold.. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken into account. the bandwidth of the UNI link is added by 64 kbit/s. Value range: 0 through 20 4 2-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Timeslot 16 support Field Name TimeSlot16 Description The channelized optical subboard does not support this function. you can infer that the link is not congested. It is recommended that the RNC be used in compliance with the R6 protocol. Optional parameters: l l Example DISABLE Source ENABLE DISABLE After this parameter is enabled.

the timeslots must be reserved for timeslot cross connection. Field Name SlotNo Description Number of slot where the NDTI or NUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15 hold only the NUTI) Value range: 12 through 15 Sub-board type SubBdType Type of the sub-board with the E1/ T1 port available for the fractional ATM link Optional parameters: Baseboard Number of the E1/T1 port available for the fractional ATM link Value range: 0 through 1 Link number Timeslots LinkNo TSBitMap Value range: 0 through 7 The fractional ATM link provides timeslots for the 3G equipment. Ltd 2-37 . Value range: TS1 to TS31 Scramble mode ScrambleMo de Optional parameters: l Example 13 Source BaseBoar d Internal planning Port No.) l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If port 0 is configured.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Discard rate threshold Field Name HsdpaDR Description The link is not congested when frame loss ratio is not higher than this threshold.. E1T1No 0 Negotiatio n with the destinatio n Internal planning Negotiatio n with the destinatio n 1 TS24 to TS31 ENABLE Internal planning DISABLE (unavailable. Value range: 0 through 1000 Example 1 Source Table 2-17 Negotiation and planned data of the fractional ATM links Input Data Slot No. the scramble mode is disabled) ENABLE (The scramble mode must be enabled if the E1/T1 transmission uses AMI line codes.

The RNC uses the R6 switch to perform this function. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the Uu interface reported by the NodeB. you can infer that the link is not congested. Value range: 0 through 1000 1 2-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. It is recommended that the RNC be used in compliance with the R6 protocol. NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or delay on the Iub interface. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken into account. AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTR L: According to the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL. l l Time delay threshold HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower than this threshold. Value range: 0 through 20 4 Discard rate threshold HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frame loss ratio is not higher than this threshold. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken into account. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . the reverse flow control switch must be enabled by the RNC. To perform this function..2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data HSDPA switch Field Name HsdpaSwitch Description Optional parameters: l Example AUTO_A DJUST_F LOW_CT RL Source SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by R99 users.

DestPortN o Number of the destination E1/T1 ports for timeslot cross links Value range: 0 0 TS16 to TS23 13 Internal planning 3 Example 13 Source Table 2-19 Negotiation and planned data of the SDT CES Input Data Port type Field Name Type Description Type of the interface that carries the SDT CES channels Optional parameters: l l l l Example FRAATM Source FRAATM IMA UNI STM1 12 Internal planning Source slot No.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Table 2-18 Negotiation and planned data of the timeslot cross links Input Data Source slot No.. Source sub-board type PortNo Number of the slot that holds the NDTI Value range: 12 through 13 SubBdTyp e Type of the sub-board where the source E1/T1 port is located by the SDT CES channel Optional parameters: Baseboard BaseBoar d Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd 2-39 . PortNo Number of the source E1/T1 ports for timeslot cross links Value range: 2 through 3 Source timeslots Destinatio n slot No. TSBitMap DestSlotN o Value range: TS1 to TS31 Number of the slot that holds the NDTI or NUTI (The number must be identical with that of the SlotNo) Value range: 12 through 15 Destinatio n port No. Field Name SlotNo Description Number of the slot that holds the NDTI or NUTI Value range: 12 through 15 Source port No.

The number of filling bytes is that of valid bytes filled in each ATM cell. Field Name PortNo Description Number of the source E1/T1 ports for the SDT CES channel Value range: 0 through 1 Example 0 Source Partial fill level PFL ATM cell has 48-byte payloads.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Source port No. SlotNo Number of slot where the NDTI or NUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15 hold only the NUTI) Value range: 12 through 15 Destinatio n subboard type SubBdTyp e Type of the sub-board where the destination E1/T1 port is located by the SDT CES channel Optional parameters: l l l BaseBoar d Baseboard E1 CoverBoard: E1 coverboard Channelled CoverBoard: channelized optical sub-board Unchannelled CoverBoard: unchannelized optical sub-board l 2-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Each timeslot occupies one byte. and the value should be greater than the number of selected timeslots except for slot 0. Except for the first byte. 47 Timeslots TSBitMap Timeslot 0 is unavailable. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . the other 47 bytes can be used to transmit timeslot signals. Value range: 4 through 47.. Value range: TS1 to TS31 TS1 to TS7 13 Destinatio n slot No.

the value range is 0 through 1./ IMA ID LinkNo/ IMAId Number of the fractional ATM or UNI link. When Type is set to UNI and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is Channelled CoverBoard. When Type is STM1.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Destinatio n port No. When Type is set to UNI and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is Channelled CoverBoard. 0 l l Link No. l Example 0 Source When Type is set to FRAATM and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is BaseBoard. the value range is 0 through 3. the value range is 0 through 7. l l l l l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the value range is 0 through 7. the value range is 0 through 62. When Type is set to IMA and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is Channelled CoverBoard. l When Type is set to FRAATM and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is BaseBoard. or of the STM1 optical port that carries the SDT CES channel. Field Name E1T1No Description Number of the destination E1/T1 port for the SDT CES channel (This parameter is valid only when Type is set to FRAATM or UNI).. When Type is set to UNI and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is BaseBoard or E1 CoverBoard. Ltd 2-41 . When Type is set to IMA and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is BaseBoard or E1 CoverBoard. of the IMA group. the value range is 0 through 62. the value range is 0 through 7. the value range is 0 through 1. When Type is set to UNI and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is BaseBoard or E1 CoverBoard. the value range is 0 through 7.

When the interface board is the NUTI. the value range is 32 through 127. Value range: 0 through 31 (six successive values from 0 to 31) Example 1 Source Virtual channel identifier VCI Identifier of the virtual channel for the SDT CES channel. l Table 2-20 Negotiation and planned data of the UDT CES Input Data Port type Field Name Type Description Type of the interface that carries the UDT CES channel Optional parameters: l l Example IMA Source IMA STM1 12 Internal planning Source slot No. PortNo Number of the slot that holds the NDTI Value range: 12 through 13 SubBdTyp e Type of the sub-board where the source E1/T1 port is located by the UDT CES channel Optional parameters: Baseboard Number of the source E1/T1 ports for the UDT CES channel Value range: 0 through 1 BaseBoar d PortNo 1 2-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Virtual channel identifier Field Name VPI Description Identifier of the virtual channel for the SDT CES channel. l 32 When the interface board is the NDTI. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . the value range is 32 through 255.. Source sub-board type Source port No.

In order not to affect the transmission bandwidth. and the transmission delay reaches the maximum value.. the transmission bandwidth equals to the original transmission bandwidth x (53/ PFL). When the value reaches the maximum of 47.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Partial fill level Field Name PFL Description The value of the partial fill level affects both the transmission bandwidth and the transmission delay. SlotNo Number of slot where the NDTI or NUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15 hold only the NUTI) Value range: 12 through 15 Destinatio n subboard type SubBdTyp e Type of the sub-board where the destination E1/T1 port is located by the UDT CES channel Optional parameters: l l l Channelle d CoverBoa rd Baseboard E1 CoverBoard: E1 coverboard Channelled CoverBoard: channelized optical sub-board Unchannelled CoverBoard: unchannelized optical sub-board l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and the transmission delay is reduced. the transmission bandwidth is not affected. Value range: 4 through 47 Example 47 Source Tx Clock Mode TxClockM ode Optional parameters: l ACM NOACM (non-adaptive clock mode) NOACM (adaptive clock mode) 14 l Destinatio n slot No. when the value is smaller than 47. set the default value to 47. Ltd 2-43 .

the value range is 0 through 1. the value range is 32 through 127. 1 l l Virtual channel identifier VPI Identifier of the virtual channel for the UDT CES channel. When the interface board is the NUTI. l Example 0 Source When Type is set to IMA and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is BaseBoard or E1 CoverBoard. the value range is 32 through 255. l Table 2-21 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group (over ATM) Input Data Port type Field Name Type Description Type of the interface that carries the transmission resource group Optional parameters: l l l l Exampl e IMA Source FRAATM IMA UNI STM1 1 Internal planning Resource group number RscgrpNo Value range: 0 through 3 2-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When Type is set to IMA and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is Channelled CoverBoard. the value range is 0 through 3. When Type is STM1.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Optical port No./ IMA ID Field Name LinkNo/ IMAId Description Number of the IMA group or STM1 optical port that carries the UDT CES channel. Value range: 0 through 31 (six successive values from 0 to 31) Virtual channel identifier VCI Identifier of the virtual channel for the UDT CES channel. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .. l 32 When the interface board is the NDTI. the value range is 0 through 1.

. Value range: 32 through 15800 Exampl e 5000 Source Receive bandwidth RxBandwid th Receive bandwidth of the resource group. Value range: l Macro NodeB: 0 through 31 (six successive values from 0 to 31) Distributed NodeB: 0 through 29 34 l Virtual channel identifier VCI Identifier of the virtual channel for the SAAL links. Ltd 2-45 . Value range: 30 through 20000 5000 Table 2-22 Negotiation and planned data of the SAAL links Input Data Port type Field Name Type Description Type of the interface that carries the SAAL links Optional parameters: l l l l Exampl e IMA Source FRAATM IMA UNI STM1 1 Negotiati on with the destinatio n Virtual channel identifier VPI Identifier of the virtual channel for the SAAL links. Value range: l Macro NodeB: 32 through 255 (NDTI) or 32 through 127 (NUTI) Distributed NodeB: 32 through 127 l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Transmit bandwidth Field Name TxBandwidt h Description The transmit bandwidth of the resource group cannot exceed the bandwidth of the port to which the resource group belong.

NRTVBR or UBR+. - l Minimum cell rate MCR The value of the MCR of the ATM channel should be smaller than that of the PCR.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Service type Field Name ServiceTyp e Description When this parameter is set to CBR or UBR. the value range is 31 to 6760. when this parameter is set to UBR+. you need to set parameters PCR and MCR. NRTVBR or UBR+. provides cell rate guarantee) UBR (unspecified bit rate) 200 l l l l Peak cell rate PCR Peak cell rate of the ATM channel When the service type is RTVBR. Value range: 30 through 6759 Sustainable cell rate SCR The value of the SCR of the ATM channel should be smaller than that of the PCR. the value of this parameter should be greater than that of the SCR or MCR.. When the service type is RTVBR. l When the service type is CBR or UBR. the value range is 30 to 6760. you need to set parameters SCR and PCR. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . when this parameter is set to RTVBR or NRTVBR. Optional parameters: l Exampl e RTVBR Source CBR (applicable to the CES channel) RTVBR (applicable to services carried on the AAL2 path) NRTVBR (applicable to services carried on the AAL5 path) UBR+ (unspecified bit rate. This parameter is valid only when the service type is UBR+. you need to set only the parameter PCR. This parameter is valid only when the service type is RTVBR or NRTVBR Value range: 30 through 6759 180 2-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Optional parameters: l l Exampl e ENABL E Source DISABLE ENABLE 1 Internal planning Resource group number RscgrpNo Number of the ATM transmission resource group Value range: 0 through 3 Table 2-23 Negotiation and planned data of the NBAP Input Data Port type Field Name PortType Description Optional parameters: l l Exampl e NCP Source NCP CCP 1 Internal planning Negotiati on with the destinati on SAAL number NCP Flag SAALNo SAAL number that carries the NCP Value range: 0 through 63 Flag Master/slave flag for the transmission channels Optional parameters: l l MASTE R SLAVE MASTER CCP Internal planning Port type PortType Optional parameters: l l NCP CCP 0 Internal planning Port No.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Join the resource group Field Name JoinRscgrp Description Specify whether this link should be added to the resource group. CCP PortNo Number of the CCP port. This parameter is valid only when PortType is set to CCP.. Ltd 2-47 . Value range: 0 through 65535 SAAL number SAALNo SAAL number that carries the CCP Value range: 0 through 63 2 Negotiati on with the destinati on Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Value range: 0 through 31 Network service access point NSAP The full name is: Net service access point. When the NodeB uses ATM transmission. The exchange node cannot be carried on the SAAL link on the NDTI. This parameter is valid only when the parameter NodeType is set to ADJNODE.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Flag Field Name Flag Description Master/slave flag for the transmission channels Optional parameters: l l Exampl e MASTE R Source SLAVE MASTER Internal planning Table 2-24 Negotiation and planned data of the ALCAP Input Data Node type Field Name NodeType Description The exchange node must be configured before configuring the adjacent node. indicating the lower-level NodeB) Internal planning l Adjacent node identifier ANI Identify an adjacent node.. indicating that the NodeB has a lower-level NodeB) ADJNODE (adjacent node. H'390101 01010101 01010101 01010101 01010101 01 SAAL number SAALNo SAAL number that carries the ALCAP Value range: 0 through 63 3 2-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Optional parameters: l l Example LOCAL Source LOCAL (peer node) HUB (switch node. The address is a hexadecimal with a length of 20 bytes (excluding the prefix H'). the NSAP is the address of the NodeB that is connected to the AAL2 path. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Table 2-25 Negotiation and planned data of the AAL2 PATH Input Data Port type Field Name Type Description Type of the interface that carries the AAL2 PATH Optional parameters: l l l l Example IMA Source FRAATM IMA UNI STM1 RT PATH type PathType Type of the AAL2 path. Optional parameters: RT. which indicates the desired service type carried on the path. HSPA_RT. Ltd 2-49 . NRT. Value range: l Virtual channel identifier VPI 1 Macro NodeB: 0 through 31 (six successive values from 0 to 31) Distributed NodeB: 0 through 29 37 l Virtual channel identifier VCI Identifier of the virtual channel for the AAL2 path. Value range: l Negotiat ion with the destinati on Macro NodeB: 32 through 255 (NDTI) or 32 through 127 (NUTI) Distributed NodeB: 32 through 127 RTVBR l Service type ServiceTyp e Optional parameters: l CBR (applicable to the CES channel) RTVBR (applicable to services carried on the AAL2 path) NRTVBR (applicable to services carried on the AAL5 path) UBR+ (unspecified bit rate.. provides cell rate guarantee) UBR (unspecified bit rate) l l l l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. HSPA_NRT Identifier of the virtual channel for the AAL2 path.

l When sub-board type is BaseBoard. NRTVBR or UBR+. the value of this parameter should be greater than that of the SCR.. This parameter should be one of the bandwidth parameters for the transmission direction. 960 l Sustainabl e cell rate SCR The value of the SCR of the ATM channel should be smaller than that of the PCR. Optional parameters: l l ENABLE Internal planning DISABLE ENABLE 2-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the value range is 30 through 15800. the value range is 31 through 15800. the value range is 30 through 15799. This parameter is valid only when the service type is RTVBR or NRTVBRThis parameter should be one of the bandwidth parameters for the transmission direction. NRTVBR. When the sub-board type is Channelled CoverBoard or Unchannelled CoverBoard. Value range: 64 through 20000 Join the resource group JoinRscgrp Specify whether AAL2 path should be added to the resource group. the value range is 30 through 6759. When the sub-board type is Channelled CoverBoard or Unchannelled CoverBoard.or UBR+. This parameter acts as an important factor in flow control by the NodeB receive bandwidth. and the service type is CBR or UBR. l Example 1920 Source When the sub-board type is BaseBoard.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Peak cell rate Field Name PCR Description Peak cell rate of the ATM channel When the service type is RTVBR. 2048 l Received cell rate RCR This parameter must be consistent with the downlink bandwidth configured by the RNC. and the service type is RTVBR. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Whether or not this parameter is correctly configured will affect the effect of flow control.

provides cell rate guarantee) UBR (unspecified bit rate) l l l l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd 2-51 .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Resource group number Field Name RscgrpNo Description Number of the ATM transmission resource group Value range: 0 through 3 Example 1 Source Table 2-26 Negotiation and planned data of the OMCH (ATM) Input Data Port type Field Name Type Description Type of the interface that carries the OMCH Optional parameters: l l l l Example UNI Source FRAATM IMA UNI STM1 1 Virtual channel identifier VPI Virtual channel for the OMCH Value range: l Macro NodeB: 1 or within the VPI range of the actual board configuration Distributed NodeB: 0 through 29 33 Negotiati on with the destinati on l Virtual channel identifier VCI Virtual channel for the OMCH Value range: l Macro NodeB: 32 through 255 (NDTI) or 32 through 127 (NUTI) Distributed NodeB: 32 through 127 CBR l Service type ServiceTy pe Optional parameters: l CBR (applicable to the CES channel) RTVBR (applicable to services carried on the AAL2 path) NRTVBR (applicable to services carried on the AAL5 path) UBR+ (unspecified bit rate..

l Example 512 Source When the service type is CBR or UBR. NRTVBR or UBR+. This parameter is valid only when the service type is RTVBR or NRTVBR Value range: 30 through 6759 Local IP address of the OMCH Destination IP address of the OMCH Destination subnet mask of the OMCH Join the resource group LocalIP IP address for NodeB remote maintenance Destination IP address for NodeB remote maintenance. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .1. the value range is 31 to 6760. that is.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Peak cell rate Field Name PCR Description Peak cell rate of the ATM channel When the service type is RTVBR. 255.0 JoinRscgrp Specify whether AAL2 path should be added to the resource group.2. Subnet mask of the destination IP address for NodeB remote maintenance 10.1 DestIPMas k 255. NRTVBR or UBR+. the value range is 30 to 6760. Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE 2 Internal planning Resource group number Flag RscgrpNo Number of the ATM transmission resource group Value range: 0 through 3 Flag Master/slave flag for the remote OM channels Optional parameters: l l MASTE R SLAVE MASTER 2-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1. the value of this parameter should be greater than that of the SCR. When the service type is RTVBR. - l Sustainable cell rate SCR The value of the SCR of the ATM channel should be smaller than that of the PCR.2.10 DestIP 10.255. the IP address configured on the ATM interface board at the RNC..

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Table 2-27 Negotiation and planned data of the treelink PVC Input Data Source port type Field Name SourceType Description Type of the interface that carries the source port of the treelink PVC Optional parameters: l l l l Exampl e FRAAT M Source FRAATM IMA UNI STM1 UNI Destinatio n port type DestinationT ype Type of the interface that carries the destination port of the treelink PVC Optional parameters: l l l l FRAATM IMA UNI STM1 DISABL E Internal planning ByPassMo de ByPassMode When the NodeB is powered off or exceptions occur to the NodeB. and the value cannot be 1. Ltd 2-53 . The treelink PVC is set using the ByPassMode that thus guarantees the connection between the lower node and the RNC. the source port VPI must be within the VPI configured to the board. the source port VPI must be beyond the VPI configured to the board. the E1/T1 can be connected to the lower node by switching to the ByPassMode. l Negotiati on with the destinatio n l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and the value can be 1.. For the VC switching. For the VC switching. the SourVPI and the DestVPI must meet the conditions of the source board and the destination board respectively. Optional parameters: l DISABLE (disable the ByPassMode) ENABLE (enable the ByPassMode) 1 l Source VPI SourVPI Virtual channel used by the upper level network link l For the VP switching.

This parameter is valid for VC switching. For the VC switching. the destination port VPI must be beyond the VPI configured to the board. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Source VCI Field Name SourVCI Description Identifier of the virtual channel for the upper-level links. 32 l l Destinatio n VCI DestVCI Identifier of the virtual channel for the lower-level links. the destination port VPI must be within the VPI configured to the board.. the value range is 32 through 127 1 l Destinatio n VPI DestVPI Virtual channel used by the lowerlevel network link l For the VP switching. For the VC switching. and the value cannot be 1. the value range is 32 through 255 (NDTI) or 32 through 127 (NUTI) For the distributed NodeB. provides cell rate guarantee) 2-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the SourVPI and the DestVPI must meet the conditions of the source board and the destination board respectively. the value range is 32 through 127 RTVBR l Service type ServiceType Optional parameters: l l l l RTVBR NRTVBR UBR (unspecified bit rate) UBR+ (unspecified bit rate. the value range is 32 through 255 (NDTI) or 32 through 127 (NUTI) For the distributed NodeB. l For the macro NodeB. l Exampl e 33 Source For the macro NodeB. This parameter is valid for VC switching. and the value can be 1.

l Exampl e 400 Source When the service type is UBR. the value range is 31 to 6760. NRTVBR or UBR+. PortNo Number of the E1/T1 ports for PPP links Value range: 0 through 7 Link number LinkNo Each PPP link and each MLPPP link must have a unique number. Field Name SlotNo Description Number of the slot that holds the NUTI Value range: 12 through 15 Port No. the value range is 30 to 6760. This parameter is valid only when the service type is RTVBR or NRTVBR Value range: 30 through 6759 Transport Layer Data (over IP) Table 2-28 Negotiation and planned data of the ppp links Input Data Slot No. 380 l Sustainabl e cell rate SCR The value of the SCR of the ATM channel should be smaller than that of the PCR. NRTVBR or UBR+. the value of this parameter should be greater than that of the SCR..NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Peak cell rate Field Name PCR Description Peak cell rate of the ATM channel When the service type is RTVBR. When the service type is RTVBR. Value range: 0 through 15 Authentica tion type AuthType Optional parameters: l Example 13 Source 0 0 Internal planning NONAUTH (without authentication) PAP (with PAP authentication) CHAP (with CHAP authentication) NONAU TH l l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd 2-55 .

DISABL E Internal planning 1500 l PPP multiframe multiplexi ng Maximum received unit Restart timer of packet request response PPPMux Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE MRU Expected value sent from the peer end Value range: 128 through 1500 RestartTimer Value range: 1 through 65535 3000 2-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 111 Destinatio n IP address PeerIP 17. Otherwise.17.17. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . this field is mandatory.0. when the value is 0. The map is presented in binary format or the chart.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data User name Field Name UserName Description When AuthType is not set to NONAUTH. it is not in use. Local IP address of the PPP link. it indicates that the parameter needs to be negotiated with the RNC. Destination IP address of the PPP link l TS1 to TS15 Local IP address LocalIP 17. In non-cascading mode. ENABLE l IP header compressi on IPHC Optional parameters: l DISABLE: The IP header of the peer end is not compressed. otherwise. it is in use.17. ENABLE: The UDP/IP header of the peer end is compressed.0. this parameter specifies the IP address of a lowerlevel cascaded node. the authentication fails.0. it indicates that the parameter needs to be negotiated with an upper-level node. Value range: not greater than 64 characters Example - Source Timeslot map TSBitMap A map of the timeslots for PPP links. If a timeslot is selected. 17 Negotiati on with the destinatio n In cascading mode..17. When the value is 0.

AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL : According to the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL. The RNC uses the R6 switch to perform this function. you can infer that the link is not congested. the reverse flow control switch must be enabled by the RNC. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the Uu interface reported by the NodeB. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken into account. Value range: 0 through 1000 1 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Protocol field compress Address & control field compress HSDPA switch Field Name PFC Description Optional parameters: l l Example ENABLE Source ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE ACFC Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE AUTO_A DJUST_F LOW_CT RL HsdpaSwitch Optional parameters: l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by R99 users. Ltd 2-57 .. It is recommended that the RNC be used in compliance with the R6 protocol. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken into account. NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or delay on the Iub interface. l l Time delay threshold HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower than this threshold. Value range: 0 through 20 4 Discard rate threshold HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frame loss ratio is not higher than this threshold. To perform this function.

255. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . it is in use. Otherwise.16. this field is mandatory. Value range: not greater than 64 characters - Local IP address Local subnet mask Destinatio n IP address Port No. The map is presented in binary format or the chart.0 16. If a timeslot is selected. the authentication fails.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Table 2-29 Negotiation and planned data of the MLPPP group and MLPPP links Input Data Slot No.16. 255.. it is not in use. Value range: 0 through 15 1 Internal planning Timeslot map TSBitMap A map of the timeslots for MLPPP links. Field Name SlotNo Description Number of the slot that holds the NUTI Value range: 12 through 15 MLPPP group number Authentica tion type GroupNo MLPPP group number Value range: 0 through 3 AuthType Optional parameters: l Exampl e 13 Source 0 NONAUTH (without authentication) PAP (with PAP authentication) CHAP (with CHAP authentication) NONAU TH Internal planning l l User name UserName When AuthType is not set to NONAUTH.16. 16 0 Negotiati on with the destinati on PeerIP PortNo Number of the E1/T1 ports for MLPPP links Value range: 0 through 7 Link number LinkNo Number of the MLPPP link that joins the MLPPP group. otherwise. LocalIP LocalMask Local IP address of the MLPPP group Subnet mask of the local IP address for the MLPPP group Peer IP address of the MLPPP group 16. Each MLPPP and each PPP link must have a unique number. 111 255.16. TS24 to TS31 Negotiati on with the destinati on 2-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data IP header compressi on Field Name IPHC Description Optional parameters: l Exampl e ENABL E Source DISABLE: The IP header of the peer end is not compressed.. l PPP multiframe multiplexi ng Multi-class PPP PPPMux Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE DISABL E MCPPP Optional parameters: l l ENABLE (using the MCPPP) DISABLE (not using the MCPPP) ENABL E Maximum received unit Restart timer of packet request response Protocol field compress Address & control field compress MRU Expected value sent from the peer end Value range: 128 through 1500 1500 Internal planning RestartTimer Value range: 1 through 65535 3000 PFC Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE ENABL E ACFC Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE ENABL E Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ENABLE: The UDP/IP header of the peer end is compressed. Ltd 2-59 .

AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL: According to the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL. It is recommended that the RNC be used in compliance with the R6 protocol. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Value range: 0 through 20 4 Discard rate threshold HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frame loss ratio is not higher than this threshold. l l Time delay threshold HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower than this threshold. The RNC uses the R6 switch to perform this function. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken into account. the reverse flow control switch must be enabled by the RNC.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data HSDPA switch Field Name HsdpaSwitch Description Optional parameters: l Exampl e AUTO_ ADJUST _FLOW _CTRL Source SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by R99 users. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken into account. Value range: 0 through 1000 1 Table 2-30 Negotiation and planned data of the PPPoE links Input Data Slot No.. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the Uu interface reported by the NodeB. NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or delay on the Iub interface. To perform this function. you can infer that the link is not congested. Field Name SlotNo Description Number of the slot that holds the NUTI Value range: 12 through 15 Exampl e 13 Source Internal planning 2-60 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

0 ENABL E Negotiati on with the destinati on IPHC Optional parameters: l DISABLE: The IP header of the peer end is not compressed. Field Name PortNo Description Number of the FE port for the PPPoE link Value range: 0 through 1 Exampl e 0 Source Authentica tion type AuthType Optional parameters: l l l NONAUTH (without authentication) PAP (with PAP authentication) CHAP (with CHAP authentication) NONAU TH User name UserName This parameter is valid only when AuthType is set to PAP or CHAP. ENABLE: The UDP/IP header of the peer end is compressed. l Maximum received unit Restart timer of packet request response PPP multiframe multiplexi ng MRU Expected value sent from the peer end Value range: 128 through 1500 1450 Internal planning RestartTim er Value range: 1 through 65535 3000 PPPMux Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE DISABL E Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Value range: not greater than 64 characters - Local IP address Local subnet mask IP header compressio n LocalIP LocalMask Local IP address of the PPPoE link Subnet mask of the local IP address 12.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Port No.3.1 255..0.255. Ltd 2-61 . 255.

l l Time delay threshold HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower than this threshold. The RNC uses the R6 switch to perform this function.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data HSDPA switch Field Name HsdpaSwit ch Description Optional parameters: l Exampl e AUTO_ ADJUST _FLOW_ CTRL Source SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by R99 users. you can infer that the link is not congested. To perform this function. Value range: 0 through 1000 1 Table 2-31 Negotiation and planned data of the DEVIP Input Data Slot No. Field Name SlotNo Description Number of the slot that holds the NUTI Value range: 12 through 15 Exampl e 13 Source Internal planning 2-62 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken into account. NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or delay on the Iub interface. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the Uu interface reported by the NodeB. AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL: According to the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL. Value range: 0 through 20 4 Discard rate threshold HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frame loss ratio is not higher than this threshold. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken into account. It is recommended that the RNC be used in compliance with the R6 protocol. the reverse flow control switch must be enabled by the RNC.

12. 12. Ltd 2-63 . PPPoE: indicates the configured PPPoE link. PortNo Number of the source E1/T1 ports for timeslot cross links Value range: 2 through 3 Source timeslots TSBitMap Value range: TS1 to TS31 TS16 to TS23 2 Internal planning Example 13 Source Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For the ETH link. use the default mask.11. l Port type PortType The port types consist of the following items: l ETH ETH: indicates the available FE port on the NUTI. MLPPP: indicates the configured MLPPP group. the MLPPP group.0 Negotiati on with the destinatio n l l l Local IP address Subnet mask of the local IP address LocalIP LocalMask Local IP address of the device IP If the network is not divided into subnets. PPP: indicates the configured PPP link. PortNo represents the port number for the configured PPP link.255. and the PPPoE link. 12 255. Table 2-32 Negotiation and planned data of the timeslot cross links Input Data Source slot No.. the MLPPP group. and the PPPoE link. Field Name PortNo Description l Exampl e 0 Source For the PPP link.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Port No. 255. the port value ranges from 0 to 1. Field Name SlotNo Description Number of the slot that holds the NUTI Value range: 12 through 15 Source port No.

255. If the mask is converted into binary value.255. Has valid IP address of classes A. This parameter meets the following requirements: l Destinatio n mask DestMask 255.255.0. except the default route 0.. Field Name DestSlotN o Description Number of the slot that holds the NUTI (The number must be identical with that of the SlotNo) Value range: 12 through 15 Example 13 Source Destinatio n port No. B. 0 Destinatio n network DestNet This parameter must meet all the following requirements: Valid network address.255.0 IP AND mask must be equal to the IP address.12. l l 2-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.18. 255.11. This parameter must meet all the following requirements: IP AND mask must be equal to the IP address. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . and C. 0 is not allowed to precede 1.17.0 Network planning Next hop IP address NextHop 12. The value cannot be 255.0.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Destinatio n slot No. 1 Stays on the same network segment as the LocalIP of the bearer link. This parameter is valid only when the parameter InsertFlag is set to ETH. DestPortN o Number of the destination E1/T1 ports for timeslot cross links Value range: 0 0 Table 2-33 Negotiation and planned data of the IP route Input Data Port type Field Name ItfType Description Interface type of the route Optional parameters: l l l l Exampl e ETH Source ETH MLPPP PPP PPPoE 17.

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Table 2-34 Negotiation and planned data of the SCTP links Input Data Port type Field Name ItfType Description Type of the interface that carries the SCTP links Optional parameters: l l l l Example PPP Source Internal planning ETH MLPPP PPP PPPoE 17..0.0. the IP address of the primary physical link that carries the SCTP link.0. 111 14.0 indicates that this address is not in use. Ltd 2-65 . 0.0.0 indicates that this address is not in use.0 Negotiatio n with the destinatio n Local port number and destination port number Destination port number Automatical ly switches back to the master IP address LocalPort Local port number of the SCTP Value range: 1024 through 65535 1024 DestPort Destination port number of the SCTP Value range: 1024 through 65535 8021 IPAutoCha nge After the fault of the master IP address is rectified. DestIP SecLocalIP 0. the IP address of the standby physical link that carries the SCTP link. the services can be automatically switched back to the master IP address. the IP address of the primary physical link that carries the SCTP link.0.4 Local IP address Destination IP address The second local IP address LocalIP At the NodeB. Optional parameters: l l ENABLE Internal planning ENABLE DISABLE Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1. The IP address 0.1. The IP address 0.0. the IP address of the standby physical link that carries the SCTP link.17.17. At the NodeB. At the RNC.0 The second destination IP address SecDestIP At the RNC.0.0.

PortNo Number of the CCP port. Value range: 0 through 65535 CCP SCTP number SCTPNo SCTP number that carries the CCP Value range: 0 through 19 2 Negotiati on with the destinati on Flag Flag Master/slave flag for the transmission channels Optional parameters: l l MASTE R Internal planning SLAVE MASTER 2-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . This parameter is valid only when PortType is set to CCP..2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Table 2-35 Negotiation and planned data of the IPCP Input Data Port type Field Name PortType Description Optional parameters: l l Exampl e NCP Source Internal planning NCP CCP 1 SCTP number NCP Flag SCTPNo SCTP number that carries the NCP Value range: 0 through 19 Negotiati on with the destinati on Internal planning Flag Master/slave flag for the transmission channels Optional parameters: l l MASTE R SLAVE MASTER CCP Internal planning Port type PortType Optional parameters: l l NCP CCP 0 Port No.

the value range is 8 through 1984. the value range is 8 through 100000. When the port type is MLPPP. When the port type is PPPoE.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Table 2-36 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group (over IP) Input Data Port type Field Name ItfType Description Type of the interface that carries the IP transmission resource group Optional parameters: l l l l Example ETH Source ETH MLPPP PPP PPPoE 0 Resource group number Transmit bandwidth RscgrpNo Value range: 0 through 3 TxBandwi dth The transmit bandwidth of the resource group cannot exceed the bandwidth of the port to which the resource group belong. the value range is 8 through 31744. When the port type is PPPoE. l 10000 When the port type is ETH. the value range is 8 through 1984. Ltd 2-67 . the value range is 8 through 31744. When the port type is PPP. the value range is 8 through 100000. When the port type is MLPPP.. When the port type is PPP. l When the port type is ETH. the value range is 8 through 100000. l l l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 10000 l Internal planning l l Receive bandwidth RxBandwi dth Receive bandwidth of the resource group. the value range is 8 through 100000.

17. the receive bandwidth does not exceed the bandwidth of the resource group. l l l 2-68 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the value range is 8 through 1984. when PATH does not join the resource group. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . the receive bandwidth doe not exceed the bandwidth of the physical port. l When the port type is PPP. 121 Negotiati on with the destinatio n Network planning Destinatio n IP address DestIP Destination IP address of the IP path DSCP priority Service type DSCP TrafficType Value range: 0 through 63 Optional parameters: l l l l 60 RT RT NRT HSPA_RT HSPA_NRT 1000 Negotiati on with the destinatio n Receive bandwidth RxBandwith When PATH joins the resource group. When the port type is ETH.18. the value range is 8 through 31744.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Table 2-37 Negotiation and planned data of the IP PATH Input Data Port type Field Name ItfType Description Type of the interface that carries the IP PATH Optional parameters: l l l l Example ETH Source Internal planning ETH MLPPP PPP PPPoE 17. When the port type is PPPoE. When the port type is MLPPP. the value range is 8 through 100000.. the value range is 8 through 100000.

Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE 0 Resource group number RscgrpNo Number of the IP transmission resource group Value range: 0 through 3 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd 2-69 . the value range is 8 through 31744. When the port type is ETH. DISABLE: Path check is disabled. 500000 l l l Transmit committed burst size TxCBS Value range: 15000 to 155000000. DISABL E Internal planning Join the resource group JoinRscgrp Specify whether the IP PATH should be added to the resource group. the value range is 8 through 100000. when PATH does not join the resource group. The recommended value is 1/2 of the transmit bandwidth. the receive bandwidth doe not exceed the bandwidth of the physical port. l Example 1000 Source When the port type is PPP. When the port type is PPPoE.. the receive bandwidth does not exceed the bandwidth of the resource group. the value range is 8 through 100000.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Transmit bandwidth Field Name TxBandwith Description When PATH joins the resource group. the value range is 8 through 1984. Unit: bit Transmit excessive burst size Path check TxEBS Value range: 0 through 155000000 Unit: bit 1000000 PathCheck Optional parameters: l l ENABLE: Path check is enabled. When the port type is MLPPP.

Route binding is necessary when the peer IP address of the OMCH is on different network segments from the DestNet in the 6.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Table 2-38 Negotiation and planned data of the OMCH (IP) Input Data Bind the route Field Name BindRoute Valid Description Determine whether to bind the route. Optional parameters: l l Example YES Source NO YES ETH Port type ItfType Type of the interface that carries the bound routes Optional parameters: l l l l ETH MLPPP PPP PPPoE 11. BindDestIP Mask NextHop This parameter is valid only when the parameter BindRouteValid is set to YES..12.11.255.0 12. that is. This parameter is valid only when the port type is ETH. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . 255. 0. 12 MASTE R LocalIP Mask DestIP Flag MASTER (primary mode) SLAVE (secondary mode) Internal planning 2-70 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. IP address at the NodeB for the OMCH Mask of the IP address at the NodeB for the OMCH Destination IP address of the OMCH. the IP address of the LMT or the M2000.11.0 11.6.2 Adding an IP Route (Initial). Optional parameters: l l 255.11. 0 Negotiati on with the destinatio n Bound IP address on the destination network Bound destination mask Bound next hop IP address Local IP address Local subnet mask Destinatio n IP address Flag BindDestIP This parameter is valid only when the parameter BindRouteValid is set to YES.11.10. 1 11.255.12.11. 12 255.

over IP) or the destination IP address of the SCTP link of 6.7 Adding an OMCH of the NodeB (Initial.10 Network planning IP address at the client IP address at the server ClientIP ServerIP Obtain the NodeB IP address of the IP clock IP address at the IP clock server Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd 2-71 .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Table 2-39 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group whose destination IP network segment is bound Input Data Port type Field Name ItfType Description Type of the interface that carries the resource group Optional parameters: l l l l Example ETH Source ETH MLPPP PPP PPPoE 0 Internal planning 11. the IP address on the same network segment with BindDestIP in 6.6.10.2 55..3 Adding SCTP Links (Initial).3.11.0. Bound destination mask Destinatio n mask IPMask 255.6.0.255 Table 2-40 Negotiation and planned data of the IP clock links Input Data Port type Field Name ItfType Description Type of the interface that carries the IP clock links Optional parameters: l l l l Example PPPoE Source Internal planning ETH MLPPP PPP PPPoE 12. that is.1 0 Resource group number RscgrpNo Number of the IP transmission resource group that corresponds to the physical bearer port Value range: 0 through 3 Destinatio n IP address DestIP Bound destination IP address.1 12.3.255.

the value range is 0 through 63. Signaling priority SigPri l 7 Network planning 7 l Operation and Maintenanc e (OM) priority OMPri l l 2. The number is in a negative relation with the priority level. In DSCP rule. Example Shanghai Source Network planning 2-72 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Priority Field Name Priority Description The clock links that has the highest priority is used first. In IPPRECEDENCE rule. In DSCP rule. the value range is 0 through 7. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .. the value range is 0 through 63. the value range is 0 through 7. Value range: 0 through 1 Example 0 Source Table 2-41 Negotiation and planned data of the IPQoS Input Data Priority rule Field Name PriRule Description Optional parameters: l l Example IPPRECE DENCE Source IPPRECEDENCE DSCP In IPPRECEDENCE rule.4 NodeB Radio Layer Data This describes the data to be prepared for configuring the NodeB radio layer. Site Data Table 2-42 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB Input Data Site name Field Name Site Name Description The site is usually named after the geographical location.

however. the sector can work only in no transmit diversity mode. Ltd 2-73 .. Optional parameters: l Network planning NO_TX_DIVERSITY (no transmit diversity): one sector uses one TX channel. only one or four RX antennas can be configured. only one or two RX antennas can be configured. which can be configured only in remote sectors) l l When the number of configured RX antennas is one. which can be configured before the antenna channel is configured. TX_DIVE RSITY l Transmit diversity mode TxDiversity Mode Diversity mode of the sector. adhere to the following principles: l Example 2 Source If DemMode is set to fourway demodulation mode or four-way economical demodulation mode. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. HALFFREQ (0. TX_DIVERSITY (transmit diversity): one sector uses two TX channels.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Sector Data Table 2-43 Negotiation and planned data of the sector Input Data Number of RX antennas Field Name RxAntennaN um Description The number of RX antennas in a sector is associated with the parameter DemMode set at the NodeB equipment layer.5/0. You can define the number of RX antennas before configuring antenna channels for the sectors. If DemMode is set to twoway demodulation mode..5 frequency mode. You need to.

It is valid only when the transmit diversity mode is HALFFREQ.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Coverage type Field Name Cover Type Description This parameter is required for the remote sector. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Optional parameters: l Example - Source SAMEZONE (same coverage type) DIFFZONE (different coverage type) l 2-74 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

Offset:1380. Offset:670. 262. 187. Offset: 0 Special frequencies: {12. 87. 37. 137. 807. 62. 1837. Frequency (MHz) = (Frequency / 5) + offset Value range: 0 through 65535 l Example 9612 Source Band 1 Common frequencies: 9612 through 9888 inclusive. 862}.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Cell Data Table 2-44 Negotiation and planned data of the cell Input Data Uplink frequency Field Name UARFCNUp Link Description The UL and DL frequencies of a cell must be at the same frequency band. Offset:1450 Special frequencies: {1662. 812. 212. 287}.1 l Band 6 2-75 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Offset: 0 l Band 2 Common frequencies: 9262 through 9538 inclusive. Offset:1525 Special frequencies: None.. 787. 1712. 112.1 l Band 5 Common frequencies: 4132 through 4233 inclusive. 837. 1812.1 l Band 3 Common frequencies: 937 through 1288 inclusive. 1862}. 1687. 1787. 1737. Offset:0 Special frequencies: None. Ltd . Offset:0 Network planning l Band 4 Common frequencies: 1312 through 1513 inclusive. 162. Offset:0 Special frequencies: {782. Offset:1850. 1762. 237.

1 l Band 8 Common frequencies: 2712 through 2863 inclusive. 2637. Offset:0 2-76 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Offset:0 Special frequencies: {812.. 2662.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Field Name Description Common frequencies: 4162 through 4188 inclusive. 2487. Offset:0 Special frequencies: None.1 l Example Source Band 7 Common frequencies: 2012 through 2338 inclusive. Offset:0 l Band 9 Common frequencies: 8762 through 8912 inclusive. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . 2412. Offset:2100 Special frequencies: {2362. 2537. 2437. 2687}. 2612. 2587. 2512.837}. 2562. Offset:670. 2462. 2387. Offset:2030. Offset:340 Special frequencies: None.

1987. Offset:0 l Band 4 Common frequencies: 1537 through 1738 inclusive. 662. 2062.1 l Band 3 Common frequencies: 1162 through 1513 inclusive. 1062. 2012. 487. 2087}. 1912. 1037. Offset:0 Special frequencies: {412. 537.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Downlink frequency Field Name UARFCNDo wnLink Description The UL and DL frequencies of a cell must be at the same frequency band. Offset:0 Special frequencies: {1037. 512. Offset:1805 Special frequencies: {1887. Frequency (MHz) = (Frequency / 5) + offset Value range: 0 through 65535 l Example 10562 Source Band 1 Common frequencies: 10562 through 10838 inclusive. 562.1 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Offset:1735. 1937. Offset:670. 1012. 2037. 1032. Offset:1850. Offset:0 Special frequencies: None. 1962. 637. 587. Offset:1575 Special frequencies: None. 612. 687}. Offset:0 Special frequencies: {1007. 437. 1062}.. Offset:670.1 l Band 6 Common frequencies: 4387 through 4413 inclusive.1 l Band 5 Common frequencies: 4357 through 4458 inclusive. 1087}. 462. Ltd 2-77 . Offset:0 l Band 2 Common frequencies: 9662 through 9938 inclusive.

2637. When adding local cells. 0 Downlink resource group ID DLResource GroupId 0 Baseband resource pool type BbPoolType GEN_POO L 2-78 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Offset:0 Special frequencies: None. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Offset:0 l Band 9 Common frequencies: 9237 through 9387 inclusive. it supports a maximum of three cells. Optional parameters: GEN_POOL: general resource pool. Offset:340 Special frequencies: None. 2812. Offset:0 Uplink resource group ID ULResource GroupId The cells within an uplink resource group share the uplink resources. 2887. Offset:2175 Special frequencies: {2587. 2762.2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Field Name Description l Example Source Band 7 Common frequencies: 2237 through 2563 inclusive. One local cell is only carried on a board of its downlink resource group. 2737.. you need to select the downlink resource group. which consists of the boards located at slot 0 through slot 9. One UL resource group has a maximum of six cells. 2712. 2662. Offset:2105. 2837. 2862. 2787. 2912}. 2612. 2687.1 l Band 8 Common frequencies: 2937 through 3088 inclusive. If the UL resource group has highspeed movement cells.

TOC1 maximum output power + 3 dB] and [TOC2 maximum output power 7dB..5 frequency mode.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration Input Data Maximum transmit power Field Name MaxTxPower Description The maximum transmit power of a local or remote cell refers to that on the TOC. Value range: 150 through 180000 Inner handover radius CellInnerHan doverRadidus The inner handover radius of the cell should not be greater than the cell radius. the maximum transmit power range of the cell is: [TOC maximum output power of the power amplifier . Value range: 0 through 180000 0 29000 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.7 dB. the maximum transmit power range of the cell is: An intersection of [TOC1 maximum output power .10 dB. TOC maximum output power of the power amplifier] When the sector works in transmit diversity mode or 0. which is recommended to be set as designed according to the network planning. l Example 430 Source When the sector works in NO_TX_DIVERSITY mode. Ltd 2-79 . l Value range: 0 through 500 Cell radius CellRadius The coverage is affected by the cell radius. It is recommended to be set as designed according to the network planning. TOC2 maximum output power + 3 dB].5/0. The transmit power must be within the range that is supported by the power amplifier lest the cell is unavailable.

2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Desensitizati on intensity Field Name Desensy Description Example Source This parameter needs to be set 0 only in cells of local and remote sectors. and it is consistent with that at the RNC. and it is consistent with that at the RNC. Optional parameters: l l FALSE FALSE (not high speed) TRUE (high speed) - Rate in highspeed movement mode Spr This parameter is valid when the Hispm is set to TRUE. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Value range: 10 through 100 2-80 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. This value is not used when the sector is a distributed one. and it is consistent with that at the RNC. The data is determined in the network planning. Value range: 0 through 30 High-speed movement mode Hispm The data is determined in the network planning. The data is determined in the network planning. It is the ratio of uplink noise intensity to background noise of the receiver. Optional parameters: l l l 250 400 500 100 Ratio of the default transmit power to the RRU DefPowerLvl Cells in distributed sectors need the configuration.

this configuration mode is preferred. Step 1 Start the CME applications. Description If the configuration type of the NodeB is one of the typical configuration types defined in template files. this configuration mode is preferred.. this configuration mode is preferred. If a configuration file that is applicable to the NodeB is available.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 3 NodeB Initial Configuration 3 Procedure Step 2 Create an RNS. Manually reconfigure the data after the template file or the configuration file is imported. If you are familiar with the RAN configuration. 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial) 5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial) 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) ----End Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Option NodeB Initial Configuration This describes how to add a NodeB on the CME. Ltd 3-1 . Step 4 Add a NodeB. Step 3 Open the RNS.

.

2 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial) This describes how to create a logical NodeB.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing the Template File (Initial) This describes how to create a physical NodeB by importing a NodeB template file. the method of obtaining the file.. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 NodeB Template File This defines the NodeB template file and describes the scenarios for using the file. The physical NodeB corresponds to an actual NodeB. Thus. the Iub data at both the RNC and the NodeB sides can be consistent. 4. If the Iub interface data is configured at the RNC side.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial) 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial) About This Chapter This describes how to configure the NodeB through the template file if the configuration type of the NodeB is one of the typical configuration types of the template file. and the role of the file in the CME.5 Refreshing the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (Initial) This describes how to refresh the transport layer data of the NodeB. Ltd 4-1 . The CME can simultaneously update the Iub data at the RNC and the NodeB sides. the transport layer data. 4. 4. and the radio layer data of the physical NodeB based on the negotiated and planned data after you create the physical NodeB by importing the template file or configuration file. 4. 4.4 Reconfiguring NodeB Data (Initial) This describes how to reconfigure the equipment layer data. the data at the NodeB side is updated at the same time. The RNC uses the logical NodeB to identify the NodeB.

import a NodeB template file according to the NodeB type. The NodeB template file facilitates NodeB data configuration. The NodeB template file contains a large number of default parameters. User-defined template file.1 NodeB Template File This defines the NodeB template file and describes the scenarios for using the file. for example.xml. refer to Exporting a NodeB Template File. Role in the CME The NodeB template file can be a data source for NodeB data configuration on the CME. You can also name a NodeB template file in your own way. and the role of the file in the CME. Definition A NodeB template file contains a set of recommended data that is predefined with common configuration types. It cannot be deleted. 4. which serves as a data source for future data configuration.2 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial) This describes how to create a logical NodeB. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . The NodeB template file is named in the form of transport protocol type_demodulation mode_sector quantity_frequency quantity_transmit diversity mode. ATM_2-Channels Demodulation_3_1_Transmitter Non_diversity. Application Scenario During NodeB initial configuration on the CME. and Iub transmission modes to simplify NodeB data configuration. After configuring the NodeB data.4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 4. The NodeB template file is of the following two types: l l Template file provided with the CME software. The RNC uses the logical NodeB to identify the NodeB. You can reconfigure a NodeB template file and export it. The file is available at CME installation directory\WRANCMEV100R005\template\NodeB. WARNING The default NodeB template provided by the CME cannot be modified. 4-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details..xml. Obtaining Method The NodeB template file is provided with the CME software. demodulation modes. you can save the data configuration as a template. the method of obtaining the file.

You can define the logical NodeB before configuring it as a physical NodeB. Ltd 4-3 .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial) Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional Prerequisite The RSS or the RBS is already configured.. This parameter indicates the name of the NodeB. Value range: 0 through 3 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NON_SHARED: indicates that only the network operator specified by the CnOpIndex parameter can browse the information of this logical NodeB and the that of the corresponding physical NodeB 0 Negotiati on with the destinati on l Telecom operator index CnOpIndex This parameter is valid only when the SharingSupport parameter is set to NON_SHARED. Preparation Table 4-1 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB Input Data NodeB ID Field Name NodeB_Id Description The NodeB ID is automatically allocated. You are recommended to name the NodeB according to its geographical location. The type must match the type of the interface board at the RNC. Identify the transmission type of the Iub interface for the RNC. Optional parameters: l l l Exampl e 1 Source Name of the NodeB NodeB_Na me NodeB_ 1 Network planning Bearer type IubBearerT ype ATM_T RANS ATM_TRANS IP_TRANS ATMANDIP_TRANS NON_S HARED Sharing support SharingSup port Whether to share NodeB information Optional parameters: l SHARED: indicates that all network operators can browse the information of this logical NodeB and that of the corresponding physical NodeB.

Optional parameters: l l - SUPPORT NOT_SUPPORT 10 Transmissi on delay on the Iub interface Transmissi on delay on the Iub interface in hybrid IP transport TransDelay Initial round-trip transmission delay on the Iub interface in ATM circuit transport or IP dedicated transport Value range: 0 through 65535 IPApartTra nsDelay Initial round-trip transmission delay on the Iub interface in hybrid IP transport. the following seven and a half bytes (that is. This parameter is invalid when IubBearerType is set to IP_TRANS. If the following part. this address is called E.164e. This parameter is valid only when IubBearerType is set to IP_TRANS or ATMANDIP_TRANS. are all 0s. The ATM addresses are allocated in the ATM network and cannot be repeated.164 address). This parameter is valid only when TransDelay is set to SUPPORT. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . If the DSP are not all 0s. H'39 (indicating a DCC address) or H'47 (indicating an ICD address).4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Resource manageme nt mode Field Name RscMngM ode Description Defines the resource management mode when the bandwidth is allocated Optional parameters: l l Exampl e SHARE Source SHARE EXCLUSIVE H'39010 1010101 01 0101010 1010101 01 0101010 101 ATM Address NSAP The NodeB relevant ATM address in hexadecimal format. this address is called E.. 15 digits) must be a BCD code. You need to set the first byte of the ATM address to H'45 (indicating an E. called DSP. Value range: 0 through 65535 - 4-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the first byte is H'45. Value range: 42 bytes (including the prefix H') Hybrid transport flag IPTransAp artInd Identifies whether hybrid transport is supported over the Iub interface.164A.

. and then click NodeB CM Express in the Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. Optional parameters: l l Exampl e FALSE Source TRUE FALSE NORMA L NodeB type NodeBTyp e Identifies the type of the logical NodeB. Optional parameters: l l l l R99 R4 R5 R6 Procedure . Step 2 Double-click the editing box on the left. Optional parameters: l l l NORMAL PICO_TYPE1 PICO_TYPE2 R6 Protocol Version ProtocolVe r Protocol version of the NodeB. as shown in Figure 4-1.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial) Input Data Satellite transmissio n indication Field Name SatelliteInd Description Identifies the satellite transmission on the Iub interface. click configuration task pane. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. Ltd 4-5 .

and click to add a NodeB record. that is. refer to Adding Basic Data of the RNC (Initial. According to the prepared data. parameters SharingSupport and CnOpIndex are configured according to scenarios.4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 4-1 Physical NodeB Basic Information window NOTE The RAN Sharing Flag parameter is described as follows: l If the RAN Sharing Flag is set to YES. that is.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing the Template File (Initial) This describes how to create a physical NodeB by importing a NodeB template file. and NSAP. Step 4 Click to save the settings. Step 5 Repeat Step 3 through Step 4 to add more NodeB records. Scenario 4-6 NodeB initial configuration Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . set the information such as NodeBName. IubBearer Type. If the RAN Sharing Flag is set to NO. CME). Step 3 Select NodeBId. parameters SharingSupport and CnOpIndex do not need to be configured. when RAN sharing is not supported. when RAN sharing is supported. ----End 4. l For details.. The physical NodeB corresponds to an actual NodeB. (Parameter CnOpIndex is valid only when SharingSupport is set to NON_SHARED.

l Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. refer to 4. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial) Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional Prerequisite l The logical NodeB is configured. . The NodeB template file with the same or similar configuration type acts as the data source. click . Ltd 4-7 . For details.. Step 2 Click 4-2. as shown in Figure Figure 4-2 Physical NodeB Basic Information window Table 4-2 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Description Logical NodeB list "Create a physical NodeB" button "Delete a physical NodeB" button Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial).

The reconfiguration involves physical NodeB basic information. Step 5 Click OK. interface board addition or deletion. the transport layer data. ----End 4.. the Information dialog box is displayed. you need to manually reconfigure the radio layer data according to the actual network planning. The reconfiguration involves cell frequencies. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional NOTE After the physical NodeB is created through the template or the configuration file. The CME starts importing the template file.4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Sequence of data configuration 4 Description Physical NodeB list Step 3 Select a logical NodeB in area 1. and RF modules or RRU addition or deletion. and then click box is displayed. uplink/downlink resource groups. The Create Physical NodeB dialog Step 4 Select the values in the Series and Version drop-down lists based on the prepared data. as shown in Figure 4-3. After the physical NodeB is created through the template or the configuration file. and the import progress is displayed in the NodeB Creating dialog box. 4-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and then select a template similar to the actual NodeB configuration in the Template drop-down list. you need to manually reconfigure the equipment layer data according to the actual network planning. Click OK.4 Reconfiguring NodeB Data (Initial) This describes how to reconfigure the equipment layer data. and information related to the configured physical NodeB is displayed in area 4. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . and power. Step 6 After the template file is imported. and the radio layer data of the physical NodeB based on the negotiated and planned data after you create the physical NodeB by importing the template file or configuration file. Figure 4-3 Create Physical NodeB dialog box .

l Reconfigure the equipment layer data. For details. Thus. Ltd 4-9 .4 NodeB Radio Layer Data. Therefore. refer to the following information: l l 4. refer to: – – – 6. If the Iub interface data is configured at the RNC side.4 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the DBS3800 (Initial).5 Manually Adding the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over ATM) or 6. Scenario NodeB initial configuration (The RNC and the NodeB is directly connected without ATM switch inbetween.3 NodeB Transport Layer Data.6 Manually Adding Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over IP). refer to 6. l l Procedure l Reconfigure the equipment layer data. This function is customized. l ----End 4.3 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812E (Initial). For details. refer to 2.2 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A (Initial). The equipment layer data is reconfigured according to the NodeB type. Preparation l To reconfigure the equipment layer data.8 Adding Radio Layer Data. refer to Macro NodeB Equipment Layer Data or Equipment Layer Data of the Distributed NodeB by the NodeB type. refer to 2. the data at the NodeB side is updated at the same time. For details. For details.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing the Template File (Initial).NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial) Prerequisite The NodeB is created by importing a template file or a configuration file. Reconfigure the radio layer data. refer to 6. it is not applied to all scenarios.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing a Configuration File (Initial). 6.. the Iub data at both the RNC and the NodeB sides can be consistent.) Mandatory/ Optional.5 Refreshing the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (Initial) This describes how to refresh the transport layer data of the NodeB. 6. The CME can simultaneously update the Iub data at the RNC and the NodeB sides. To reconfigure the radio layer data. 5. To reconfigure the transport layer data. Optional Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial). refer to 6.2 Adding a BBU (Initial). refer to 6. refer to Adding Iub Interface Data to the RNC (Initial. Ensure that the VPI of the PVC at the RNC side is in the VPI value range defined in the baseband interface board at the NodeB side. the data over the Iub interface on the RNC side can be synchronized to the NodeB side. use the ATM switch with caution. the physical NodeB is configured. When data on both the RNC and the NodeB is carried over E1/T1 or optical port in the ATM transport mode and the RNC is connected to the NodeB through an ATM switch. If the optical interface board is adopted.2. l Figure 4-4 Matching relations Prerequisite l The Iub interface data at the RNC is configured. To execute the refresh function. refer to Figure 4-4.4. ensure that the NUTI is configured with the corresponding sub-board. The Iub refreshing function is supported. If the versions on both the NodeB and the RNC sides match. l l l Preparation l For the macro NodeB. cannot be guaranteed owing to the ATM switch.. For the distributed NodeB. refer to 6. For details. over ATM.2. For the matching relations. The Iub refreshing function determines that the NodeB and the RNC are directly connected.4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial) NOTE NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide l l Whether to connect the RNC and the NodeB directly depends on actual scenarios. Therefore. however. For details. For details. CME). The accuracy of refreshed data. check that the version of the RNC matches that of the NodeB.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial). For details. l 4-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . That is. The Iub refreshing function does not check whether the RNC and the NodeB are directly connected. consistency check will be executed over the Iub interface. the equipment layer is configured with the NDTI or the NUTI with bearer type of ATM or IPv4. the equipment layer is configured with the BBU with bearer type of ATM or IPv4. Before the refreshing.

at a time. Step 2 Click . More than one target NodeB needs to be 1. . click Filter. The Select NodeB window is refreshed at a time. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. The physical NodeBs are added to area 1. displayed. click in the configuration object pane. Option Description Only one target NodeB can be refreshed Go to Step 5. as shown in Figure 4-5.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial) Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. 3. and then click Step 4 Determine the target NodeB to be refreshed.. In area 2. The NodeB Selection window is displayed. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and click . In the NodeB Selection dialog box. select multiple physical NodeBs. Click Close to return to the NodeB Selection window. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. 2. Ltd 4-11 .

4-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 4-5 NodeB Selection window Table 4-3 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 Description List of candidate physical NodeBs List of target physical NodeBs Step 5 Click Next.. The PortMatch window is displayed. as shown in Figure 4-6.

and click to modify the interconnection data at the NodeB side. The Finish dialog box is displayed telling that the data is successfully refreshed. and the Confirmation dialog box is displayed. You can also reallocate the data as required. and NPN (port number) at the NodeB side.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial) Figure 4-6 Port Match window NOTE l l The data in dark blue refers to the data at the RNC side..Click OK to execute data synchronization. Before the Iub refreshing. Step 6 (Optional) Select NCN. NSBN(subrack number). and that in green refers to the data at the NodeB side. the CME automatically allocates the interconnection data such as NCN (cabinet number). NSN (slot number). Step 8 Click Finish to return to the Physical NodeB Basic Information window. ----End Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd 4-13 . Step 7 Click Next.

.

5. the data at the NodeB side is updated at the same time. 5.4 Reconfiguring NodeB Data (Initial) This describes how to reconfigure the equipment layer data.. the Iub data at both the RNC and the NodeB sides can be consistent.5 Refreshing the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (Initial) This describes how to refresh the transport layer data of the NodeB. The physical NodeB corresponds to an installed NodeB. 5. 5. the method of obtaining the file. and the role of the file in the CME. If the Iub interface data is configured at the RNC side. 5. the transport layer data. Thus. Ltd 5-1 .2 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial) This describes how to create a logical NodeB. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial) 5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial) About This Chapter This describes how to add a NodeB through a configuration file if the configuration file is applicable to the NodeB.1 NodeB Configuration File This defines the NodeB configuration file and describes the scenarios for using the file. The CME can simultaneously update the Iub data at the RNC and the NodeB sides. The RNC uses the logical NodeB to identify the NodeB.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing a Configuration File (Initial) This describes how to create a physical NodeB by importing a configuration file. and the radio layer data of the physical NodeB based on the negotiated and planned data after you create the physical NodeB by importing the template file or configuration file.

Before reconfiguring the RAN on the CME. 5. The RNC uses the logical NodeB to identify the NodeB.. import the NodeB configuration file to the CME server to synchronize the NodeB data in the CME with that on the existing network. The NodeB configuration file. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . and the role of the file in the CME. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional Prerequisite The RSS or the RBS is already configured.5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 5.2 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial) This describes how to create a logical NodeB. Application Scenario The NodeB configuration file is used in the following scenarios: l Export the NodeB configuration file to the NodeB LMT after the RAN configuration is complete on the CME.1 NodeB Configuration File This defines the NodeB configuration file and describes the scenarios for using the file. 5-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Role in the CME The NodeB configuration file can be loaded to the NodeB. is saved in . l Obtaining Method You can obtain the NodeB configuration file by exporting all the NodeB data from the CME or obtain the file from the NodeB LMT. Then load the file onto the NodeB and validate the file. Definition A NodeB configuration file contains a complete set of NodeB configuration data for proper operation of the NodeB. the method of obtaining the file. The file can be a data source for NodeB configuration on the CME. also called NodeB XML file.xml format.

You are recommended to name the NodeB according to its geographical location. NON_SHARED: indicates that only the network operator specified by the CnOpIndex parameter can browse the information of this logical NodeB and the that of the corresponding physical NodeB 0 l Negotiati on with the destinati on Telecom operator index CnOpIndex This parameter is valid only when the SharingSupport parameter is set to NON_SHARED. Optional parameters: l l l Exampl e 1 Source Name of the NodeB NodeB_Na me NodeB_ 1 Network planning Bearer type IubBearerT ype ATM_T RANS ATM_TRANS IP_TRANS ATMANDIP_TRANS NON_S HARED Sharing support SharingSup port Whether to share NodeB information Optional parameters: l SHARED: indicates that all network operators can browse the information of this logical NodeB and that of the corresponding physical NodeB. The type must match the type of the interface board at the RNC.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial) Preparation Table 5-1 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB Input Data NodeB ID Field Name NodeB_Id Description The NodeB ID is automatically allocated.. Ltd 5-3 . You can define the logical NodeB before configuring it as a physical NodeB. Value range: 0 through 3 Resource manageme nt mode RscMngM ode Defines the resource management mode when the bandwidth is allocated Optional parameters: l l SHARE SHARE EXCLUSIVE Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Identify the transmission type of the Iub interface for the RNC. This parameter indicates the name of the NodeB.

This parameter is valid only when IubBearerType is set to IP_TRANS or ATMANDIP_TRANS. are all 0s. Optional parameters: l l - SUPPORT NOT_SUPPORT 10 Transmissi on delay on the Iub interface Transmissi on delay on the Iub interface in hybrid IP transport Satellite transmissio n indication TransDelay Initial round-trip transmission delay on the Iub interface in ATM circuit transport or IP dedicated transport Value range: 0 through 65535 IPApartTra nsDelay Initial round-trip transmission delay on the Iub interface in hybrid IP transport. H'39 (indicating a DCC address) or H'47 (indicating an ICD address).164 address). This parameter is invalid when IubBearerType is set to IP_TRANS.164e. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . called DSP. this address is called E. This parameter is valid only when TransDelay is set to SUPPORT. If the DSP are not all 0s. If the first byte is H'45.164A. Optional parameters: l l FALSE TRUE FALSE 5-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the following seven and a half bytes (that is. 15 digits) must be a BCD code. this address is called E. The ATM addresses are allocated in the ATM network and cannot be repeated. Value range: 42 bytes (including the prefix H') Exampl e H'39010 1010101 01 0101010 1010101 01 0101010 101 Source Hybrid transport flag IPTransAp artInd Identifies whether hybrid transport is supported over the Iub interface. Value range: 0 through 65535 - SatelliteInd Identifies the satellite transmission on the Iub interface.5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data ATM Address Field Name NSAP Description The NodeB relevant ATM address in hexadecimal format. If the following part.. You need to set the first byte of the ATM address to H'45 (indicating an E.

click configuration task pane. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial) Input Data NodeB type Field Name NodeBTyp e Description Identifies the type of the logical NodeB. Optional parameters: l l l l R99 R4 R5 R6 Procedure . The NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. Optional parameters: l l l Exampl e NORMA L Source NORMAL PICO_TYPE1 PICO_TYPE2 R6 Protocol Version ProtocolVe r Protocol version of the NodeB.. and then click NodeB CM Express in the Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. as shown in Figure 5-1. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. Ltd 5-5 . Step 2 Double-click the editing box on the left.

and NSAP. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . when RAN sharing is supported. According to the prepared data. set the information such as NodeBName.. The physical NodeB corresponds to an installed NodeB. that is. l For details.5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 5-1 Physical NodeB Basic Information window NOTE The RAN Sharing Flag parameter is described as follows: l If the RAN Sharing Flag is set to YES. Step 5 Repeat Step 3 through Step 4 to add more NodeB records. IubBearer Type.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing a Configuration File (Initial) This describes how to create a physical NodeB by importing a configuration file. parameters SharingSupport and CnOpIndex are configured according to scenarios. that is. ----End 5. when RAN sharing is not supported. Scenario 5-6 NodeB initial configuration Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 3 Select NodeBId. Step 4 Click to save the settings. If the RAN Sharing Flag is set to NO. (Parameter CnOpIndex is valid only when SharingSupport is set to NON_SHARED. refer to Adding Basic Data of the RNC (Initial. and click to add a NodeB record. parameters SharingSupport and CnOpIndex do not need to be configured. CME).

. Ltd 5-7 .. you have to conform to the following principle: A logical NodeB is available for each matching NodeB name in the configuration file to be imported. and then import this NodeB configuration file. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial) Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional NOTE l To import a NodeB configuration file. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. l Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. If the logical NodeB that corresponds to the NodeB name in the importing NodeB configuration is unavailable. Step 2 Click . click in the configuration object pane. Click displayed. The Import NodeB window is Step 3 Select a logical NodeB on the left of the window. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane.2 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial). l Prerequisite l The logical NodeB is configured. the imported configuration data will overwrite the data of the existing physical NodeB. The NodeB configuration file of the same or similar configuration type acts as the data source. the CME automatically creates a logical NodeB. If the NodeB name in the configuration file is the same as an existing physical NodeB. as shown in Figure 5-2. refer to 5.

and then click Search. Click OK. a dialog box is displayed to ask whether to create the logical NodeB.4 Reconfiguring NodeB Data (Initial) This describes how to reconfigure the equipment layer data. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Click OK to return to the Import NodeB window. The valid configuration file is displayed in the upper right pane. but the corresponding logical NodeB does not exist. select the save path of the NodeB configuration file. the Information dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Select the valid NodeB configuration file.. NOTE l l The invalid configuration file cannot be imported. and the invalid configuration file is displayed in the lower right pane. and the radio layer data of the physical NodeB based on the negotiated and planned data after you create the physical NodeB by importing the template file or configuration file. If a valid NodeB configuration file is found. ----End 5. and then enter the subrack number of the NodeB and SPUa subsystem number to create the logical NodeB.5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 5-2 NodeB Data Configuration File Step 4 In the navigation tree of the left pane. the transport layer data. and then click Import. Step 6 The imported NodeB is displayed on the right part of the Physical NodeB Basic Information window. After the file is imported. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional 5-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

and power. The reconfiguration involves physical NodeB basic information. and RF modules or RRU addition or deletion. To reconfigure the radio layer data. refer to: – – – 6. the Iub data at both the RNC and the NodeB sides can be consistent. Preparation l To reconfigure the equipment layer data. For details.3 NodeB Transport Layer Data.5 Manually Adding the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over ATM) or 6. The reconfiguration involves cell frequencies. Prerequisite The NodeB is created by importing a template file or a configuration file.8 Adding Radio Layer Data. uplink/downlink resource groups. interface board addition or deletion.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide NOTE 5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial) After the physical NodeB is created through the template or the configuration file.2 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A (Initial). The CME can simultaneously update the Iub data at the RNC and the NodeB sides. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 Manually Adding Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over IP). l Reconfigure the equipment layer data. Ltd 5-9 .4 NodeB Radio Layer Data. you need to manually reconfigure the equipment layer data according to the actual network planning. l Reconfigure the radio layer data.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing a Configuration File (Initial). 6.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing the Template File (Initial). refer to 2.4 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the DBS3800 (Initial). ----End 5. refer to 6.. To reconfigure the transport layer data. 5.5 Refreshing the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (Initial) This describes how to refresh the transport layer data of the NodeB. refer to 2. The equipment layer data is reconfigured according to the NodeB type. For details. For details. 6. refer to 6. you need to manually reconfigure the radio layer data according to the actual network planning. Thus. l l Procedure l Reconfigure the equipment layer data. For details. If the Iub interface data is configured at the RNC side. refer to Macro NodeB Equipment Layer Data or Equipment Layer Data of the Distributed NodeB by the NodeB type. the data at the NodeB side is updated at the same time. After the physical NodeB is created through the template or the configuration file. refer to the following information: l l 4.3 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812E (Initial).

For details. For details. The Iub refreshing function determines that the NodeB and the RNC are directly connected.. That is. refer to 6. cannot be guaranteed owing to the ATM switch. consistency check will be executed over the Iub interface. For details.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial). refer to 6. Therefore. the data over the Iub interface on the RNC side can be synchronized to the NodeB side.) Mandatory/ Optional. Optional NOTE l l Whether to connect the RNC and the NodeB directly depends on actual scenarios. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) 5-10 . To execute the refresh function. l Figure 5-3 Matching relations Prerequisite l The Iub interface data at the RNC is configured.5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Scenario NodeB initial configuration (The RNC and the NodeB is directly connected without ATM switch inbetween.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial). CME). the equipment layer is configured with the NDTI or the NUTI with bearer type of ATM or IPv4. l l l Preparation l For the macro NodeB. Before the refreshing. over ATM. The Iub refreshing function does not check whether the RNC and the NodeB are directly connected. it is not applied to all scenarios. If the versions on both the NodeB and the RNC sides match. use the ATM switch with caution.2. the physical NodeB is configured. Therefore. however. The Iub refreshing function is supported. This function is customized. The accuracy of refreshed data. When data on both the RNC and the NodeB is carried over E1/T1 or optical port in the ATM transport mode and the RNC is connected to the NodeB through an ATM switch. check that the version of the RNC matches that of the NodeB. ensure that the NUTI is configured with the corresponding sub-board. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. refer to Figure 5-3. For the matching relations. refer to Adding Iub Interface Data to the RNC (Initial. Ensure that the VPI of the PVC at the RNC side is in the VPI value range defined in the baseband interface board at the NodeB side. If the optical interface board is adopted.2.

. 3. In the NodeB Selection dialog box.. 2. click in the configuration object pane. The Select NodeB window is refreshed at a time. More than one target NodeB needs to be 1. click Filter.4. the equipment layer is configured with the BBU with bearer type of ATM or IPv4. In area 2. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The physical NodeBs are added to area 1. displayed. and click . The NodeB Selection window is displayed.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide l 5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial) For the distributed NodeB. refer to 6. For details. Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. and then click Step 4 Determine the target NodeB to be refreshed.2 Adding a BBU (Initial). Ltd 5-11 . Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. at a time. Step 2 Click . Click Close to return to the NodeB Selection window. select multiple physical NodeBs. as shown in Figure 5-4. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Option Description Only one target NodeB can be refreshed Go to Step 5.

5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 5-4 NodeB Selection window Table 5-2 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 Description List of candidate physical NodeBs List of target physical NodeBs Step 5 Click Next.. 5-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . as shown in Figure 5-5. The PortMatch window is displayed.

You can also reallocate the data as required. and NPN (port number) at the NodeB side. The Finish dialog box is displayed telling that the data is successfully refreshed. and the Confirmation dialog box is displayed. and that in green refers to the data at the NodeB side. Step 8 Click Finish to return to the Physical NodeB Basic Information window. Step 6 (Optional) Select NCN. and click to modify the interconnection data at the NodeB side. Ltd 5-13 .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial) Figure 5-5 Port Match window NOTE l l The data in dark blue refers to the data at the RNC side. NSBN(subrack number). NSN (slot number). the CME automatically allocates the interconnection data such as NCN (cabinet number).Click OK to execute data synchronization. Step 7 Click Next.. ----End Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Before the Iub refreshing.

.

6. 6. Step 2 NodeB Equipment Layer Data l l 6. The RNC uses the logical NodeB to identify the NodeB.2 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A (Initial).6 Manually Adding Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over IP) Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A (Initial) This describes how to configure the equipment layer data of the BTS3812AE or BTS3812A.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) 6 Procedure Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) About This Chapter This describes how to manually add a NodeB. Step 4 6. Ltd 6-1 .5 Manually Adding the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over ATM).4 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the DBS3800 (Initial) This describes how to configure the equipment layer data of the distributed NodeB. 6.3 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812E (Initial) This describes how to configure the equipment layer data of the BTS3812E. ----End 6.5 Manually Adding the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over ATM) This describes how to configure the transport layer data of the NodeB in ATM transport mode. This method is used to adjust the data after a template file or a configuration file is imported. 6.. 6.1 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial).4 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the DBS3800 (Initial).8 Adding Radio Layer Data.1 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial) This describes how to create a logical NodeB.6 Manually Adding Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over IP). Step 3 NodeB Transport Layer Data l l 6. 6. Step 1 6. 6.

. adding sectors. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . The CME can simultaneously update the Iub data at the RNC and the NodeB sides. Thus. the Iub data at both the RNC and the NodeB sides can be consistent. 6. and adding local cells.8 Adding Radio Layer Data This describes how to configure radio network layer data for the NodeB. The related activities involve adding sites. the data at the NodeB side is updated at the same time.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide This describes how to configure the transport layer data of the NodeB in IP transport mode. 6. 6-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the Iub interface data is configured at the RNC side.7 Refreshing the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (Initial) This describes how to refresh the transport layer data of the NodeB.

The RNC uses the logical NodeB to identify the NodeB. The type must match the type of the interface board at the RNC. Preparation Table 6-1 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB Input Data NodeB ID Field Name NodeB_Id Description The NodeB ID is automatically allocated. Optional parameters: l l l Exampl e 1 Source Name of the NodeB NodeB_Na me NodeB_ 1 Network planning Bearer type IubBearerT ype ATM_T RANS ATM_TRANS IP_TRANS ATMANDIP_TRANS Negotiati on with the destinati on Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) 6.1 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial) This describes how to create a logical NodeB. You are recommended to name the NodeB according to its geographical location. Ltd 6-3 . Identify the transmission type of the Iub interface for the RNC. You can define the logical NodeB before configuring it as a physical NodeB. This parameter indicates the name of the NodeB. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional Prerequisite The RSS or the RBS is already configured..

You need to set the first byte of the ATM address to H'45 (indicating an E. are all 0s. this address is called E. 15 digits) must be a BCD code.164A.164 address). Value range: 0 through 3 Resource manageme nt mode RscMngM ode Defines the resource management mode when the bandwidth is allocated Optional parameters: l l SHARE SHARE EXCLUSIVE H'39010 1010101 01 0101010 1010101 01 0101010 101 ATM Address NSAP The NodeB relevant ATM address in hexadecimal format.164e. The ATM addresses are allocated in the ATM network and cannot be repeated. the following seven and a half bytes (that is. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . this address is called E. If the first byte is H'45.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Sharing support Field Name SharingSup port Description Whether to share NodeB information Optional parameters: l Exampl e NON_S HARED Source SHARED: indicates that all network operators can browse the information of this logical NodeB and that of the corresponding physical NodeB.. If the following part. Value range: 42 bytes (including the prefix H') 6-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NON_SHARED: indicates that only the network operator specified by the CnOpIndex parameter can browse the information of this logical NodeB and the that of the corresponding physical NodeB 0 l Telecom operator index CnOpIndex This parameter is valid only when the SharingSupport parameter is set to NON_SHARED. called DSP. This parameter is invalid when IubBearerType is set to IP_TRANS. H'39 (indicating a DCC address) or H'47 (indicating an ICD address). If the DSP are not all 0s.

Optional parameters: l l l l R99 R4 R5 R6 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Optional parameters: l l Exampl e - Source SUPPORT NOT_SUPPORT 10 Transmissi on delay on the Iub interface Transmissi on delay on the Iub interface in hybrid IP transport Satellite transmissio n indication TransDelay Initial round-trip transmission delay on the Iub interface in ATM circuit transport or IP dedicated transport Value range: 0 through 65535 IPApartTra nsDelay Initial round-trip transmission delay on the Iub interface in hybrid IP transport.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Hybrid transport flag Field Name IPTransAp artInd Description Identifies whether hybrid transport is supported over the Iub interface. This parameter is valid only when IubBearerType is set to IP_TRANS or ATMANDIP_TRANS. Value range: 0 through 65535 - SatelliteInd Identifies the satellite transmission on the Iub interface.. Ltd 6-5 . Optional parameters: l l l NORMAL PICO_TYPE1 PICO_TYPE2 R6 Protocol Version ProtocolVe r Protocol version of the NodeB. Optional parameters: l l FALSE TRUE FALSE NORMA L NodeB type NodeBTyp e Identifies the type of the logical NodeB. This parameter is valid only when TransDelay is set to SUPPORT.

If the RAN Sharing Flag is set to NO. when RAN sharing is supported. Step 2 Double-click the editing box on the left. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. Figure 6-1 Physical NodeB Basic Information window NOTE The RAN Sharing Flag parameter is described as follows: l If the RAN Sharing Flag is set to YES.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. IubBearer Type. CME). Step 4 Click to save the settings. set the information such as NodeBName. refer to Adding Basic Data of the RNC (Initial. (Parameter CnOpIndex is valid only when SharingSupport is set to NON_SHARED. that is. click . l For details.. and click to add a NodeB record. parameters SharingSupport and CnOpIndex are configured according to scenarios. Step 3 Select NodeBId. Step 5 Repeat Step 3 through Step 4 to add more NodeB records. parameters SharingSupport and CnOpIndex do not need to be configured. ----End 6-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and NSAP. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. when RAN sharing is not supported. The NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. as shown in Figure 6-1. that is. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . According to the prepared data.

2 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812AE/ BTS3812A (Initial) This describes how to configure the equipment layer data of the BTS3812AE or BTS3812A.. Figure 6-2 BTS3812AE/BTS3812A panel Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Context On the CME client. Ltd 6-7 .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) 6. Figure 6-2 shows the panel of the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A.

and is installed in slots from 12 to 15 of the baseband subrack. NDLP/HDLP. HULP/EULP: NodeB HSDPA supported uplink baseband processing interface unit. NDTI: NodeB Digital Trunk Interface Unit. NBBI\HBBI\EBBI\EBOI: NodeB HSDPA supported baseband processing interface unit. and is installed in subrack 8. NMON: NodeB Monitoring Unit. and is inserted in slots 8 and 9 in the baseband subrack. 6. and is configured in subrack 1. 2 3 4 NCMU Fan Baseboard NodeB Climate Monitoring Unit. and is inserted in slots 0 and 1 in the baseband subrack.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Table 6-2 Module information Sequen ce Number 1 Module/ Board Type RF Module Description l l One RF module consists of the MAFU and MTRU. and is inserted in slots 2 and 7 in the baseband subrack. and the MAFU is configured in subrack 3. NBBI/HBBI. and is installed in slot 16 of the baseband subrack.2. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . EBBI/EBOI. 6. HULP/EULP. HDLP/NDLP: NodeB HSDPA supported downlink baseband processing interface unit.4 Adding an RRU (Initial.2.2.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial) This describes how to configure the boards in the baseband subrack of the macro NodeB. NUTI: NodeB Universal Transport Interface Unit. NDTI/ NUTI. The boards consist of the NMPT.. 6.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial) This describes how to manually configure the basic information for the NodeB. Macro NodeB) 6-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and is installed in slots 10 and 11 of the baseband subrack. and is installed in slots 12 and 13 of the baseband subrack. NPSU: Power supply module NPMU: Power monitoring module l l l l l l 5 Power module l l 6 Battery The battery is configured in subrack 9. 6.2.3 Adding an Uplink/Downlink Baseband Resource Group and the CMB (Initial. and NMON. The MAFU and MTRU must exist in pairs. Macro NodeB) This describes how to add an uplink or an downlink baseband resource group so as to reasonably allocate the uplink or downlink baseband resources of the NodeB. l NMPT: NodeB Main Processing and Timing Unit. Provides the function of a fan. The MTRU is configured in subrack 2.

8 Adding an NPMU (Initial.9 Adding NPSUs (Initial.2. Adding an RRU includes two parts: adding the RRU chain and adding the RRU module. 6. the BTS3812AE or BTS3812A. It is used to perform functions such as the modulation and demodulation of baseband and RF signals.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial) This describes how to add RF modules.2.2. transferring data of the cascaded RRUs.1 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial). refer to 6.2. This describes how to add an NCMU for the BTS3812AE. This describes how to add an NGRU.7 Adding an NCMU (Initial. BTS3812AE/BTS3812A) This describes how to configure batteries for the macro NodeB (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A). Ltd 6-9 .2. the SASU. 6. data processing. The RRU is the outdoor RF remote unit. 6.2. For details.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) This describes how to add an RRU. 6. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional Prerequisite The logical NodeB is configured. BTS3812AE/BTS3812A) This describes how to configure the NodeB Power Supply Unit (NPSU) for the macro NodeB. and the RET_2G.10 Adding Batteries (Initial.2.2. 6. the STMA. 6.6 Adding an NGRU (Initial) The NodeB GPS Receiving Unit (NGRU) is a peripheral device used to position the UE and provide the clock source for the NodeB.11 Adding an ALD (Initial) This describes how to add an ALD. The ALD consists of the SINGEL_RET. the MULTI_RET.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial) This describes how to manually configure the basic information for the NodeB.. The batteries are backup power facilities of the NodeB. 6. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. that is. that is. Macro NodeB) This describes how to add an NodeB Power Monitoring Unit (NPMU). the MAFU and MTRU modules. and providing the multiplexing functions of the RF channels for receiving and transmitting signals. BTS3812AE) NCMU is a board to control the temperature of the air conditioner and heat exchanger. 6.

FREE (free-run mode): The free-run mode is the working mode for the clock source at an initial phase. the user specifies the clock source. such switching is not allowed. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Optional parameters: l l AUTO (default value) MANUAL (This parameter is configured when the IP clock is already configured. Even if the specified clock source is faulty. and automatically switching the system clock to other clock sources is not allowed.. Network planning l Working mode of the IP clock IPClockMode This parameter is valid only when ClockSource is set to IP. Optional parameters: l Example E1 Source ClockSource LINE Negotiati on with the destinatio n GPSCARD (GPS card clock source) BITS (BITS clock source): The outdoor BBU (HBBUC) cannot use this clock source. This parameter is valid only when ClockWorkMode is set to MANUAL.) 0 Internal planning GPS feeder delay GPSCableDelay Delay of the GPS feeder Value range: 0 through 1000 6-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. LINE (clock source extracted from the Iub interface line) IP (IP clock source) MANUA L l l l Working mode of the clock ClockWorkMod e Working mode of the system clock Optional parameters: l MANUAL (manual mode): In this mode.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Preparation Table 6-3 Negotiation and planned data of the physical NodeB Input Data Working mode of E1/T1 links Clock source Field Name E1T1WorkMod e Description The working mode of E1/T1 links depends on the state of DIP switches on the BBU or NUTI and the configuration file.

the NodeB and the RNC report the alarm at the same time based on SNTP.1 Negotiati on with the destinatio n l IP address of the SNTP server SNTPServerIP The SNTP server is used to synchronize the time of multiple SNTP clients. This helps fault locating. Ltd 6-11 . The SNTP server of the NodeB can be either the M2000 or the RNC.1. when an E1 link is disconnected. 10 l Synchroni zation period Demodula tion mode SyncPeriod The period in which nodes are synchronized.11. For example. l The SNTP server of the NodeB is the RNC (recommended): set SNTPServerIP to the BAM internal IP address. Value range: 1 through 525600 DemMode Demodulation mode of the NodeB Optional parameters: l DEM_2_ CHAN Network planning DEM_2_CHAN (two-way demodulation mode) DEM_4_CHAN (four-way demodulation mode) DEM_ECON_4_CHAN (fourway economical demodulation mode) l l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. which is important for centralized maintenance.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data SNTP switch Field Name SNTPSwitch Description Synchronization switch Optional parameters: l Example ON Source Network planning ON (SNTP client requires time synchronization) OFF (SNTP client does not require time synchronization) 10. especially for alarm management.. The SNTP server of the NodeB is the M2000: set SNTPServerIP to the M2000 host external IP address.

255.1 5 255. 0.0 ENABLE Internal planning - STM-1 frame mode FRAMEMODE_SONET (in SONET mode) FRAMEMODE_SDH (in SDH mode) l FRAME MODE_ SDH AU3 Managem ent unit This parameter is valid only for the channelized optical interface.21.. Frame structure of the optical port chip Optional parameters: l 17.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data High BER thresholds of E1/T1 Field Name HighThreshold Description Optional parameters: l l l l Example 1E-5 Source 1E-3 1E-4 1E-5 1E-6 CLOSE Smooth power switch SMTHPWRSwi tch Optional parameters: l l OPEN CLOSE 0 LowerLimit Lower and upper limits of timer setting NodeB resource distributio n mode Disabling the lower limit of the time range for the transmitter Value range: 0 through 255 UpperLimit Disabling the upper limit of the time range for the transmitter Value range: 0 through 255 0 ResAllocateRul e Optional parameters: l PERFFIRST (handover performance priority mode) CAPAFIRST (capacity priority mode) PERFFI RST l NodeB IP address Subnet mask NMPT backup mode LocalIP LocalIPMask NMPTBackup Mode NAOIFrameMo de (macro NodeB) STM1FrameMo de (distributed NodeB) Au IP address of the NodeB for local maintenance Subnet mask of the NodeB IP address for local maintenance This parameter is available only for the macro NodeB.2. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Optional parameters: l l Negotiati on with the destinatio n AU3 AU4 6-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

in slots 12 and 13 Optional parameters: l IUBGroup1 SHARIN G Internal planning Iub interface board group backup mode l REDUNDANCY (active and standby backup): The board must be the NUTI. Optional parameters: l l Example TU12 Source TU11 (the E1/T1 mode is T1) TU12 (the E1/T1 mode is E1) -48 V DC Power type of the macro NodeB PowerType Configuring the power type for the NodeB. SHARING (load sharing): The NDTI and NUTI can be inserted in either slot 12 or 13. Ltd 6-13 . This parameter is available only for the macro NodeB. Group backup mode of the Iub interface board. the NodeB uploads the CHR log to the FTP server that is at the NodeB side. Only the baseboard held in slot 12 can be used. The attributes of the board held in slot 13 remain unchanged. Optional parameters: l l l -48 V DC 24 V DC 220 V AC OFF Report switch for call history record CHRSwitch When the NodeB CHR report switch is on. Both the board of the baseband subrack and the sub-board can be used.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Bypass unit Field Name Tu Description This parameter is valid only for the channelized optical interface. namely the NDTI or the NUTI. No subboard can be added. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

and then click NodeB dialog box is displayed. as shown in Figure 6-3. The attributes of the board held in slot 15 remain unchanged. in slots 14 and 15 Optional parameters: l Example SHARIN G Source REDUNDANCY (active and standby backup): No sub-board can be added. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. namely the NUTI.. Only the baseboard held in slot 14 can be used. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. Figure 6-3 Create Physical NodeB dialog box 6-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. SHARING (load sharing): Only the sub-board added to the NUTI held in slots 14 and 15 can be used. click in the configuration object pane. Step 2 Click . The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. The Create Physical Step 3 Select a logical NodeB on the left of the window. l Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Field Name IUBGroup2 Description Group backup mode of the Iub interface board.

Step 6 Select a physical NodeB. l l Step 8 Click ----End Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. select Do not use template. Click the DST tab. Set or modify the related parameters such as IP Attribute and FTPS Policy based on the prepared data. Click OK to return to the Physical NodeB Basic Information window. and then click displayed. Ltd 6-15 . From the drop-down list of Template. Set or modify the related parameters such as Frame Mode and CHR Switch based on the prepared data. and the NodeB Creating dialog box shows the importing progress. l Click the Basic tab. click OK to start importing the file. select Series and Version. as shown in Figure 6-4. Click the More tab.. the Information dialog box is displayed.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Step 4 Based on the prepared data. Set the time zone and DST-related parameters. Step 5 After the NodeB configuration file is imported. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 7 Click the Basic Info tab. Figure 6-4 NodeB Equipment Layer window . The information of the configured physical NodeB is displayed on the right of the window. to save the settings. Set the basic information of the NodeB.

.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial). The active NMPT is configured in slot 10. The NMPT is configured in slot 10. ensure that the difference between MaxVPI and MinVPI is less than or equal to 5. The NMON is configured in slot 16. NDTI/ NUTI. When the NMPT does not need a backup. Preparation Table 6-4 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU Input Data NMPT Field Name NMPT Description l Example If backup is not required. Prerequisite The physical NodeB is configured. and the standby NMPT is configured in slot 11. NBBI/HBBI. and HDLP/NDLP and the expected NodeB configuration. For details.2.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial) This describes how to configure the boards in the baseband subrack of the macro NodeB. configure two NMPTs. refer to 6. Source When the NMPT needs a backup. l NodeB monitoring unit NMON The NMON controls the RET controller and provides Boolean value monitoring interfaces such as the 32line Boolean input interface and 7-line Boolean output interface. NDLP/HDLP. Internal planning Baseboard - 6-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. configure the NMPT in slot 10. When configuring the NDTI/NUTI. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . and NMON. EBBI/EBOI. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional NOTE l l l Subrack 0 is for the baseband subrack. configure one NMPT. The HBOI and the EBOI are configured in slots 0 and 1. The bearer mode for the NUTIs in slots 14 and 15 cannot be set to IPV4. HULP/EULP. select applicable baseband boards.2. HULP/EULP. EBBI/EBOI. According to the capacity of the HBBI/ NBBI. The boards consist of the NMPT.

. l Bearer mode BearMod e This parameter is valid only when the transport board is the NUTI.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Transport boards Field Name - Description Optional parameters: l Example The NUTI is configured in slot 13. Ltd 6-17 . Optional parameters: l l IPV4 ATM IPV4 ENABLE IP clock switch IPClock Switch You need to set the IP clock switch on the NUTI baseboard to ENABLE if you plan to use the FE ports on the NUTI board to receive the IP clock signals. Source NDTI: One NDTI provides eight E1/ T1 ports.) Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE 75 Line impedance LineImp edance Line impedance of the E1 line Optional parameters: l l l 75 (E1 working mode) 100 (T1 working mode) 120 (E1 working mode) Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NUTI: One NUTI provides eight E1/ T1 ports and two FE ports. the NUTI can provide more E1/T1 ports. (This parameter is valid only when BearMode is set to IPV4. If the E1/ T1 sub-board is added to the NUTI.

traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken into account. 6-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 Click . and then click displayed. Optional parameters: l Example Source SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by R99 users. l AUTO_A DJUST_F LOW_CT RL l Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the Uu interface reported by the NodeB. AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL: According to the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL. the reverse flow control switch must be enabled by the RNC. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . To perform this function. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. click in the configuration object pane. It is recommended that the RNC be used in compliance with the R6 protocol. . and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken into account.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data HSDPA switch Field Name HsdpaS witch Description This parameter is available when the NUTI is configured or the unchannelized optical sub-board is configured on the NUTI. The RNC uses the R6 switch to perform this function. NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or delay on the Iub interface. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB..

. Step 7 Configure the uplink/downlink processing board. as shown in Figure 6-5. The method of adding the sub-board to NUTIs in slots 12 and 13 is the same as that in slots 14 and 15. l l In subrack 0. right-click slots 08 and 09 to add the NDLPs or HDLPs.. The eight E1 ports on the E1 sub-board can be used for only the following elements: l l l IMA links in the IMA group UNI link TreeLink PVC Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. right-click slots 14 and 15 to add the NUTIs. Step 9 In subrack 0. right-click slots 12 and 13 to add the NDTIs or NUTIs. The tab page is displayed. from the shortcut menu. Figure 6-5 Adding the boards in the baseband subrack Step 5 In subrack 0. Ltd 6-19 . In subrack 0. Option Add the E1 sub-board Description Right-click the NUTI and choose Add E1 Coverboard. CAUTION The NMPT must be configured before other boards are configured. right-click slots 00 and 01 to add the NBBI/HBBI or EBBI/EBOI. NOTE The NBBI/HBBI or EBBI/EBOI can be inserted in either slot 00 or 01. Step 8 In subrack 0.. right-click slots 10 and 11 to add the NMPTs. NOTE l l The NUTI and NDTI can be inserted in either slot 12 or 13. Step 6 In subrack 0. right-click slots 02 through 07 to add the HULPs or EULPs.

. The two optical ports on the channelized optical sub-board are used for the following elements: l Upper-level bandwidth for the SDT link or the UDT link TreeLink PVC l Step 10 In subrack 0. ----End 6.3 Adding an Uplink/Downlink Baseband Resource Group and the CMB (Initial. Macro NodeB) This describes how to add an uplink or an downlink baseband resource group so as to reasonably allocate the uplink or downlink baseband resources of the NodeB.2. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . from the shortcut menu.. In the Board window. The 63 optical E1 ports on the channelized optical sub-board are used for the following elements: l l l IMA links in the IMA group UNI link TreeLink PVC Add unchannelized optical sub-board. from the shortcut menu.. Description Right-click the NUTI and choose Add Channelled Coverboard.. click the NMON Bool External Alarm tab.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Option Add channelized optical sub-board. Now you can enter the alarm ID for this port. and then set WorkMode on the tab page to CUSTOM. right-click slot 16 to add the NMON. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional 6-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Right-click the NUTI and choose Add UnChannelled Coverboard..

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide NOTE 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) l l When configuring the downlink resource group. that is. One source FACH and several corresponding destination FACHs form a CMB FACH group. Ltd 6-21 . it is unnecessary to divide the 3 x 2 configuration into two resource groups. For instance. The NodeB fulfills the duplication of the CMB data between cells. refer to 6. six cells in total. Preparation Table 6-5 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group Input Data ID of the UL baseband resource group Field Name ULResou rceGroup Id Description l Example 1 Source A board that is not added to the UL baseband resource group. cannot process baseband services. That is. Prerequisite One of the following boards is added: l l the HULP/EULP and the HDLP/NDLP the NBBI. check that local cells pertaining to this resource group should be added to boards within the range of the resource group. the alarm. HBBI. the HBBI/NBBI. Softer handover occurs between the cells that belong to one uplink resource group. When more than six cells are to be processed. the number of resource groups should be as small as possible. NOTE When using the CMB. If all data sources are transferred over the Iub interface. EBBI/EBOI. Intra-frequency cells should be allocated in the same uplink resource group. When the previous policies are met. or EBOI For the configuration method. With the duplication function of the CME FACH. A maximum of six cells can be processed in a single uplink or downlink baseband resource group. only one resource group is required. you need to divide the baseband resources into groups by adhering to the following policies: l l l l Each uplink resource group processes a maximum of six cells. The downlink processing units involved in the downlink resource group should pertain to an uplink resource group. it is a waste for the Iub resource. In this case.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial). will be reported.. identical data sources are overlapped and will be transferred over the Iub interface as one data source. An uplink baseband resource group can process a maximum of six cells.2. informing that the downlink resource group is not a subset of the uplink resource group. EBBI. Insufficient uplink baseband resources may result in a cell setup failure. Otherwise. and HULP/EULP. l Internal planning l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. CMB data source such as TV channels of all or part of the cells within a NodeB is the same. one resource group consisting of two carriers.

The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. cannot process baseband services.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data ID of the DL baseband resource group Field Name DLResou rceGroup Id Description l Example 0 Source A board that is not added to the DL baseband resource group. click in the configuration object pane. 3. Click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window 2. Select a physical NodeB. EBBI/EBOI. Click the Other Info tab. 4. l l Procedure l Add an uplink/downlink baseband resource group. The downlink processing units within the downlink resource group should belong to an uplink resource group. 1. as shown in Figure 6-6. and then click is displayed. 6-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. On the main interface of the CME.. The amount of local cells supported by the resource group is determined by the amount and the specifications of the boards within the resource group. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . and HDLP/NDLP. The tab page is displayed. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. the HBBI/NBBI. . that is.

SrcFachId. l Click DLGroup. 7. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . click one or multiple baseband resource groups. the selected item is added to the selected uplink resource group 2.. Click ULGroup.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Figure 6-6 Adding an uplink baseband resource group Table 6-6 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 Description List of uplink baseband resource groups List of uplink baseband resources List of uplink baseband resources added to the uplink resource group 5. 1. to add 6. Then. and select an uplink resource item in area . Click CMB in Figure 6-6. Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 to add one or multiple downlink resource groups. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Click to save the settings. and in area 1. and configure SrcCellId. select ULResourceGroupId. DestCellId. Click and is shown in area 3. 8. Ltd 6-23 (Optional) Configure the CMB. Select an uplink resource group in area 1. and DestFachId.

or both RF modules and RRUs. one B antenna. at least one HBBI or NBBI is required. ensure that the corresponding CMB FACH group data is configured at the RNC. 6-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and PRRU. the NodeB is required to support this function. In one CMB FACH group. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . RHUB. and four carriers. refer to Adding Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial).2. one PRRU has only one A antenna and supports two carriers. l ----End 6. It is used to perform functions such as the modulation and demodulation of baseband and RF signals. transferring data of the cascaded RRUs. One MRRU supports one A antenna. it must be the PRRU (PicoRRU) and the PRRU must be configured where the RHUB is already configured. The RRU is the outdoor RF remote unit. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional NOTE l l l The RRUs are of the following types: MRRU. Before configuring the Iub transmission sharing function at the NodeB. at least one EBOI is required. Adding an RRU includes two parts: adding the RRU chain and adding the RRU module.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NOTE NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide l l l If the Iub transmission sharing function of the CMB service is required. Based on the configured HBBI/NBBI/EBOI in slots 00 through 01 of the baseband subrack.. the source logical cell ID must be different from the destination logical cell ID. Prerequisite The EBOI is configured. For details. Macro NodeB) This describes how to add an RRU. If an RRU is required to be added to the branch. The RRU is similar to the RF module in function. data processing. Otherwise. the NodeB can be configured with RF modules or RRUs. and providing the multiplexing functions of the RF channels for receiving and transmitting signals. the normal service may be affected. when the RRU is configured.4 Adding an RRU (Initial. One source FACH and several corresponding destination FACHs form a CMB FACH group. When RF modules such as the MTRU and MAFU are configured.

Number of the subrack that holds the head BBU in the chain or ring Value range: 0 through 1 Head Board No.. Number of the slot that holds the head BBU in the chain or ring Optional parameters:0 0 Head Port No. This parameter is valid for only the ring topology. Optional parameters:0 - End port number End Port No Number of the port on the end BBU that is connected to the RRU in the chain or ring. This parameter is valid for only the ring topology. Ltd 6-25 . Number of the port on the head BBU that is connected to the RRU in the chain or ring Value range: 0 through 2 0 Internal planning - End subrack number End Subrack No Number of the subrack that holds the end BBU in the ring. This parameter is applicable only to the ring topology. Value range: 0 through 2 - Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Preparation Table 6-7 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain Input Data Chain type Field Name Chain Type Description RRU topology structure Optional parameters: l l Example CHAIN Source CHAIN (chain topology) RING (ring topology) 0 Chain/ Ring head subrack number Chain/ Ring head board number Head port number Head Subrack No. Value range: 0 through 1 End board number End Board No Number of the slot that holds the end BBU in the ring.

Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . For RRU chain. the RRU chain is divided into two parts: l Example OFF Source The first part refers to the section between the head of RRU chain and the break point. The second part refers to the post-break point section of the RRU chain.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Break position 1 Field Name Break Position 1 Description This parameter indicates the position of the first break point. set a break point at this position. After the RRU is added or deleted.. This part of RRU service is not affected. This part of RRU service is disrupted because it is in separate status. When you add and delete an RRU at a particular position in the current RRU topology (ring or chain). only one break point can be set. l 6-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. After the setting of break point. delete the break point to resume the data.

that is. delete the break point to resume the data. This part of RRU service is disrupted because it is in separate status. Ltd 6-27 . After the RRU is added or deleted.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Break position 2 Field Name Break Position 2 Description Second position of the break point only for the ring topology When you add and delete an RRU at a particular position in the current RRU topology (ring or chain). the RRU chain is divided into three parts: l Example - Source The first part refers to the section between the head the of RRU ring and the first break point. This part of RRU service can be affected. The second part refers to the section between two break points of the RRU ring. The third part refers to the section between the second break point and the end of the RRU ring. For the RRU ring. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. two break points overlap.. when only one break point is set. the actual case is that two break points are set in the same position. l l For the RRU ring. two break points can be set. After the setting of break point. This part of RRU service can be affected. set a break point at this position.

In 3 x 1 configuration.. configure six RF modules. configure one RF module. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . configure three or six RF modules. In 3 x 2 configuration. Value range: 0 through 7 2 Internal planning Board status BoardStatus Blocking status of the RRU Optional parameters: l l UnBlock Block Unblock TRUNK Network planning Topology position of the RRU ToPoPosition Optional parameters: l l TRUNK (in the main ring) BRANCH (under the RHUB node) 6-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Table 6-8 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Input Data RF Module Field Name Description l Example Configure either the RRU or the WRFU Source In 1 x 1 configuration. l l Network planning l RRU name RRU chain number RRUName RRUChainNo Name of the MRRU This parameter indicates the number of the chain to which the RRU is connected. Value range: 0 through 249 Name 0 RRU number RRUNo The TRUNK position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position of the main chain or ring. The parent node refers to the RHUB. The BRANCH position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position where the parent node is located. configure three RF modules. In 6 x 1 configuration.

to the minimum value (The interference signal frequency is greater than or equal to the current receive frequency. no offset (no interference) TOP: Offset to top.1 dB MIDDLE l l RRU IF offset IFOffset Offset direction of the Intermediate Frequency (IF) filter Optional parameters: l BOTTOM: Offset to bottom. that is. unit: 0. that is. 0 to 1 (PRRU) RX channel number:0 to 1 Initial correction value for the RTWP: -130 to +130.) MIDDLE: Offset to middle. Value range: l Example 0 Source Number of Carrier: 0 to 3 (MRRU/WRFU). Ltd 6-29 .. that is.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Initial correction value for the RTWP Field Name RTWPofCarrie rCarrier numberonRx RX channel number Description Set the initial correction value for the RTWP of the carrier and TX channel specified by the RRU. to the maximum value (The interference signal frequency is smaller than the current receive frequency.) MINUS_50M (only four carrier RRU support) PLUS_50M (only four carrier RRU support) MINUS_75M (only four carrier RRU support) PLUS_75M (only four carrier RRU support) 0 l l l l l l Floor Floor Floor for installing the RRU Value range: -100 through +1000 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .. The parent node refers to the RHUB. Value range: 0 through 7 Board status BoardStatus Blocking status of the RRU Optional parameters: l l Example Name 0 Source 2 Internal planning UnBlock Block Unblock TRUNK Network planning Topology position of the RRU ToPoPosition Optional parameters: l TRUNK (in the main ring) BRANCH (under the RHUB node) 0 l Floor Floor Floor for installing the RRU Value range: -100 through +1000 6-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Value range: 0 through 249 RRU number RRUNo The TRUNK position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position of the main chain or ring. The BRANCH position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position where the parent node is located.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Vertical Field Name Vertical Description Vertical position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000 Example 0 Source Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000 0 Table 6-9 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB Input Data RRU name RRU chain number Field Name RRUName RRUChainNo Description Name of the MRRU This parameter indicates the number of the chain to which the RRU is connected.

Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. from the shortcut menu.. PRRU or RHUB. and then click displayed. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 6-7 Adding the RRU (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A/BTS3812E) Step 5 Right-click the configured EBOI. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. Add RHUB.. or Add PRRU. Step 2 Click . Configure related parameters based on prepared data. from the shortcut menu. Step 6 Right-click the added RRU Chain.... The tab page is displayed. and click OK to display the added MRRU. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. and then choose Add RRUChain.. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Vertical Field Name Vertical Description Vertical position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000 Example 0 Source Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000 0 Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. choose Add MRRU. click in the configuration object pane. and then click OK to display the added RRU Chain. Ltd 6-31 ... as shown in Figure 6-7. . Configure related parameters based on prepared data... Based on the actual network.

at least one EBOI is required. and choose Add PicoRRU.. from the shortcut menu so as to add the PRRU on the RHUB. The tab page is displayed. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed.. Step 2 Click . Procedure in the configuration object pane. The RRU is similar to the RF module in function. ----End 6. the MAFU and MTRU modules. click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. When RF modules such as the MTRU and MAFU are configured.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Step 7 (Optional) Right-click the added RHUB. that is. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional NOTE l l Subracks 2 and 3 are configured with RF modules. 6-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details.2. as shown in Figure 6-8. Preparation None. . MTRUs in subrack 2 and MAFUs in subrack 3 are configured in pairs. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Based on the configured HBBI/NBBI/EBOI in slots 00 through 01 of the baseband subrack. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. at least one HBBI or NBBI is required.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial) This describes how to add RF modules.. and then click Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. when the RRU is configured. and then click displayed. the NodeB can be configured with RF modules or RRUs. or both RF modules and RRUs. Prerequisite The HBBI or NBBI is configured. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. refer to Adding Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial).

Ltd 6-33 .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Figure 6-8 Adding the MTRU and MAFU Step 5 Right-click any slot in subrack 2 or 3. refer to 6. Preparation None. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional Prerequisite The physical NodeB is configured..1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).2.6 Adding an NGRU (Initial) The NodeB GPS Receiving Unit (NGRU) is a peripheral device used to position the UE and provide the clock source for the NodeB. and choose Add RF Module.. ----End 6. click in the configuration object pane. Configure related parameters based on prepared data. This describes how to add an NGRU.2. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. from the shortcut menu. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. and click OK to add the MTRU and MAFU.. For details. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

and choose Add NGRU. from the shortcut menu.2. Figure 6-9 Adding the NGRU (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A for instance) Step 5 Right-click in the frame area of the cabinet.7 Adding an NCMU (Initial. The tab page is displayed.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Step 2 Click .. . and then click displayed. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . ----End 6. Configure related parameters based on prepared data. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.. Scenario 6-34 NodeB initial configuration Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. and click OK to add the NGRU. Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. as shown in Figure 6-9. This describes how to add an NCMU for the BTS3812AE. BTS3812AE) NCMU is a board to control the temperature of the air conditioner and heat exchanger.

Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. Prerequisite The physical NodeB is configured. Step 2 Click .1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial). The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.2. Preparation None. Ltd 6-35 . The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. click in the configuration object pane. and is configured in subrack 8. and then click displayed. . The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional NOTE The NCMU is used only for the BTS3812AE. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. refer to 6.. The tab page is displayed. as shown in Figure 6-10. Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. For details.

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

Figure 6-10 Adding an NCMU.

Step 5 Right-click subrack 8, and choose Add Board... from the shortcut menu. Configure related parameters based on prepared data, and click OK to add the NCMU. ----End

6.2.8 Adding an NPMU (Initial, Macro NodeB)
This describes how to add an NodeB Power Monitoring Unit (NPMU). Scenario NodeB initial configuration

Mandatory/ Optional Optional

Prerequisite
The physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.2.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).

Preparation
None.
6-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)

Procedure
l Add the NPMU to the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A.
NOTE

For the BTS3812A/BTS3812AE, the value of PowerType cannot be changed. You can use only the default value -48V DC.

1.

in the configuration object pane, On the main interface of the CME, click and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. . The NodeB Equipment Layer window

2. 3. 4.

Select a physical NodeB, and then click is displayed.

Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-11. Figure 6-11 Adding an NPMU

5.

Right-click the lower left part of subrack 7, and choose Add Board... from the shortcut menu. Configure related parameters based on prepared data, and click OK to add the NPMU.

l

Modify the NPMU attributes in the BTS3812E.

1.

in the configuration object pane, On the main interface of the CME, click and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. . The NodeB Equipment Layer window

2. 3. 4.

Select a physical NodeB, and then click is displayed.

in the PowerType editing box, the NPMU Click the Basic Info tab. Click Attribute is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-12.

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-37

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

Figure 6-12 Modifying the NPMU attributes

5.

Select the button 220V AC, and set related parameters based on prepared data. Click OK to modify the NPMU attributes.
NOTE

The button -48V DC or 24V DC is selected to set the type of the power supply for the BTS3812E cabinet. In these two cases, the BTS3812E has no NPMU, and the parameters in the NPMU Attribute dialog box cannot be set.

----End

6.2.9 Adding NPSUs (Initial, BTS3812AE/BTS3812A)
This describes how to configure the NodeB Power Supply Unit (NPSU) for the macro NodeB, that is, the BTS3812AE or BTS3812A. Scenario NodeB initial configuration

Mandatory/ Optional Optional
NOTE

The NPSU is configured in any of the seven slots except the one that holds the NPMU of subrack 7. The NPMU controls the status of the NPSU.

Prerequisite
The physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.2.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).

Preparation
None.

6-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)

Procedure

in the configuration object pane, and then click Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. . The NodeB Equipment Layer window is

Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click displayed.

Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-13. Figure 6-13 Adding an NPSU.

Step 5 Right-click any slot other than the lower leftmost one of subrack 7 on the tab page, and then choose Add Board... from the shortcut menu to add the NPSU. ----End

6.2.10 Adding Batteries (Initial, BTS3812AE/BTS3812A)
This describes how to configure batteries for the macro NodeB (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A). The batteries are backup power facilities of the NodeB. Scenario NodeB initial configuration

Mandatory/ Optional Optional

CAUTION
Capacity is the battery capacity parameter. The value of this parameter must be set as that of the actual capacity of the batteries. Otherwise, the batteries can be damaged. For details about the actual capacity of the batteries, refer to the related instructions of the batteries.

Prerequisite
The physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.2.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd 6-39

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

Preparation
None.

Procedure

Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. . The NodeB Equipment Layer window is

Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click displayed.

Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-14. Figure 6-14 Adding Batteries

Step 5 Right-click subrack 9, and choose Add Board... from the shortcut menu. Configure related parameters based on prepared data, and click OK to add batteries. ----End

6.2.11 Adding an ALD (Initial)
This describes how to add an ALD. The ALD consists of the SINGEL_RET, the MULTI_RET, the STMA, the SASU, and the RET_2G. Scenario NodeB initial configuration

Mandatory/ Optional Optional

6-40

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
NOTE

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)

l

Only the ALD that supports protocols such as AISG or 3GPP IUANT needs to be configured. The ALD can be configured on only the MAFU of subrack 3 for the macro NodeB or on the MRRU for the distributed NodeB. In typical installation scenarios, you can add the ALD without manually entering the vendor codes or SNs, which can be obtained by scanning. In other installation scenarios, you are required to manually enter the vendor codes and SNs when adding the ALD. Otherwise, the system cannot communicate with the ALD. The vendor codes and SNs must be entered at the same time. If only one of them is entered, the system provides a parameter illegality message. In 2G extended application scenarios, you are not required to configure the subrack number, the cabinet number, or the antenna connector number. In other scenarios, ensure that the configured subrack number, the cabinet number, or the antenna connector number are consistent with the number of the equipment that the ALD is connected to. Otherwise, the mapping between the ALD and sector cannot be determined.

l

l

Prerequisite
l l

The RF module is configured. For details, refer to 6.2.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial). The RRU sites are configured. For details, refer to 6.4.4 Adding an RRU (Initial, Distributed NodeB).

Preparation
Table 6-10 Negotiation and planned data of the ALD Input Data Antenna connector number Field Name AntennaNo Description In the 2G extended scenario, this parameter is unavailable. When dual-polarized RET is configured and the value is NOA; when single-polarized RET or STMA is configured, the value is NOA or NOB. DeviceName Name of the ALD. The maximum length is a string of 31 characters. RET 1 Internal planning Example N0A Source Network planning

Device Name

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-41

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

Input Data Scenario

Field Name UseCase

Description Scenario of the antenna Optional parameters:
l

Example REGULA R

Source

REGULAR: Regular installation, that is, only one dual polarization RET can be installed to an ANT_Tx/RxA port, and this RET is controlled through this port. SECTOR_SPLITTING: Sector splitting, that is, a maximum of six RETs can be installed to an ANT_Tx/RxA port through a splitter, and these RETs are controlled through this port. DAISY_CHAIN: Antenna cascading, that is, a maximum of six RETs installed to different ports can be cascaded to an ANT_Tx/RxA port through control signal cables, and these RETs are controlled through this port. 2G_EXTENSION: 2G extension. The 2G RET is controlled through the NodeB. It is an extended mode of cascaded NodeBs. DUAL

l

l

Network planning

l

Antenna polarizatio n type

RETType

When the device type is either SINGLE_RET or MULTI_RET supported by the AISG protocol, this parameter is valid. Optional parameters:
l

In the scenario of antenna cascaded application, the parameter value can be set to either DUAL (dual polarization antenna) or SINGLE (single polarization antenna). In other scenarios other than antenna cascading, the value of this parameter can only be DUAL. Internal planning

l

Vendor code

VendorCode

Vendor code of the ALD. The length is a 2-byte letter or number. For details about the relation between the vendor code and vendor name of the ALD, refer to the AISG protocol.

6-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

When multiple antennas support 6 subunits. AISG2. 0 l l l Antenna tilt angle Working mode of the STMA SASU gain AntTilt Downtilt of the RET antenna Value range: -100 through +300 Network planning BypassMode Optional parameters: l l NORMAL (normal mode) Bypass mode NORMA L l l GSMGain UMTSGa in According to different types of channels. Value range: 0 through 255. The subunit number for a single antenna is not displayed. Select different subunit numbers according to different antenna device types: l Example - Source SubUnit 0 AISG1. The maximum length is a 17-byte letter or number.. the subunit number ranges from 1 to 2. UMTSGain indicates the SASU gain in the UMTS channel. the SASU gain can be divided into the following two types: l 0 GSMGain indicates the SASU gain in the GSM channel.0 The subunit number of STMA and SASU can be 1 or 2. When multiple antennas do not support 6 subunits. l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Value range: 0 through 255.1 The subunit number of STMA can only be 0. and is 0 by default. Ltd 6-43 .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Equipmen t serial number Antenna subunit number Field Name SerialNo Description Serial number of the ALD. the subunit number ranges from 1 to 6.

click in the configuration object pane. In this situation. The easiest method is that you add a DC load to the GSM BTS. the DC power load of the SASU GSM cannot be started.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data DC switch on the SASU antenna connector Field Name DCSwitch Description DC switch (on the SASU antenna connector) status When the status is set to GSM. Optional parameters: l Example UMTS Source GSM (The GSM feeder supplies the power) UMTS (The UMTS feeder supplies the power) OFF 20 l l SASU GSM DC power load DCload The DC power load is applied to the TMA that simulates the GSM system. as shown in Figure 6-15.. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . . The Antenna Line Device window is displayed. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. and then click displayed. Choose Antenna Line Device from the shortcut menu. 6-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. the GSM BTS is informed of the TMA connected to the antenna by checking the DC power of the antenna. Value range: 0 through 255 STMA gain Gain 0 Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. The SASU needs to inform the GSM that a TMA is connected to the BTS antenna when the UE sets a relatively high gain for the GSM Rx channel through the WCDMA NodeB. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. and right-click the added MAFU in subrack 3 or the added MRRU in the RRUChain subrack.

Set related parameters based on the prepared data. Ltd 6-45 . and click . and 6. Set related parameters based on the prepared data. to add an RET.. and click to add an SASU. Figure 6-16 shows the panel of the BTS3812E. Step 7 Click the STMA tab. Configure related parameters . and click based on prepared data. and click . Context On the CME client. Step 8 Click the RET_2G tab. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Set related parameters based on the prepared data.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Figure 6-15 Adding the ALD Step 5 Click the tab SINGLE_RET or MULTI_RET.3 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812E (Initial) This describes how to configure the equipment layer data of the BTS3812E. . and click to add an STMA. and then click Step 6 Click the STMA tab. and click click ----End to add an RET_2G.

and the MAFU is configured in subrack 3.. 2 Fan Provides the function of a fan.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 6-16 BTS3812E panel Table 6-11 Module information Sequen ce Number 1 Module/ Board Type RF Module Description l l One RF module consists of the MAFU and MTRU. The MTRU is configured in subrack 2. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . The MAFU and MTRU must exist in pairs. 6-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and is configured in subrack 1.

2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial) This describes how to configure the boards in the baseband subrack of the macro NodeB.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial) This describes how to add RF modules. EBBI/EBOI. HDLP/NDLP: NodeB HSDPA supported downlink baseband processing interface unit. This describes how to add an NGRU. HULP/EULP: NodeB HSDPA supported uplink baseband processing interface unit. 6. the MAFU and MTRU modules. BTS3812E) This describes how to configure a NodeB Environment Monitoring Unit (NEMU) for the BTS3812E.3. NMON: NodeB Monitoring Unit.3.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial) This describes how to manually configure the basic information for the NodeB. NUTI: NodeB Universal Transport Interface Unit. 6.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Sequen ce Number 3 Module/ Board Type Baseboard Description l NMPT: NodeB Main Processing and Timing Unit. and is inserted in slots 0 and 1 in the baseband subrack. and is installed in slot 16 of the baseband subrack. and is installed in slots from 12 to 15 of the baseband subrack. NBBI/HBBI. Macro NodeB) This describes how to add an uplink or an downlink baseband resource group so as to reasonably allocate the uplink or downlink baseband resources of the NodeB. HULP/EULP.3. NDLP/HDLP. that is.7 Adding an NEMU (Initial. data processing. and is installed in slots 10 and 11 of the baseband subrack. and is installed in slots 12 and 13 of the baseband subrack. and NMON. and is inserted in slots 8 and 9 in the baseband subrack. Adding an RRU includes two parts: adding the RRU chain and adding the RRU module.3. NDTI: NodeB Digital Trunk Interface Unit. 6.4 Adding an RRU (Initial.. transferring data of the cascaded RRUs. 6. It is used to perform functions such as the modulation and demodulation of baseband and RF signals. Macro NodeB) This describes how to add an RRU. Ltd 6-47 . and is inserted in slots 2 and 7 in the baseband subrack. The RRU is the outdoor RF remote unit. and providing the multiplexing functions of the RF channels for receiving and transmitting signals.3.3. The boards consist of the NMPT. 6. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3. NBBI\HBBI\EBBI\EBOI: NodeB HSDPA supported baseband processing interface unit. l l l l l l 6.3 Adding an Uplink/Downlink Baseband Resource Group and the CMB (Initial. NDTI/ NUTI.6 Adding an NGRU (Initial) The NodeB GPS Receiving Unit (NGRU) is a peripheral device used to position the UE and provide the clock source for the NodeB. 6.

. BTS3812E) This describes how to configure the NodeB Power Supply Unit (NPSU) for the macro NodeB.1 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial). Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . The ALD consists of the SINGEL_RET.3.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6. refer to 6.3. Optional parameters: l Example E1 Source ClockSource LINE Negotiati on with the destinatio n GPSCARD (GPS card clock source) BITS (BITS clock source): The outdoor BBU (HBBUC) cannot use this clock source.3. 6. Macro NodeB) This describes how to add an NodeB Power Monitoring Unit (NPMU). 6. This parameter is valid only when ClockWorkMode is set to MANUAL. LINE (clock source extracted from the Iub interface line) IP (IP clock source) l l l 6-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial) This describes how to manually configure the basic information for the NodeB. the STMA.9 Adding NPSUs (Initial. and the RET_2G. the SASU. 6.8 Adding an NPMU (Initial. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional Prerequisite The logical NodeB is configured.11 Adding an ALD (Initial) This describes how to add an ALD. BTS3812E) This describes how to configure batteries for the BTS3812E. that is. For details. 6. the MULTI_RET.3.10 Adding Batteries (Initial.3. Preparation Table 6-12 Negotiation and planned data of the physical NodeB Input Data Working mode of E1/T1 links Clock source Field Name E1T1WorkMod e Description The working mode of E1/T1 links depends on the state of DIP switches on the BBU or NUTI and the configuration file. The batteries are backup power facilities of the NodeB. the BTS3812E.

. FREE (free-run mode): The free-run mode is the working mode for the clock source at an initial phase.) 0 Internal planning Network planning GPS feeder delay SNTP switch GPSCableDelay Delay of the GPS feeder Value range: 0 through 1000 SNTPSwitch Synchronization switch Optional parameters: l ON ON (SNTP client requires time synchronization) OFF (SNTP client does not require time synchronization) l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Network planning l Working mode of the IP clock IPClockMode This parameter is valid only when ClockSource is set to IP. the user specifies the clock source.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Working mode of the clock Field Name ClockWorkMod e Description Working mode of the system clock Optional parameters: l Example MANUA L Source MANUAL (manual mode): In this mode. and automatically switching the system clock to other clock sources is not allowed. Even if the specified clock source is faulty. Optional parameters: l l AUTO (default value) MANUAL (This parameter is configured when the IP clock is already configured. Ltd 6-49 . such switching is not allowed.

1. especially for alarm management. l Example 10. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . the NodeB and the RNC report the alarm at the same time based on SNTP. For example.11..1 Source Negotiati on with the destinatio n The SNTP server of the NodeB is the RNC (recommended): set SNTPServerIP to the BAM internal IP address. when an E1 link is disconnected.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data IP address of the SNTP server Field Name SNTPServerIP Description The SNTP server is used to synchronize the time of multiple SNTP clients. which is important for centralized maintenance. Value range: 1 through 525600 DemMode Demodulation mode of the NodeB Optional parameters: l DEM_2_ CHAN DEM_2_CHAN (two-way demodulation mode) DEM_4_CHAN (four-way demodulation mode) DEM_ECON_4_CHAN (fourway economical demodulation mode) 1E-5 Network planning l l High BER thresholds of E1/T1 HighThreshold Optional parameters: l l l l 1E-3 1E-4 1E-5 1E-6 CLOSE Smooth power switch SMTHPWRSwi tch Optional parameters: l l OPEN CLOSE 6-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The SNTP server of the NodeB is the M2000: set SNTPServerIP to the M2000 host external IP address. 10 l Synchroni zation period Demodula tion mode SyncPeriod The period in which nodes are synchronized. The SNTP server of the NodeB can be either the M2000 or the RNC. This helps fault locating.

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Lower and upper limits of timer setting NodeB resource distributio n mode Field Name LowerLimit Description Disabling the lower limit of the time range for the transmitter Value range: 0 through 255 Example 0 Source UpperLimit Disabling the upper limit of the time range for the transmitter Value range: 0 through 255 0 ResAllocateRul e Optional parameters: l PERFFIRST (handover performance priority mode) CAPAFIRST (capacity priority mode) PERFFI RST l NodeB IP address Subnet mask NMPT backup mode LocalIP LocalIPMask NMPTBackup Mode NAOIFrameMo de (macro NodeB) STM1FrameMo de (distributed NodeB) Au IP address of the NodeB for local maintenance Subnet mask of the NodeB IP address for local maintenance This parameter is available only for the macro NodeB.21.2. Ltd 6-51 .0 ENABLE Internal planning - STM-1 frame mode FRAMEMODE_SONET (in SONET mode) FRAMEMODE_SDH (in SDH mode) l FRAME MODE_ SDH AU3 Negotiati on with the destinatio n Managem ent unit This parameter is valid only for the channelized optical interface. Frame structure of the optical port chip Optional parameters: l 17. Optional parameters: l l TU11 (the E1/T1 mode is T1) TU12 (the E1/T1 mode is E1) Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 5 255. Optional parameters: l l AU3 AU4 TU12 Bypass unit Tu This parameter is valid only for the channelized optical interface.255. 0..

SHARING (load sharing): The NDTI and NUTI can be inserted in either slot 12 or 13. Both the board of the baseband subrack and the sub-board can be used. the NodeB uploads the CHR log to the FTP server that is at the NodeB side. The attributes of the board held in slot 13 remain unchanged. in slots 14 and 15 Optional parameters: l REDUNDANCY (active and standby backup): No sub-board can be added.. The attributes of the board held in slot 15 remain unchanged. Only the baseboard held in slot 12 can be used. l 6-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Optional parameters: l l l Example -48 V DC Source -48 V DC 24 V DC 220 V AC OFF Report switch for call history record CHRSwitch When the NodeB CHR report switch is on. No subboard can be added. Only the baseboard held in slot 14 can be used. namely the NUTI.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Power type of the macro NodeB Field Name PowerType Description Configuring the power type for the NodeB. This parameter is available only for the macro NodeB. SHARIN G Internal planning l Iub interface board group backup mode IUBGroup2 Group backup mode of the Iub interface board. in slots 12 and 13 Optional parameters: l IUBGroup1 SHARIN G REDUNDANCY (active and standby backup): The board must be the NUTI. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Group backup mode of the Iub interface board. namely the NDTI or the NUTI. SHARING (load sharing): Only the sub-board added to the NUTI held in slots 14 and 15 can be used.

select Do not use template. Figure 6-17 Create Physical NodeB dialog box Step 4 Based on the prepared data. The Create Physical Step 3 Select a logical NodeB on the left of the window. click OK to start importing the file. Step 5 After the NodeB configuration file is imported. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. . The information of the configured physical NodeB is displayed on the right of the window. and then click displayed. From the drop-down list of Template. Step 6 Select a physical NodeB. Click OK to return to the Physical NodeB Basic Information window. as shown in Figure 6-17. click in the configuration object pane. Step 2 Click . and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. and then click NodeB dialog box is displayed. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the Information dialog box is displayed. Ltd 6-53 .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.. and the NodeB Creating dialog box shows the importing progress. select Series and Version. . as shown in Figure 6-18.

NDLP/HDLP. Set or modify the related parameters such as IP Attribute and FTPS Policy based on the prepared data.3. Click the DST tab.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 6-18 NodeB Equipment Layer window Step 7 Click the Basic Info tab. and NMON. NBBI/HBBI. to save the settings. l Click the Basic tab.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial) This describes how to configure the boards in the baseband subrack of the macro NodeB. Set or modify the related parameters such as Frame Mode and CHR Switch based on the prepared data. HULP/EULP. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional 6-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Set the time zone and DST-related parameters. Set the basic information of the NodeB.. Click the More tab. NDTI/ NUTI. EBBI/EBOI. l l Step 8 Click ----End 6. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . The boards consist of the NMPT.

NUTI: One NUTI provides eight E1/ T1 ports and two FE ports. refer to 6. The bearer mode for the NUTIs in slots 14 and 15 cannot be set to IPV4. When configuring the NDTI/NUTI. The HBOI and the EBOI are configured in slots 0 and 1. Optional parameters: l The NMON is configured in slot 16.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide NOTE 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) l l l Subrack 0 is for the baseband subrack. and HDLP/NDLP and the expected NodeB configuration. and the standby NMPT is configured in slot 11. Source When the NMPT needs a backup. The NUTI is configured in slot 13. The active NMPT is configured in slot 10. HULP/EULP. the NUTI can provide more E1/T1 ports. EBBI/EBOI. For details. Preparation Table 6-13 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU Input Data NMPT Field Name NMPT Description l Example If backup is not required. configure the NMPT in slot 10.. l NodeB monitoring unit NMON The NMON controls the RET controller and provides Boolean value monitoring interfaces such as the 32line Boolean input interface and 7-line Boolean output interface.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial). When the NMPT does not need a backup. If the E1/ T1 sub-board is added to the NUTI. select applicable baseband boards. ensure that the difference between MaxVPI and MinVPI is less than or equal to 5. Internal planning Baseboard - Transport boards - NDTI: One NDTI provides eight E1/ T1 ports. The NMPT is configured in slot 10. configure one NMPT. configure two NMPTs. l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisite The physical NodeB is configured. According to the capacity of the HBBI/ NBBI. Ltd 6-55 .3.

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Bearer mode Field Name BearMod e Description This parameter is valid only when the transport board is the NUTI. (This parameter is valid only when BearMode is set to IPV4.) Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE 75 Line impedance LineImp edance Line impedance of the E1 line Optional parameters: l l l 75 (E1 working mode) 100 (T1 working mode) 120 (E1 working mode) 6-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Optional parameters: l l Example IPV4 Source ATM IPV4 ENABLE IP clock switch IPClock Switch You need to set the IP clock switch on the NUTI baseboard to ENABLE if you plan to use the FE ports on the NUTI board to receive the IP clock signals..

The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken into account. The RNC uses the R6 switch to perform this function. Optional parameters: l Example Source SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by R99 users. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the Uu interface reported by the NodeB. Ltd 6-57 . NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or delay on the Iub interface. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. click in the configuration object pane. .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data HSDPA switch Field Name HsdpaS witch Description This parameter is available when the NUTI is configured or the unchannelized optical sub-board is configured on the NUTI. and then click displayed. the reverse flow control switch must be enabled by the RNC. Step 2 Click . l AUTO_A DJUST_F LOW_CT RL l Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL: According to the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL. It is recommended that the RNC be used in compliance with the R6 protocol. To perform this function.. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken into account. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane.

. Step 7 Configure the uplink/downlink processing board. NOTE l l The NUTI and NDTI can be inserted in either slot 12 or 13. In subrack 0. Step 8 In subrack 0. right-click slots 02 through 07 to add the HULPs or EULPs. Step 9 In subrack 0. The method of adding the sub-board to NUTIs in slots 12 and 13 is the same as that in slots 14 and 15... as shown in Figure 6-19. right-click slots 08 and 09 to add the NDLPs or HDLPs. NOTE The NBBI/HBBI or EBBI/EBOI can be inserted in either slot 00 or 01. right-click slots 14 and 15 to add the NUTIs. from the shortcut menu. Option Add the E1 sub-board Description Right-click the NUTI and choose Add E1 Coverboard. right-click slots 00 and 01 to add the NBBI/HBBI or EBBI/EBOI. right-click slots 10 and 11 to add the NMPTs. Step 6 In subrack 0. l l In subrack 0. The eight E1 ports on the E1 sub-board can be used for only the following elements: l l l IMA links in the IMA group UNI link TreeLink PVC 6-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. CAUTION The NMPT must be configured before other boards are configured. right-click slots 12 and 13 to add the NDTIs or NUTIs.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed. Figure 6-19 Adding the boards in the baseband subrack Step 5 In subrack 0. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .

from the shortcut menu. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Now you can enter the alarm ID for this port..NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Option Add channelized optical sub-board. In the Board window. and then set WorkMode on the tab page to CUSTOM. The two optical ports on the channelized optical sub-board are used for the following elements: l Upper-level bandwidth for the SDT link or the UDT link TreeLink PVC l Step 10 In subrack 0.3... ----End 6.3 Adding an Uplink/Downlink Baseband Resource Group and the CMB (Initial. right-click slot 16 to add the NMON. from the shortcut menu. click the NMON Bool External Alarm tab. Ltd 6-59 . Description Right-click the NUTI and choose Add Channelled Coverboard. The 63 optical E1 ports on the channelized optical sub-board are used for the following elements: l l l IMA links in the IMA group UNI link TreeLink PVC Add unchannelized optical sub-board. Right-click the NUTI and choose Add UnChannelled Coverboard... Macro NodeB) This describes how to add an uplink or an downlink baseband resource group so as to reasonably allocate the uplink or downlink baseband resources of the NodeB.

EBBI/EBOI. CMB data source such as TV channels of all or part of the cells within a NodeB is the same. Intra-frequency cells should be allocated in the same uplink resource group.. six cells in total. EBBI. If all data sources are transferred over the Iub interface. the alarm. When more than six cells are to be processed. the HBBI/NBBI.3. One source FACH and several corresponding destination FACHs form a CMB FACH group. Prerequisite One of the following boards is added: l l the HULP/EULP and the HDLP/NDLP the NBBI. Insufficient uplink baseband resources may result in a cell setup failure. it is unnecessary to divide the 3 x 2 configuration into two resource groups. informing that the downlink resource group is not a subset of the uplink resource group. HBBI. the number of resource groups should be as small as possible. In this case.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial). and HULP/EULP. Preparation Table 6-14 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group Input Data ID of the UL baseband resource group Field Name ULResou rceGroup Id Description l Example 1 Source A board that is not added to the UL baseband resource group. you need to divide the baseband resources into groups by adhering to the following policies: l l l l Each uplink resource group processes a maximum of six cells. When the previous policies are met. refer to 6.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NOTE NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide l l When configuring the downlink resource group. will be reported. With the duplication function of the CME FACH. cannot process baseband services. check that local cells pertaining to this resource group should be added to boards within the range of the resource group. only one resource group is required. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . For instance. Otherwise. it is a waste for the Iub resource. A maximum of six cells can be processed in a single uplink or downlink baseband resource group. l Internal planning l 6-60 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The NodeB fulfills the duplication of the CMB data between cells. An uplink baseband resource group can process a maximum of six cells. Softer handover occurs between the cells that belong to one uplink resource group. NOTE When using the CMB. The downlink processing units involved in the downlink resource group should pertain to an uplink resource group. That is. one resource group consisting of two carriers. that is. identical data sources are overlapped and will be transferred over the Iub interface as one data source. or EBOI For the configuration method.

1. the HBBI/NBBI. The tab page is displayed. that is. Click . Ltd 6-61 . as shown in Figure 6-20.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data ID of the DL baseband resource group Field Name DLResou rceGroup Id Description l Example 0 Source A board that is not added to the DL baseband resource group. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. and HDLP/NDLP. Click the Other Info tab. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. EBBI/EBOI. Select a physical NodeB.. The downlink processing units within the downlink resource group should belong to an uplink resource group. 3. On the main interface of the CME. . and then click is displayed. The amount of local cells supported by the resource group is determined by the amount and the specifications of the boards within the resource group. cannot process baseband services. l l Procedure l Add an uplink/downlink baseband resource group. click in the configuration object pane. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. 4. The NodeB Equipment Layer window 2. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed.

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

Figure 6-20 Adding an uplink baseband resource group

Table 6-15 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 Description List of uplink baseband resource groups List of uplink baseband resources List of uplink baseband resources added to the uplink resource group

5.

Click ULGroup, and in area 1, select ULResourceGroupId. Then, click one or multiple baseband resource groups. Click to save the settings.

to add

6. 7.

Select an uplink resource group in area 1, and select an uplink resource item in area , the selected item is added to the selected uplink resource group 2. Click and is shown in area 3.

8. l

Click DLGroup. Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 to add one or multiple downlink resource groups. Click CMB in Figure 6-20, and configure SrcCellId, SrcFachId, DestCellId, and DestFachId.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

(Optional) Configure the CMB. 1.

6-62

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
NOTE

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)

l l l

If the Iub transmission sharing function of the CMB service is required, the NodeB is required to support this function. One source FACH and several corresponding destination FACHs form a CMB FACH group. Before configuring the Iub transmission sharing function at the NodeB, ensure that the corresponding CMB FACH group data is configured at the RNC. Otherwise, the normal service may be affected. In one CMB FACH group, the source logical cell ID must be different from the destination logical cell ID.

l

----End

6.3.4 Adding an RRU (Initial, Macro NodeB)
This describes how to add an RRU. The RRU is the outdoor RF remote unit. It is used to perform functions such as the modulation and demodulation of baseband and RF signals, data processing, transferring data of the cascaded RRUs, and providing the multiplexing functions of the RF channels for receiving and transmitting signals. Adding an RRU includes two parts: adding the RRU chain and adding the RRU module. Scenario NodeB initial configuration

Mandatory/ Optional Optional
NOTE

l l l

The RRUs are of the following types: MRRU, RHUB, and PRRU. If an RRU is required to be added to the branch, it must be the PRRU (PicoRRU) and the PRRU must be configured where the RHUB is already configured. One MRRU supports one A antenna, one B antenna, and four carriers; one PRRU has only one A antenna and supports two carriers.

The RRU is similar to the RF module in function. When RF modules such as the MTRU and MAFU are configured, at least one HBBI or NBBI is required; when the RRU is configured, at least one EBOI is required. Based on the configured HBBI/NBBI/EBOI in slots 00 through 01 of the baseband subrack, the NodeB can be configured with RF modules or RRUs, or both RF modules and RRUs.

Prerequisite
The EBOI is configured. For details, refer to Adding Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial).

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-63

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

Preparation
Table 6-16 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain Input Data Chain type Field Name Chain Type Description RRU topology structure Optional parameters:
l l

Example CHAIN

Source

CHAIN (chain topology) RING (ring topology) 0

Chain/ Ring head subrack number Chain/ Ring head board number Head port number

Head Subrack No.

Number of the subrack that holds the head BBU in the chain or ring Value range: 0 through 1

Head Board No.

Number of the slot that holds the head BBU in the chain or ring Optional parameters:0

0

Head Port No.

Number of the port on the head BBU that is connected to the RRU in the chain or ring Value range: 0 through 2

0 Internal planning -

End subrack number

End Subrack No

Number of the subrack that holds the end BBU in the ring. This parameter is applicable only to the ring topology. Value range: 0 through 1

End board number

End Board No

Number of the slot that holds the end BBU in the ring. This parameter is valid for only the ring topology. Optional parameters:0

-

End port number

End Port No

Number of the port on the end BBU that is connected to the RRU in the chain or ring. This parameter is valid for only the ring topology. Value range: 0 through 2

-

6-64

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)

Input Data Break position 1

Field Name Break Position 1

Description This parameter indicates the position of the first break point. When you add and delete an RRU at a particular position in the current RRU topology (ring or chain), set a break point at this position. After the RRU is added or deleted, delete the break point to resume the data. For RRU chain, only one break point can be set. After the setting of break point, the RRU chain is divided into two parts:
l

Example OFF

Source

The first part refers to the section between the head of RRU chain and the break point. This part of RRU service is not affected. The second part refers to the post-break point section of the RRU chain. This part of RRU service is disrupted because it is in separate status.

l

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-65

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

Input Data Break position 2

Field Name Break Position 2

Description Second position of the break point only for the ring topology When you add and delete an RRU at a particular position in the current RRU topology (ring or chain), set a break point at this position. After the RRU is added or deleted, delete the break point to resume the data. For the RRU ring, two break points can be set. After the setting of break point, the RRU chain is divided into three parts:
l

Example -

Source

The first part refers to the section between the head the of RRU ring and the first break point. This part of RRU service can be affected. The second part refers to the section between two break points of the RRU ring. This part of RRU service is disrupted because it is in separate status. The third part refers to the section between the second break point and the end of the RRU ring. This part of RRU service can be affected.

l

l

For the RRU ring, when only one break point is set, the actual case is that two break points are set in the same position, that is, two break points overlap.

6-66

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)

Table 6-17 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Input Data RF Module Field Name Description
l

Example Configure either the RRU or the WRFU

Source

In 1 x 1 configuration, configure one RF module. In 3 x 1 configuration, configure three RF modules. In 3 x 2 configuration, configure three or six RF modules. In 6 x 1 configuration, configure six RF modules.

l

l

Network planning

l

RRU name RRU chain number

RRUName RRUChainNo

Name of the MRRU This parameter indicates the number of the chain to which the RRU is connected. Value range: 0 through 249

Name 0

RRU number

RRUNo

The TRUNK position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position of the main chain or ring. The BRANCH position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position where the parent node is located. The parent node refers to the RHUB. Value range: 0 through 7

2

Internal planning

Board status

BoardStatus

Blocking status of the RRU Optional parameters:
l l

UnBlock

Block Unblock TRUNK Network planning

Topology position of the RRU

ToPoPosition

Optional parameters:
l l

TRUNK (in the main ring) BRANCH (under the RHUB node)

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-67

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide

Input Data Initial correction value for the RTWP

Field Name RTWPofCarrie rCarrier numberonRx RX channel number

Description Set the initial correction value for the RTWP of the carrier and TX channel specified by the RRU. Value range:
l

Example 0

Source

Number of Carrier: 0 to 3 (MRRU/WRFU), 0 to 1 (PRRU) RX channel number:0 to 1 Initial correction value for the RTWP: -130 to +130, unit: 0.1 dB MIDDLE

l l

RRU IF offset

IFOffset

Offset direction of the Intermediate Frequency (IF) filter Optional parameters:
l

BOTTOM: Offset to bottom, that is, to the minimum value (The interference signal frequency is greater than or equal to the current receive frequency.) MIDDLE: Offset to middle, that is, no offset (no interference) TOP: Offset to top, that is, to the maximum value (The interference signal frequency is smaller than the current receive frequency.) MINUS_50M (only four carrier RRU support) PLUS_50M (only four carrier RRU support) MINUS_75M (only four carrier RRU support) PLUS_75M (only four carrier RRU support) 0

l

l

l

l

l

l

Floor

Floor

Floor for installing the RRU Value range: -100 through +1000

6-68

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-06-25)

Ltd 6-69 . The BRANCH position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position where the parent node is located. The parent node refers to the RHUB.. Value range: 0 through 249 RRU number RRUNo The TRUNK position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position of the main chain or ring.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Vertical Field Name Vertical Description Vertical position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000 Example 0 Source Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000 0 Table 6-18 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB Input Data RRU name RRU chain number Field Name RRUName RRUChainNo Description Name of the MRRU This parameter indicates the number of the chain to which the RRU is connected. Value range: 0 through 7 Board status BoardStatus Blocking status of the RRU Optional parameters: l l Example Name 0 Source 2 Internal planning UnBlock Block Unblock TRUNK Network planning Topology position of the RRU ToPoPosition Optional parameters: l TRUNK (in the main ring) BRANCH (under the RHUB node) 0 l Floor Floor Floor for installing the RRU Value range: -100 through +1000 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

click in the configuration object pane.. and click OK to display the added MRRU. from the shortcut menu. .. Add RHUB. Step 6 Right-click the added RRU Chain. as shown in Figure 6-21.. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. PRRU or RHUB. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. Configure related parameters based on prepared data.. The tab page is displayed. Based on the actual network.. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. from the shortcut menu. or Add PRRU.. and then choose Add RRUChain.. Figure 6-21 Adding the RRU (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A/BTS3812E) Step 5 Right-click the configured EBOI. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. and then click displayed.. Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. and then click OK to display the added RRU Chain. choose Add MRRU. Configure related parameters based on prepared data.. Step 2 Click . 6-70 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) ..6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Vertical Field Name Vertical Description Vertical position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000 Example 0 Source Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000 0 Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME.

. Procedure in the configuration object pane. or both RF modules and RRUs.. Based on the configured HBBI/NBBI/EBOI in slots 00 through 01 of the baseband subrack. MTRUs in subrack 2 and MAFUs in subrack 3 are configured in pairs. Preparation None. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. as shown in Figure 6-22.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Step 7 (Optional) Right-click the added RHUB. click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The tab page is displayed. Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. that is. refer to Adding Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial). from the shortcut menu so as to add the PRRU on the RHUB. . Prerequisite The HBBI or NBBI is configured. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional NOTE l l Subracks 2 and 3 are configured with RF modules. at least one HBBI or NBBI is required. and then click displayed. ----End 6. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed.3. Ltd 6-71 .. when the RRU is configured. Step 2 Click . The RRU is similar to the RF module in function. the MAFU and MTRU modules. and choose Add PicoRRU. the NodeB can be configured with RF modules or RRUs. at least one EBOI is required. and then click Step 1 On the main interface of the CME.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial) This describes how to add RF modules. When RF modules such as the MTRU and MAFU are configured.

For details.6 Adding an NGRU (Initial) The NodeB GPS Receiving Unit (NGRU) is a peripheral device used to position the UE and provide the clock source for the NodeB. and click OK to add the MTRU and MAFU. Configure related parameters based on prepared data. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Preparation None. click in the configuration object pane. ----End 6.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 6-22 Adding the MTRU and MAFU Step 5 Right-click any slot in subrack 2 or 3.. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. and choose Add RF Module. refer to 6. 6-72 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane.. Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME.3. This describes how to add an NGRU. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional Prerequisite The physical NodeB is configured.3..1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial). from the shortcut menu.

BTS3812E) This describes how to configure a NodeB Environment Monitoring Unit (NEMU) for the BTS3812E. and choose Add NGRU.7 Adding an NEMU (Initial. from the shortcut menu. and click OK to add the NGRU. ----End 6. Figure 6-23 Adding the NGRU (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A for instance) Step 5 Right-click in the frame area of the cabinet. . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Step 2 Click . The tab page is displayed. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB.3.. Scenario Issue 01 (2008-06-25) NodeB initial configuration Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Configure related parameters based on prepared data.. as shown in Figure 6-23. and then click displayed.. Ltd 6-73 . Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab.

and then click displayed.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Mandatory/ Optional Optional NOTE The NEMU is applicable only to the BTS3812E. The tab page is displayed. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.. as shown in Figure 6-24. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . refer to 6. 6-74 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. . Step 2 Click . and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. Preparation None. Prerequisite The physical NodeB is configured. Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. For details.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial). Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME.3. click in the configuration object pane. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB.

----End 6. refer to 6.3. Macro NodeB) This describes how to add an NodeB Power Monitoring Unit (NPMU). Configure related parameters based on prepared data.8 Adding an NPMU (Initial.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Figure 6-24 Adding an NEMU Step 5 Right-click in the frame area of the cabinet..1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional Prerequisite The physical NodeB is configured. Ltd 6-75 . For details. and click OK to add the NEMU. and choose Add NEMU. from the shortcut menu.. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3. Preparation None.

Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . 3. 6-76 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and click OK to add the NPMU.. Click . . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. 4. Select a physical NodeB. in the configuration object pane. Click Attribute is displayed. as shown in Figure 6-25. . and then click is displayed. The tab page is displayed. The NodeB Equipment Layer window 2. 1. click and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane.. in the PowerType editing box. the NPMU Click the Basic Info tab. Click . 1. The NodeB Equipment Layer window 2. click and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Procedure l Add the NPMU to the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A. 3. the value of PowerType cannot be changed. Configure related parameters based on prepared data. l Modify the NPMU attributes in the BTS3812E. 4. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. Right-click the lower left part of subrack 7.. NOTE For the BTS3812A/BTS3812AE. Click the Device Panel tab. On the main interface of the CME. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. On the main interface of the CME. You can use only the default value -48V DC. and then click is displayed. and choose Add Board. from the shortcut menu. as shown in Figure 6-26. Select a physical NodeB. Figure 6-25 Adding an NPMU 5. in the configuration object pane.

For details. BTS3812E) This describes how to configure the NodeB Power Supply Unit (NPSU) for the macro NodeB. refer to Change the NPMU attribute for the BTS3812E. that is. l Preparation None. refer to 6. change the NPMU attributes. the BTS3812E. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Figure 6-26 Modifying the NPMU attributes 5. In these two cases. Before adding the NPSU to the BTS3812E. Select the button 220V AC. the BTS3812E has no NPMU. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional Prerequisite l The physical NodeB is configured.3. For details. and the parameters in the NPMU Attribute dialog box cannot be set. Click OK to modify the NPMU attributes.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial)..9 Adding NPSUs (Initial.3. NOTE The button -48V DC or 24V DC is selected to set the type of the power supply for the BTS3812E cabinet. Ltd 6-77 . ----End 6. and set related parameters based on prepared data.

Figure 6-27 Adding an NPSU. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. Step 2 Click . Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. and then click displayed. . The NodeB CM Express window is displayed.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. click in the configuration object pane. The tab page is displayed. as shown in Figure 6-27. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. ----End 6-78 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. and choose NPSU... from the shortcut menu. Configure related parameters based on prepared data. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. and then click OK to add an NPSU. Step 5 Right-click in the blank area beyond the subrack area. The Board window is displayed. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .

Procedure in the configuration object pane.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial). Before adding the batteries for the BTS3812E. The tab page is displayed. Ltd 6-79 . as shown in Figure 6-28. refer to Change the NPMU attributes for the BTS3812E. Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) 6. Step 2 Click . The value of this parameter must be set as that of the actual capacity of the batteries. The batteries are backup power facilities of the NodeB. For details. change the NPMU attributes. Otherwise. Prerequisite l The physical NodeB is configured. and then click displayed. For details about the actual capacity of the batteries. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. l Preparation None. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. refer to 6. click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. BTS3812E) This describes how to configure batteries for the BTS3812E. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.. For details.10 Adding Batteries (Initial. the batteries can be damaged. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional CAUTION Capacity is the battery capacity parameter.3. refer to the related instructions of the batteries. and then click Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. . The NodeB CM Express window is displayed.3.

Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . and the RET_2G. and then click OK to add batteries. the MULTI_RET.11 Adding an ALD (Initial) This describes how to add an ALD. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional 6-80 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co... and choose Add Battery. the STMA.. The Board window is displayed. The ALD consists of the SINGEL_RET. the SASU.3. ----End 6. from the shortcut menu.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 6-28 Adding Batteries Step 5 Right-click on the top part of the frame. Configure related parameters based on prepared data.

the mapping between the ALD and sector cannot be determined. the system cannot communicate with the ALD. DeviceName Name of the ALD. For details. l l Prerequisite l l The RF module is configured. Distributed NodeB). In 2G extended application scenarios. or the antenna connector number are consistent with the number of the equipment that the ALD is connected to. When dual-polarized RET is configured and the value is NOA. when single-polarized RET or STMA is configured.3. Preparation Table 6-19 Negotiation and planned data of the ALD Input Data Antenna connector number Field Name AntennaNo Description In the 2G extended scenario.4. which can be obtained by scanning. In other scenarios. RET 1 Internal planning Example N0A Source Network planning Device Name Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. refer to 6. the cabinet number. For details. this parameter is unavailable. you can add the ALD without manually entering the vendor codes or SNs. the value is NOA or NOB.. or the antenna connector number. you are not required to configure the subrack number. ensure that the configured subrack number. If only one of them is entered. Ltd 6-81 . the system provides a parameter illegality message. the cabinet number. Otherwise. In typical installation scenarios. Otherwise. The ALD can be configured on only the MAFU of subrack 3 for the macro NodeB or on the MRRU for the distributed NodeB. The vendor codes and SNs must be entered at the same time. The RRU sites are configured. you are required to manually enter the vendor codes and SNs when adding the ALD.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial). In other installation scenarios. The maximum length is a string of 31 characters.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide NOTE 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) l Only the ALD that supports protocols such as AISG or 3GPP IUANT needs to be configured. refer to 6.4 Adding an RRU (Initial.

6-82 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the value of this parameter can only be DUAL. DAISY_CHAIN: Antenna cascading. and this RET is controlled through this port. In other scenarios other than antenna cascading. that is.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Scenario Field Name UseCase Description Scenario of the antenna Optional parameters: l Example REGULA R Source REGULAR: Regular installation. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . a maximum of six RETs can be installed to an ANT_Tx/RxA port through a splitter. that is. Internal planning l Vendor code VendorCode Vendor code of the ALD. The length is a 2-byte letter or number.. a maximum of six RETs installed to different ports can be cascaded to an ANT_Tx/RxA port through control signal cables. SECTOR_SPLITTING: Sector splitting. Optional parameters: l In the scenario of antenna cascaded application. only one dual polarization RET can be installed to an ANT_Tx/RxA port. It is an extended mode of cascaded NodeBs. DUAL l l Network planning l Antenna polarizatio n type RETType When the device type is either SINGLE_RET or MULTI_RET supported by the AISG protocol. that is. and these RETs are controlled through this port. this parameter is valid. and these RETs are controlled through this port. 2G_EXTENSION: 2G extension. the parameter value can be set to either DUAL (dual polarization antenna) or SINGLE (single polarization antenna). refer to the AISG protocol. The 2G RET is controlled through the NodeB. For details about the relation between the vendor code and vendor name of the ALD.

The maximum length is a 17-byte letter or number.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Equipmen t serial number Antenna subunit number Field Name SerialNo Description Serial number of the ALD. the subunit number ranges from 1 to 2. Select different subunit numbers according to different antenna device types: l Example - Source SubUnit 0 AISG1. the SASU gain can be divided into the following two types: l 0 GSMGain indicates the SASU gain in the GSM channel. Ltd 6-83 .1 The subunit number of STMA can only be 0. When multiple antennas do not support 6 subunits. Value range: 0 through 255. When multiple antennas support 6 subunits.. 0 l l l Antenna tilt angle Working mode of the STMA SASU gain AntTilt Downtilt of the RET antenna Value range: -100 through +300 Network planning BypassMode Optional parameters: l l NORMAL (normal mode) Bypass mode NORMA L l l GSMGain UMTSGa in According to different types of channels. Value range: 0 through 255. AISG2. UMTSGain indicates the SASU gain in the UMTS channel. l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and is 0 by default. the subunit number ranges from 1 to 6.0 The subunit number of STMA and SASU can be 1 or 2. The subunit number for a single antenna is not displayed.

Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . The SASU needs to inform the GSM that a TMA is connected to the BTS antenna when the UE sets a relatively high gain for the GSM Rx channel through the WCDMA NodeB. The easiest method is that you add a DC load to the GSM BTS. and then click displayed. Value range: 0 through 255 STMA gain Gain 0 Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. the DC power load of the SASU GSM cannot be started. click in the configuration object pane. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data DC switch on the SASU antenna connector Field Name DCSwitch Description DC switch (on the SASU antenna connector) status When the status is set to GSM. the GSM BTS is informed of the TMA connected to the antenna by checking the DC power of the antenna. 6-84 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and right-click the added MAFU in subrack 3 or the added MRRU in the RRUChain subrack. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. Optional parameters: l Example UMTS Source GSM (The GSM feeder supplies the power) UMTS (The UMTS feeder supplies the power) OFF 20 l l SASU GSM DC power load DCload The DC power load is applied to the TMA that simulates the GSM system. as shown in Figure 6-29. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. Choose Antenna Line Device from the shortcut menu. . In this situation. The Antenna Line Device window is displayed. Step 2 Click ..

Set related parameters based on the prepared data. and click to add an STMA. and click click ----End to add an RET_2G. Step 7 Click the STMA tab. and 6. Ltd 6-85 . Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 6-30 shows the DBS3800 panel. Step 8 Click the RET_2G tab.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Figure 6-29 Adding the ALD Step 5 Click the tab SINGLE_RET or MULTI_RET. to add an RET. . and click . and then click Step 6 Click the STMA tab. Context On the CME client. and click . Set related parameters based on the prepared data. Set related parameters based on the prepared data.4 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the DBS3800 (Initial) This describes how to configure the equipment layer data of the distributed NodeB.. and click based on prepared data. and click to add an SASU. Configure related parameters .

The RRU is the outdoor RF remote unit. 6.4 Adding an RRU (Initial. which does not support UBTI or EBBC. which supports UBTI and EBBC.4. UBTI: Universal BBU Transport Interface board. the uplink baseband resources of the cell are configured. l l l 6. and by specifying the ID of the DL resource group. 6. Distributed NodeB) 6-86 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Distributed NodeB) The baseband resources consists of uplink baseband resources and downlink baseband resources. the downlink baseband resources of the cell are configured. Adding an RRU includes two parts: adding the RRU chain and adding the RRU module. 6. data processing. HBBUC: indicates that the BBU type is BBU3806C.4.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 6-30 DBS3800 panel Table 6-20 Module information Module/Board Type BBU module Description l HBBU: indicates that the BBU type is BBU3806. which supports the channelized optical sub-board and the unchannelized optical subboard.3 Adding an Uplink/Downlink Baseband Resource Group and the CMB (Initial. transferring data of the cascaded RRUs. It is used to perform functions such as the modulation and demodulation of baseband and RF signals.2 Adding a BBU (Initial) This describes how to add a BBU.5 Adding an NEMU (Initial.4.4.4.. 6. The BBU is of two models: HBBU (BBU3806) and HBBUC (BBU3806C). This describes how to add an uplink or an downlink baseband resource group so as to reasonably allocate the uplink or downlink baseband resources of the NodeB. Distributed NodeB) This describes how to add an RRU. and providing the multiplexing functions of the RF channels for receiving and transmitting signals.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial) This describes how to manually configure the basic information for the NodeB. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . By specifying the ID of the UL resource group. EBBC: indicates the enhanced baseband card of the HBBU.

the MULTI_RET. This parameter is valid only when ClockWorkMode is set to MANUAL. the STMA. the SASU. 6. refer to 6.7 Adding an ALD (Initial) This describes how to add an ALD. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional Prerequisite The logical NodeB is configured. 6. Distributed NodeB) This describes how to add a NodeB Power Monitoring Unit (NPMU) of the DBS3800.4..6 Adding an NPMU (Initial. 6. Ltd 6-87 . For details.1 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial). Optional parameters: l Example E1 Source ClockSource LINE Negotiati on with the destinatio n GPSCARD (GPS card clock source) BITS (BITS clock source): The outdoor BBU (HBBUC) cannot use this clock source.4. LINE (clock source extracted from the Iub interface line) IP (IP clock source) l l l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) This describes how to configure a NodeB Environment Monitoring Unit (NEMU) for the DBS3800. The ALD consists of the SINGEL_RET.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial) This describes how to manually configure the basic information for the NodeB.4. and the RET_2G. Preparation Table 6-21 Negotiation and planned data of the physical NodeB Input Data Working mode of E1/T1 links Clock source Field Name E1T1WorkMod e Description The working mode of E1/T1 links depends on the state of DIP switches on the BBU or NUTI and the configuration file.

and automatically switching the system clock to other clock sources is not allowed. FREE (free-run mode): The free-run mode is the working mode for the clock source at an initial phase.. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .) 0 Internal planning Network planning GPS feeder delay SNTP switch GPSCableDelay Delay of the GPS feeder Value range: 0 through 1000 SNTPSwitch Synchronization switch Optional parameters: l ON ON (SNTP client requires time synchronization) OFF (SNTP client does not require time synchronization) l 6-88 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Network planning l Working mode of the IP clock IPClockMode This parameter is valid only when ClockSource is set to IP. Even if the specified clock source is faulty. Optional parameters: l l AUTO (default value) MANUAL (This parameter is configured when the IP clock is already configured.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Working mode of the clock Field Name ClockWorkMod e Description Working mode of the system clock Optional parameters: l Example MANUA L Source MANUAL (manual mode): In this mode. the user specifies the clock source. such switching is not allowed.

which is important for centralized maintenance. Ltd 6-89 .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data IP address of the SNTP server Field Name SNTPServerIP Description The SNTP server is used to synchronize the time of multiple SNTP clients.11. Value range: 1 through 525600 DemMode Demodulation mode of the NodeB Optional parameters: l DEM_2_ CHAN DEM_2_CHAN (two-way demodulation mode) DEM_4_CHAN (four-way demodulation mode) DEM_ECON_4_CHAN (fourway economical demodulation mode) 1E-5 Network planning l l High BER thresholds of E1/T1 HighThreshold Optional parameters: l l l l 1E-3 1E-4 1E-5 1E-6 CLOSE Smooth power switch SMTHPWRSwi tch Optional parameters: l l OPEN CLOSE Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..1 Source Negotiati on with the destinatio n The SNTP server of the NodeB is the RNC (recommended): set SNTPServerIP to the BAM internal IP address. when an E1 link is disconnected. For example. The SNTP server of the NodeB can be either the M2000 or the RNC. the NodeB and the RNC report the alarm at the same time based on SNTP. This helps fault locating. l Example 10. 10 l Synchroni zation period Demodula tion mode SyncPeriod The period in which nodes are synchronized.1. especially for alarm management. The SNTP server of the NodeB is the M2000: set SNTPServerIP to the M2000 host external IP address.

255.21. 0.2. Optional parameters: l l TU11 (the E1/T1 mode is T1) TU12 (the E1/T1 mode is E1) 6-90 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Frame structure of the optical port chip Optional parameters: l 17.1 5 255.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Lower and upper limits of timer setting NodeB resource distributio n mode Field Name LowerLimit Description Disabling the lower limit of the time range for the transmitter Value range: 0 through 255 Example 0 Source UpperLimit Disabling the upper limit of the time range for the transmitter Value range: 0 through 255 0 ResAllocateRul e Optional parameters: l PERFFIRST (handover performance priority mode) CAPAFIRST (capacity priority mode) PERFFI RST l NodeB IP address Subnet mask NMPT backup mode LocalIP LocalIPMask NMPTBackup Mode NAOIFrameMo de (macro NodeB) STM1FrameMo de (distributed NodeB) Au IP address of the NodeB for local maintenance Subnet mask of the NodeB IP address for local maintenance This parameter is available only for the macro NodeB. Optional parameters: l l AU3 AU4 TU12 Bypass unit Tu This parameter is valid only for the channelized optical interface. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .0 ENABLE Internal planning - STM-1 frame mode FRAMEMODE_SONET (in SONET mode) FRAMEMODE_SDH (in SDH mode) l FRAME MODE_ SDH AU3 Negotiati on with the destinatio n Managem ent unit This parameter is valid only for the channelized optical interface..

SHARIN G Internal planning l Iub interface board group backup mode IUBGroup2 Group backup mode of the Iub interface board. in slots 12 and 13 Optional parameters: l IUBGroup1 SHARIN G REDUNDANCY (active and standby backup): The board must be the NUTI. Only the baseboard held in slot 12 can be used. The attributes of the board held in slot 15 remain unchanged. namely the NDTI or the NUTI. Group backup mode of the Iub interface board. in slots 14 and 15 Optional parameters: l REDUNDANCY (active and standby backup): No sub-board can be added. This parameter is available only for the macro NodeB. Both the board of the baseband subrack and the sub-board can be used. No subboard can be added.. Optional parameters: l l l Example -48 V DC Source -48 V DC 24 V DC 220 V AC OFF Report switch for call history record CHRSwitch When the NodeB CHR report switch is on.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Power type of the macro NodeB Field Name PowerType Description Configuring the power type for the NodeB. The attributes of the board held in slot 13 remain unchanged. the NodeB uploads the CHR log to the FTP server that is at the NodeB side. l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Only the baseboard held in slot 14 can be used. SHARING (load sharing): The NDTI and NUTI can be inserted in either slot 12 or 13. namely the NUTI. SHARING (load sharing): Only the sub-board added to the NUTI held in slots 14 and 15 can be used. Ltd 6-91 .

click in the configuration object pane. . and the NodeB Creating dialog box shows the importing progress. as shown in Figure 6-31. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. Step 6 Select a physical NodeB. and then click NodeB dialog box is displayed. the Information dialog box is displayed. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .. click OK to start importing the file. Step 5 After the NodeB configuration file is imported. From the drop-down list of Template. Figure 6-31 Create Physical NodeB dialog box Step 4 Based on the prepared data. Click OK to return to the Physical NodeB Basic Information window. select Do not use template. as shown in Figure 6-32. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. The Create Physical Step 3 Select a logical NodeB on the left of the window.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. . select Series and Version. Step 2 Click . and then click displayed. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is 6-92 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The information of the configured physical NodeB is displayed on the right of the window. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane.

Set or modify the related parameters such as Frame Mode and CHR Switch based on the prepared data. Set the time zone and DST-related parameters. l l Step 8 Click ----End 6.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Figure 6-32 NodeB Equipment Layer window Step 7 Click the Basic Info tab. Click the More tab. to save the settings. Set the basic information of the NodeB. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.4. l Click the Basic tab. Click the DST tab. The BBU is of two models: HBBU (BBU3806) and HBBUC (BBU3806C).2 Adding a BBU (Initial) This describes how to add a BBU. Ltd 6-93 . Set or modify the related parameters such as IP Attribute and FTPS Policy based on the prepared data..

that is. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . refer to 6. Optional parameters: l l None Port 0 to port 7 ATM Bearer mode BearMode Optional parameters: l ATM: If the bearer mode is ATM.4.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial). the ATM transport layer cannot use the E1/T1 ports. you cannot configure the physical links. Prerequisite The physical NodeB is configured. For details.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NOTE NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide l l On the Basic Info tab page of the NodeB Equipment Layer window. you cannot configure the PPP or MP links. The HBBU and the HBBUC should be inserted into their own slots as specified. IPv4: If the bearer mode is IPv4.. the IP transport layer cannot use the E1/T1 ports. Preparation Table 6-22 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU Input Data Board status Field Name BoardStatus Description Blocking status of the board Optional parameters: l l Example UnBlock Source Block Unblock Port 0 Internal planning Clock source ClockSource 8K E1/T1 ports for extracting the Iub interface clock signals. and the HBBUC cannot be added. that is. DISABL E Negotiati on with the destinatio n l HSUPA switch HSUPA Optional parameters: l ENABLE (The HSUPA is supported) DISABLE (The HSUPA is not supported) l 6-94 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. set the parameter ClockSource to BITS.

for E1 mode) T1_SUPER_FRAME (super frame. for E1 mode) E1_CRC4_MULTI_FRAME (CRC-multiframe. the clock of the upper-level NodeB is set to MASTER and that of the lower-level NodeB is set to SLAVE.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Clock Mode Field Name ClockMode Description For the cascaded NodeBs. for T1 mode) T1_EXTENDED_SUPER_FRA ME (extended super frame. for T1 mode) l l l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Optional parameters: l l Example SLAVE Source Network planning MASTER (primary mode) SLAVE (secondary mode) HDB3 Line Code LineCode Optional parameters: l l l HDB3 (for E1 mode) AMI (for E1 or T1 mode) B8ZS (for T1 mode) E1_CRC 4_MULT I_FRAM E Negotiati on with the destinatio n Frame Structure FrameStru Optional parameters: l E1_DOUBLE_FRAME (double frame.. the original clock mode is retained. Ltd 6-95 . If the value is not specified.

. Value range:0 to 1000 1 6-96 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the Uu interface reported by the NodeB. It is recommended that the RNC be used in compliance with the R6 protocol.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data HSDPA switch Field Name HsdpaSwitch Description Optional parameters: l Example AUTO_A DJUST_ FLOW_C TRL Source SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by R99 users. the reverse flow control switch must be enabled by the RNC. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL : According to the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL. you can infer that the link is not congested. The RNC uses the R6 switch to perform this function. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken into account. Value range:0 to 20 4 Discard rate threshold HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frame loss ratio is not higher than this threshold. To perform this function. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken into account. NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or delay on the Iub interface. l l Time delay threshold HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower than this threshold.

CUSTOM (customized mode): indicates that the UE can change the binding relation. the system reports the alarm and set the alarm Bool based on the customer specified ID. the UE cannot set the alarm ID of this port or other parameters related to this port. that is. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.. All ports work in such mode by default. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. This parameter is valid only when WorkMode is set to CUSTOM. In such mode. The system reports alarms based on its own fixed setting rather than the userdefined setting. Default (default mode): indicates that the system detects and reports the alarms in default mode. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. - l l Internal planning Alarm ID Alarm voltage AlarmId ALarmVolta ge This parameter is valid only when WorkMode is set to CUSTOM.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Working Mode Field Name WorkMode Description Optional parameters: l Example OFF Source OFF (inhibited mode): indicates that the port works in inhibited mode. Ltd 6-97 . that is. click in the configuration object pane. the port does not detect the alarms. Optional parameters: l HIGH (alarms related to high impedance) LOW (alarms related to low impedance) l Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. Step 2 Click .

and choose Add HBBU.. The HBBUC can be configured only in subrack 0. and then click OK to add a BBU. The tab page is displayed. and then click OK to add a UBTI or an EBBC.. and choose Add UBTI. Distributed NodeB) The baseband resources consists of uplink baseband resources and downlink baseband resources. from the shortcut menu. the downlink baseband resources 6-98 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .. as shown in Figure 6-33. NOTE l l l The HBBU can be configured with the UBTI and the EBBC plugboards. and by specifying the ID of the DL resource group. Configure related parameters based on prepared data.. . Step 7 (This task is performed only when the plugboard is UBTI.. and choose Add Channelled Coverboard. Step 6 (Optional) Right-click the configured HBBU. Configure related parameters based on prepared data. or Add HBBUC.. Configure related parameters based on prepared data. The BBUs can be configured in subrack 0 and subrack 1. or Add EBBC. By specifying the ID of the UL resource group. The channelized optical sub-board and the unchannelized optical sub-board can be configured on the UBTI. Step 5 Right-click slot 00 of subrack 0.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Step 3 Select a physical NodeB..) Right-click the configured UBTI. and then click OK to add a channelized optical sub-board or an unchannelized optical sub-board... or Add UnChannelled Coverboard. from the shortcut menu.4. ----End 6. Do not add the HBBUC in subrack 1. the uplink baseband resources of the cell are configured.. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab.. The HBBUC (BBU3806C) cannot be configured with the UBTI and the EBBC plugboards. and then click displayed.3 Adding an Uplink/Downlink Baseband Resource Group and the CMB (Initial. The HBBUC can be configured only in slot 00 of subrack 0... Figure 6-33 Adding the BBU NOTE l l l The DBS3800 supports only 2 cascaded BBUs.

A maximum of six cells can be processed in a single uplink or downlink baseband resource group. Prerequisite The BBU is configured. identical data sources are overlapped and will be transferred over the Iub interface as one data source. only one resource group is required. The NodeB fulfills the duplication of the CMB data between cells. one resource group consisting of two carriers. One source FACH and several corresponding destination FACHs form a CMB FACH group. will be reported. When more than six cells are to be processed. Softer handover occurs between the cells that belong to one uplink resource group. If all data sources are transferred over the Iub interface. six cells in total. it is unnecessary to divide the 3 x 2 configuration into two resource groups. informing that the downlink resource group is not a subset of the uplink resource group. This describes how to add an uplink or an downlink baseband resource group so as to reasonably allocate the uplink or downlink baseband resources of the NodeB. Insufficient uplink baseband resources may result in a cell setup failure. Intra-frequency cells should be allocated in the same uplink resource group.2 Adding a BBU (Initial). check that local cells pertaining to this resource group should be added to boards within the range of the resource group. With the duplication function of the CME FACH. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional NOTE l l When configuring the downlink resource group. Ltd 6-99 . An uplink baseband resource group can process a maximum of six cells. it is a waste for the Iub resource. refer to 6. CMB data source such as TV channels of all or part of the cells within a NodeB is the same. That is.4. l Internal planning l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Otherwise. The downlink processing units involved in the downlink resource group should pertain to an uplink resource group..NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) of the cell are configured. Preparation Table 6-23 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group Input Data ID of the UL baseband resource group Field Name ULResou rceGroup Id Description l Example 1 Source A board such as the HBBU or the HBBUC that is not added to the UL baseband resource group cannot process baseband services. For details. NOTE When using the CMB. the number of resource groups should be as small as possible. the alarm. you need to divide the baseband resources into groups by adhering to the following policies: l l l l Each uplink resource group processes a maximum of six cells. When the previous policies are met. For instance. In this case.

6-100 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. On the main interface of the CME. and then click is displayed. The tab page is displayed. Click the Other Info tab. The downlink processing units within the downlink resource group should belong to an uplink resource group. . l l Procedure l Add an uplink/downlink baseband resource group. click in the configuration object pane. as shown in Figure 6-34. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . 1. The NodeB Equipment Layer window 2. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed..6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data ID of the DL baseband resource group Field Name DLResou rceGroup Id Description l Example 0 Source A board such as the HBBU or the HBBUC that is not added to the UL baseband resource group cannot process baseband services. The amount of local cells supported by the resource group is determined by the amount and the specifications of the boards within the resource group. Select a physical NodeB. 4. Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.

DestCellId. Click CMB in Figure 6-34. Ltd 6-101 . Then. click one or multiple baseband resource groups. Click and is shown in area 3. SrcFachId. (Optional) Configure the CMB. select ULResourceGroupId. 6. Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 to add one or multiple downlink resource groups. the selected item is added to the selected uplink resource group 2. and DestFachId. 7. and in area 1.. Click ULGroup. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. to add Select an uplink resource group in area 1. Click to save the settings. 1. and configure SrcCellId. and select an uplink resource item in area .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Figure 6-34 Adding an uplink baseband resource group Table 6-24 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 Description List of uplink baseband resource groups List of uplink baseband resources List of uplink baseband resources added to the uplink resource group 5. l Click DLGroup. 8.

For details. RHUB.4 Adding an RRU (Initial. data processing. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional l l The RRUs are of the following types: MRRU. and four carriers.4.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NOTE NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide l l l If the Iub transmission sharing function of the CMB service is required. and PRRU. Number of the subrack that holds the head BBU in the chain or ring Value range: 0 through 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the NodeB is required to support this function. one B antenna.2 Adding a BBU (Initial). Before configuring the Iub transmission sharing function at the NodeB. One MRRU supports one A antenna. The RRU is the outdoor RF remote unit.4. Preparation Table 6-25 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain Input Data Chain type Field Name Chain Type Description RRU topology structure Optional parameters: l l Example CHAIN Source CHAIN (chain topology) RING (ring topology) 0 Internal planning Chain/ Ring head subrack number 6-102 Head Subrack No. l ----End 6. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . If an RRU is required to be added to the branch. transferring data of the cascaded RRUs. the normal service may be affected. refer to 6. It is used to perform functions such as the modulation and demodulation of baseband and RF signals. the source logical cell ID must be different from the destination logical cell ID. one PRRU has only one A antenna and supports two carriers. and providing the multiplexing functions of the RF channels for receiving and transmitting signals. Adding an RRU includes two parts: adding the RRU chain and adding the RRU module. ensure that the corresponding CMB FACH group data is configured at the RNC. One source FACH and several corresponding destination FACHs form a CMB FACH group. Distributed NodeB) This describes how to add an RRU. Otherwise. it must be the PRRU (PicoRRU) and the PRRU must be configured where the RHUB is already configured.. l Prerequisite The BBU is configured. In one CMB FACH group.

Value range: 0 through 2 - Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This parameter is applicable only to the ring topology. Description Number of the slot that holds the head BBU in the chain or ring Optional parameters:0 Example 0 Source Head Port No. Ltd 6-103 . Value range: 0 through 1 - End board number End Board No Number of the slot that holds the end BBU in the ring. This parameter is valid for only the ring topology.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Chain/ Ring head board number Head port number Field Name Head Board No.. Optional parameters:0 - End port number End Port No Number of the port on the end BBU that is connected to the RRU in the chain or ring. This parameter is valid for only the ring topology. Number of the port on the head BBU that is connected to the RRU in the chain or ring Value range: 0 through 2 0 End subrack number End Subrack No Number of the subrack that holds the end BBU in the ring.

l 6-104 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. After the setting of break point. For RRU chain. delete the break point to resume the data. This part of RRU service is disrupted because it is in separate status. the RRU chain is divided into two parts: l Example OFF Source The first part refers to the section between the head of RRU chain and the break point. This part of RRU service is not affected. set a break point at this position. When you add and delete an RRU at a particular position in the current RRU topology (ring or chain). The second part refers to the post-break point section of the RRU chain. only one break point can be set. After the RRU is added or deleted.. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Break position 1 Field Name Break Position 1 Description This parameter indicates the position of the first break point.

Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This part of RRU service is disrupted because it is in separate status. Ltd 6-105 . This part of RRU service can be affected. For the RRU ring. After the RRU is added or deleted. After the setting of break point. two break points overlap. delete the break point to resume the data. that is. the RRU chain is divided into three parts: l Example - Source The first part refers to the section between the head the of RRU ring and the first break point.. set a break point at this position. when only one break point is set. The second part refers to the section between two break points of the RRU ring. This part of RRU service can be affected.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Break position 2 Field Name Break Position 2 Description Second position of the break point only for the ring topology When you add and delete an RRU at a particular position in the current RRU topology (ring or chain). two break points can be set. the actual case is that two break points are set in the same position. l l For the RRU ring. The third part refers to the section between the second break point and the end of the RRU ring.

configure three RF modules..6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Table 6-26 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Input Data RF Module Field Name Description l Example Configure either the RRU or the WRFU Source In 1 x 1 configuration. The BRANCH position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position where the parent node is located. In 6 x 1 configuration. Value range: 0 through 249 Name 0 RRU number RRUNo The TRUNK position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position of the main chain or ring. Value range: 0 through 7 2 Internal planning Board status BoardStatus Blocking status of the RRU Optional parameters: l l UnBlock Block Unblock TRUNK Network planning Topology position of the RRU ToPoPosition Optional parameters: l TRUNK (in the main ring) BRANCH (under the RHUB node) l 6-106 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . In 3 x 1 configuration. configure one RF module. l l Network planning l RRU name RRU chain number RRUName RRUChainNo Name of the MRRU This parameter indicates the number of the chain to which the RRU is connected. The parent node refers to the RHUB. configure three or six RF modules. configure six RF modules. In 3 x 2 configuration.

unit: 0.) MINUS_50M (only four carrier RRU support) PLUS_50M (only four carrier RRU support) MINUS_75M (only four carrier RRU support) PLUS_75M (only four carrier RRU support) 0 l l l l l l Floor Floor Floor for installing the RRU Value range: -100 through +1000 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd 6-107 .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Initial correction value for the RTWP Field Name RTWPofCarrier Carrier numberonRxRX channel number Description Set the initial correction value for the RTWP of the carrier and TX channel specified by the RRU. 0 to 1 (PRRU) RX channel number: 0 through 1 Initial correction value for the RTWP: -130 to +130. that is. to the minimum value (The interference signal frequency is greater than or equal to the current receive frequency. to the maximum value (The interference signal frequency is smaller than the current receive frequency. that is. no offset (no interference) TOP: Offset to top. that is.1 dB MIDDLE l l RRU IF offset IFOffset Offset direction of the Intermediate Frequency (IF) filter Optional parameters: l BOTTOM: Offset to bottom..) MIDDLE: Offset to middle. Value range: l Example 0 Source Number of Carrier: 0 to 3 (MRRU/WRFU).

Value range: 0 through 7 Board status BoardStatus Blocking status of the RRU Optional parameters: l l Example Name 0 Source 2 Internal planning UnBlock Block Unblock TRUNK Network planning Topology position of the RRU ToPoPosition Optional parameters: l TRUNK (in the main ring) BRANCH (under the RHUB node) 0 l Floor Floor Floor for installing the RRU Value range: -100 through +1000 6-108 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Vertical Field Name Vertical Description Vertical position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000 Example 0 Source Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000 0 Table 6-27 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB Input Data RRU name RRU chain number Field Name RRUName RRUChainNo Description Name of the MRRU This parameter indicates the number of the chain to which the RRU is connected. The BRANCH position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position where the parent node is located. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .. The parent node refers to the RHUB. Value range: 0 through 249 RRU number RRUNo The TRUNK position indicates that the RRU is at the cascaded position of the main chain or ring.

The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. and then click OK to display the added RRU Chain. Ltd 6-109 .. Based on the actual network. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB.. and click OK to display the added MRRU... click in the configuration object pane. Figure 6-35 Adding an RRU (DBS3800) Step 5 Right-click the configured HBBU or HBBUC. Configure related parameters based on prepared data. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. Configure related parameters based on prepared data. PRRU or RHUB. from the shortcut menu.. choose Add MRRU. as shown in Figure 6-35. or Add PRRU. Step 6 Right-click the added RRU Chain.. and then click displayed. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. The tab page is displayed. and then choose Add RRUChain. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Step 2 Click ... . Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. Add RHUB.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Vertical Field Name Vertical Description Vertical position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000 Example 0 Source Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal position of the RRU Value range: 0 through 1000 0 Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME.. from the shortcut menu.

. For details. 6-110 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Distributed NodeB) This describes how to configure a NodeB Environment Monitoring Unit (NEMU) for the DBS3800.5 Adding an NEMU (Initial.4. refer to 6.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Step 7 (Optional) Right-click the added RHUB. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. Step 2 Click . and then click displayed.4. Preparation None. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . from the shortcut menu so as to add the PRRU on the RHUB. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional NOTE The NEMU can be configured only in slot 00 of subrack 0..2 Adding a BBU (Initial).. Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. . as shown in Figure 6-36. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The tab page is displayed. click in the configuration object pane. ----End 6. and choose Add PicoRRU. Prerequisite The BBU is configured. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB.

refer to 6. refer to 6. One MRRU. ----End 6. Preparation None. Prerequisite l l The BBU is configured.4.6 Adding an NPMU (Initial. The RRU is configured. Distributed NodeB) This describes how to add a NodeB Power Monitoring Unit (NPMU) of the DBS3800.4. Distributed NodeB).. Procedure in the configuration object pane.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Figure 6-36 Adding an NEMU Step 5 Right-click the configured HBBU/HBBUC of subrack 0. and then click OK to add an NEMU. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. can be configured with only one NPMU. from the shortcut menu. click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. For details.4... and then click Step 1 On the main interface of the CME.2 Adding a BBU (Initial). Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional NOTE l l You may add the NPMU only in slot 00 of subrack 0 of the DBS3800 cabinet. and choose Add NEMU.4 Adding an RRU (Initial. You may the NPMU for the RRU (MRRU). however. Configure related parameters based on prepared data. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd 6-111 . For details.

and the RET_2G. and choose Add NPMU. as shown in Figure 6-37. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. and then click OK to add an NPMU. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB.. from the shortcut menu. Adding the NPMU for the RRU: Right-click the configured MRRU.. and choose Add NPMU. the STMA. the SASU. and add an NPMU in the DBS3800 cabinet. 6-112 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. and then click OK to add an NPMU for the RRU.4. as shown in Figure 6-38. the MULTI_RET. The ALD consists of the SINGEL_RET. and then add an NPMU for the RRU. l Adding an NPMU in the DBS3800 cabinet: Right-click the configured HBBU/HBBUC of subrack 0. . Figure 6-37 Adding an NPMU in the DBS3800 cabinet Figure 6-38 Adding the NPMU for the RRU Step 5 Add an NPMU.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Step 2 Click . and then click displayed. Step 4 Click the tab Device Panel. Configure related parameters based on prepared data. Configure related parameters based on prepared data.. from the shortcut menu.. l ----End 6.7 Adding an ALD (Initial) This describes how to add an ALD.

the cabinet number.2. l l Prerequisite l l The RF module is configured. Otherwise. Distributed NodeB). If only one of them is entered. In typical installation scenarios. The ALD can be configured on only the MAFU of subrack 3 for the macro NodeB or on the MRRU for the distributed NodeB. the mapping between the ALD and sector cannot be determined.4. or the antenna connector number are consistent with the number of the equipment that the ALD is connected to. In other installation scenarios. the system cannot communicate with the ALD. you can add the ALD without manually entering the vendor codes or SNs.4 Adding an RRU (Initial.. When dual-polarized RET is configured and the value is NOA. the system provides a parameter illegality message. the value is NOA or NOB. or the antenna connector number. refer to 6. you are not required to configure the subrack number. The maximum length is a string of 31 characters. Otherwise. Ltd 6-113 .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional NOTE l Only the ALD that supports protocols such as AISG or 3GPP IUANT needs to be configured. For details. In 2G extended application scenarios. For details. In other scenarios. which can be obtained by scanning.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial). refer to 6. ensure that the configured subrack number. RET 1 Internal planning Example N0A Source Network planning Device Name Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The RRU sites are configured. the cabinet number. DeviceName Name of the ALD. this parameter is unavailable. when single-polarized RET or STMA is configured. you are required to manually enter the vendor codes and SNs when adding the ALD. The vendor codes and SNs must be entered at the same time. Preparation Table 6-28 Negotiation and planned data of the ALD Input Data Antenna connector number Field Name AntennaNo Description In the 2G extended scenario.

6-114 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details about the relation between the vendor code and vendor name of the ALD. a maximum of six RETs can be installed to an ANT_Tx/RxA port through a splitter. DUAL l l Network planning l Antenna polarizatio n type RETType When the device type is either SINGLE_RET or MULTI_RET supported by the AISG protocol. refer to the AISG protocol. only one dual polarization RET can be installed to an ANT_Tx/RxA port. this parameter is valid. Internal planning l Vendor code VendorCode Vendor code of the ALD. and these RETs are controlled through this port. 2G_EXTENSION: 2G extension. SECTOR_SPLITTING: Sector splitting. It is an extended mode of cascaded NodeBs. and this RET is controlled through this port. that is. a maximum of six RETs installed to different ports can be cascaded to an ANT_Tx/RxA port through control signal cables. the value of this parameter can only be DUAL. Optional parameters: l In the scenario of antenna cascaded application. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . DAISY_CHAIN: Antenna cascading.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Scenario Field Name UseCase Description Scenario of the antenna Optional parameters: l Example REGULA R Source REGULAR: Regular installation. The 2G RET is controlled through the NodeB. and these RETs are controlled through this port. In other scenarios other than antenna cascading.. that is. that is. the parameter value can be set to either DUAL (dual polarization antenna) or SINGLE (single polarization antenna). The length is a 2-byte letter or number.

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Equipmen t serial number Antenna subunit number Field Name SerialNo Description Serial number of the ALD. the subunit number ranges from 1 to 2. AISG2.0 The subunit number of STMA and SASU can be 1 or 2. UMTSGain indicates the SASU gain in the UMTS channel. When multiple antennas do not support 6 subunits.1 The subunit number of STMA can only be 0. 0 l l l Antenna tilt angle Working mode of the STMA SASU gain AntTilt Downtilt of the RET antenna Value range: -100 through +300 Network planning BypassMode Optional parameters: l l NORMAL (normal mode) Bypass mode NORMA L l l GSMGain UMTSGa in According to different types of channels. The subunit number for a single antenna is not displayed. When multiple antennas support 6 subunits. Value range: 0 through 255. Select different subunit numbers according to different antenna device types: l Example - Source SubUnit 0 AISG1. the subunit number ranges from 1 to 6. Ltd 6-115 . The maximum length is a 17-byte letter or number. Value range: 0 through 255. and is 0 by default.. the SASU gain can be divided into the following two types: l 0 GSMGain indicates the SASU gain in the GSM channel. l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Step 2 Click . Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . In this situation. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. Choose Antenna Line Device from the shortcut menu. Value range: 0 through 255 STMA gain Gain 0 Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. . as shown in Figure 6-39. click in the configuration object pane. Optional parameters: l Example UMTS Source GSM (The GSM feeder supplies the power) UMTS (The UMTS feeder supplies the power) OFF 20 l l SASU GSM DC power load DCload The DC power load is applied to the TMA that simulates the GSM system.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data DC switch on the SASU antenna connector Field Name DCSwitch Description DC switch (on the SASU antenna connector) status When the status is set to GSM. The easiest method is that you add a DC load to the GSM BTS. The NodeB Equipment Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. and right-click the added MAFU in subrack 3 or the added MRRU in the RRUChain subrack. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. and then click displayed. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. the DC power load of the SASU GSM cannot be started. The SASU needs to inform the GSM that a TMA is connected to the BTS antenna when the UE sets a relatively high gain for the GSM Rx channel through the WCDMA NodeB. the GSM BTS is informed of the TMA connected to the antenna by checking the DC power of the antenna. The Antenna Line Device window is displayed.. 6-116 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

and click . Ltd 6-117 . Step 7 Click the STMA tab..5 Manually Adding the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over ATM) This describes how to configure the transport layer data of the NodeB in ATM transport mode. to add an RET. Prerequisite The data of the equipment layer of the NodeB is configured. and 6. Configure related parameters .2 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A (Initial) 6. Set related parameters based on the prepared data. refer to: l l 6. Set related parameters based on the prepared data. and click to add an SASU. and click to add an STMA. and click based on prepared data. . and click click ----End to add an RET_2G. Step 8 Click the RET_2G tab.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Figure 6-39 Adding the ALD Step 5 Click the tab SINGLE_RET or MULTI_RET. and click . Set related parameters based on the prepared data. For details. and then click Step 6 Click the STMA tab.4 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the DBS3800 (Initial) The process of configuring the NodeB transport layer data over ATM is as follows: Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

UNI link. The physical layer data consists of the IMA group. structured CES channel.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6. and the OM channel.8 Adding a Treelink PVC (Initial) This describes how to add a treelink PVC to the Hub NodeB. 6.5.5.5.5.1 Adding Links at the Physical Layer (Initial) This describes how to configure the physical layer data of the NodeB in ATM transport mode. unstructured CES channel. You need to configure at least one type from among the IMA group. The SAAL links are used to carry the NBAP and ALCAP when the Iub interface is over ATM.5.5. A UNI link uses all the timeslots of an E1/T1 port. Fractional ATM link. And you can configure only one type or configure all the types. IMA link.5. Fractional ATM link.5. UNI link. so as to achieve wideband ATM transmission. 6.5. 6.5. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . congestion control and HSPA flow control. Each group occupies one portion of the bandwidth and has separate access control. IMA link. and timeslot cross channel. and timeslot cross channel. You need to configure at least one type from among the IMA group. 6.5. UNI link.2 Adding UNI Links (Initial) The UNI is a transmission mode over the TC sub-layer of the ATM physical layer. 6. over ATM) This describes how to add the transmission resource group. And you can configure only one type or configure all the types. unstructured CES channel.1 Adding an IMA Group and IMA Links (Initial) This describes how to configure the IMA group and IMA links. The physical layer data consists of the IMA group.1. 6.2 Adding Transmission Resource Group (Initial. 6.. 6. the treelink PVC added to the Hub NodeB can provide the data transmission channel between the upper-level NE and the lower-level NE. This describes how to add UNI links. The IMA is a transmission mode over the TC sub-layer of the ATM physical layer. over ATM) This describes how to add an Operation and Maintenance Channel (OMCH) of the NodeB. UNI link. 6.3 Adding SAAL Links (Initial) This describes how to add SAAL links.1.4 Adding an NBAP (Initial) This describes how to configure the NodeB Control Port (NCP) and Communication Control Port (CCP). 6. The IMA technology multiplexes multiple low-speed links for transmitting high-speed ATM cell flows. which is used to allocates the bandwidth of the physical link to the transmission resource group for carrying the data on the control plane.6 Adding AAL2 Path Data (Initial) This describes how to add AAL2 PATH data over ATM. IMA link.5 Adding an ALCAP (Initial) This describes how to configure an AAL2 node to the NodeB so that the ALCAP is added at the NodeB. These two ports are carried on the SAAL links. The ALCAP allocates the micro channels of the AAL2 path.5. When the NodeB are cascaded.7 Adding an OMCH of the NodeB (Initial. 6.1 Adding Links at the Physical Layer (Initial) This describes how to configure the physical layer data of the NodeB in ATM transport mode. and Fractional ATM link. and Fractional ATM link.3 Adding Fractional ATM Links (Initial) 6-118 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the user plane. structured CES channel. IMA link. The AAL2 path carries the user plane data between the RNC and other equipment.1.

The NDTI/NUTI of the Macro NodeB is configured. UNI links and Fractional ATM links on the same baseboard or E1 coverboard does not exceed eight. The E1/T1 ports used by the ATM link. fractional ATM link.2. The SDT CES and the UDT CES are only configured in the macro NodeB. Ltd 6-119 l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional NOTE l l l l l l l l After the IMA group is created.5 Adding a Timeslot Cross Channel (Initial. over ATM) This describes how to add a timeslot cross channel for the 2G equipment so as to transmit the data of services on the 3G network.1. This describes how to configure the SDT CES or UDT CES link. Prerequisite l The physical NodeB is configured. Each channelized optical coverboard can be configured with a maximum of 63 IMA links.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) The fractional ATM is a transmission mode over the TC sub-layer of the ATM physical layer and it is an exceptional case of the UNI link. refer to 6. Each channelized optical coverboard can be configured with up to two IMA groups.5. UNI link. This describes how to add fractional ATM links. The Circuit Emulation Service (CES) provides the transmission channel for GSM services to be transmitted over the 3G network. The IMA is a transmission mode over the TC sub-layer of the ATM physical layer. The CES links use either Structured Data Transfer (SDT) mode or Unstructured Data Transfer (UDT) mode.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial).4 Adding SDT CES or UDT CES Link (Initial) The Circuit Emulation Service (CES) provides the transmission channel for GSM services to be transmitted over the 3G network.. you can add the IMA links in the IMA group.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial). 6. The IMA links and the matching IMA group should be configured on the same baseboard or subboard. so as to achieve wideband ATM transmission. as described in 6. This describes how to configure the SDT CES or the UDT CES link. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 6. timeslot cross and CES link should not conflict. The IMA technology multiplexes multiple low-speed links for transmitting high-speed ATM cell flows.1. UNI links and Fractional ATM links on the same baseboard or E1 coverboard does not exceed eight. Each IMA group can be configured with up to 32 IMA links.2. A maximum of four IMA groups can be configured on the same baseboard or E1 coverboard. The total number of IMA groups. For details.5. The total number of IMA links. The total number of IMA groups and UNI links on the same channelized optical subboard does not exceed two. The CES links use either Structured Data Transfer (SDT) mode or Unstructured Data Transfer (UDT) mode. Adding an IMA Group and IMA Links (Initial) This describes how to configure the IMA group and IMA links.

When SubBdType is Channelled CoverBoard. the value range is 0 through 3. When SubBdType is E1 CoverBoard. Field Name SlotNo Description Number of slot where the NDTI or NUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15 hold only the NUTI) Value range: 12 through 15 Sub-board type SubBdType Type of the sub-board where the E1/ T1 port used by the IMA link is located Optional parameters: l l l Example 14 Source Baseboard E1 CoverBoard: E1 coverboard Channelled CoverBoard: channelized optical sub-board When SubBdType is BaseBoard. Preparation Table 6-29 Negotiation and planned data of the IMA group and IMA links Input Data Slot No. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .4. the default value is recommended. Channelle d CoverBoa rd IMA group ID IMAId l 0 Internal planning l l Transmit frame length IMATxFram eLength Longer transmit frame can enhance transmission efficiency but reduces error sensitivity. the value range is 0 through 1. as described in 6. Therefore. Optional parameters: l l l l D128 D32 D64 D128 D256 6-120 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) l NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide The BBU of the distributed NodeB is configured..2 Adding a BBU (Initial). the value range is 0 through 3.

if the value is 3. the bandwidth of each IMA link in the IMA group is added by 64 kbit/s. Ltd 6-121 .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Minimum active links Field Name IMAMinAct iveLinks Description Threshold for identifying the availability of the IMA group For example. Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE After this parameter is enabled. When SubBdType is Channelled CoverBoard. Thus. The LODS alarms are reported when the link differential delay occurs. 25 l l Differentia l maximum delay IMADiffMa xDelay Different transmission links in an IMA group may result in different transmission delays. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. If there are less than three active links. the value range is 1 through 8. which is called link differential delay. the value range is 1 through 32. When SubBdType is E1 CoverBoard. there is a change in the relative delay between links. the IMA group is unavailable. l Example 1 Source When SubBdType is BaseBoard.) DISABLE l Timeslot 16 support TimeSlot16 The channelized optical sub-board does not support this function. the scramble mode is disabled) ENABLE (The scramble mode must be enabled if the E1/T1 transmission uses AMI line codes. the value range is 1 through 8. Value range: 4 through 100 Scramble mode ScrambleMo de Optional parameters: l ENABLE DISABLE (unavailable. there are at least three active IMA links in an IMA group and thus this group is available.

Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . the value range is 0 through 7. It is recommended that the RNC be used in compliance with the R6 protocol. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the Uu interface reported by the NodeB. the reverse flow control switch must be enabled by the RNC. the value range is 0 through 62. When SubBdType is Channelled CoverBoard. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken into account. The RNC uses the R6 switch to perform this function. 2 Source Negotiati on with the destinati on When SubBdType is BaseBoard.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Link number Field Name LinkNo Description Number of the E1/T1 ports for the links in an IMA group. 1. To perform this function. AUTO_A DJUST_F LOW_CT RL l l HSDPA switch HsdpaSwitc h Optional parameters: l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by R99 users. l Internal planning l Time delay threshold HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower than this threshold. Value range: 0 through 20 4 6-122 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. the value range is 0 through 7. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken into account. AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL : According to the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL. NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or delay on the Iub interface. you can infer that the link is not congested. When SubBdType is E1 CoverBoard. l Example 0.

Value range: 0 through 1000 Example 1 Source Procedure l Add the IMA group and the IMA link individually. click in the configuration object pane. as Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Select SubrackNo. The tab page is displayed. and click shown in Figure 6-41. Click ATMPort. . and then click the IMA tab. The NodeB ATM Transport Layer 2. and then click window is displayed. Select a physical NodeB. On the main interface of the CME. Figure 6-40 Configuring the IMA group and the IMA link individually 5. Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. The Search Iub Board window is displayed. . Ltd 6-123 . 3.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Discard rate threshold Field Name HsdpaDR Description The link is not congested when frame loss ratio is not higher than this threshold. 4.. 1. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. as shown in Figure 6-40.

. Select one interface board for the macro NodeB or a BBU for the distributed NodeB. The Search E1/T1 Port window is displayed. 7. 6-124 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. click ATM Bulk Link CM window is displayed. and then click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. Then. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . The NodeB In the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. l Add UNI groups and links in bulk. Select LinkNo. Select an E1/T1 port. Click to add an IMA link. click to add an IMA group. as shown in Figure 6-42. 1. and click . and click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window..6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 6-41 Search Iub Board window 6.

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Figure 6-42 Configuring the IMA links in batches Table 6-30 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 Description IMA group list Available E1/T1 port on the interface board where the IMA group is configured E1/T1 port assigned to the IMA link on the interface board where the IMA group is configured 2. In area 1. select an E1/T1 port. and then click to add an IMA link. in area 2. ----End Adding UNI Links (Initial) The UNI is a transmission mode over the TC sub-layer of the ATM physical layer. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. select an IMA group. This describes how to add UNI links.. Ltd 6-125 . A UNI link uses all the timeslots of an E1/T1 port.

Prerequisite l The physical NodeB is configured. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . UNI links and Fractional ATM links on the same baseboard or E1 coverboard does not exceed eight. as described in 6. The BBU of the distributed NodeB is configured. The total number of IMA links.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial). l l Preparation Table 6-31 Negotiation and planned data of the UNI links Input Data Slot No.2..2. The NDTI/NUTI of the Macro NodeB is configured. The total number of IMA groups and UNI links on the same channelized optical subboard does not exceed two. UNI links and Fractional ATM links on the same baseboard or E1 coverboard does not exceed eight.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NOTE NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide l l l l The E1/T1 ports used by the ATM link. timeslot cross and CES link should not conflict. fractional ATM link. For details. The total number of IMA groups. UNI link.4.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial). Field Name SlotNo Description Number of slot where the NDTI or NUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15 hold only the NUTI) Value range: 12 through 15 Sub-board type SubBdType Type of the sub-board where the E1/T1 port is located by the UNI link Optional parameters: l l Example 12 Source BaseBoard Internal planning Baseboard E1 CoverBoard: E1 coverboard Channelled CoverBoard: channelized optical sub-board l 6-126 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. refer to 6. as described in 6.2 Adding a BBU (Initial).

When SubBdType is E1 CoverBoard. ENABLE l l Scramble mode ScrambleMo de Optional parameters: l DISABLE (unavailable. Ltd 6-127 . When SubBdType is Channelled CoverBoard.. the value range is 0 through 62.) DISABLE Internal planning l Timeslot 16 support TimeSlot16 The channelized optical subboard does not support this function. Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE After this parameter is enabled. the scramble mode is disabled) ENABLE (The scramble mode must be enabled if the E1/T1 transmission uses AMI line codes. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the value range is 0 through 7.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Link number Field Name LinkNo Description Number of the E1/T1 ports for UNI links l Example 3 Source Negotiation with the destination When SubBdType is BaseBoard. the value range is 0 through 7. the bandwidth of the UNI link is added by 64 kbit/s.

The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the Uu interface reported by the NodeB. It is recommended that the RNC be used in compliance with the R6 protocol. l l Time delay threshold HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower than this threshold. NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or delay on the Iub interface. Value range: 0 through 20 4 Discard rate threshold HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frame loss ratio is not higher than this threshold. Value range: 0 through 1000 1 6-128 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the reverse flow control switch must be enabled by the RNC.. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . To perform this function. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken into account. The RNC uses the R6 switch to perform this function.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data HSDPA switch Field Name HsdpaSwitc h Description Optional parameters: l Example AUTO_AD JUST_FLO W_CTRL Source SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by R99 users. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken into account. you can infer that the link is not congested. AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CT RL: According to the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL.

Figure 6-43 Configure the UNI links individually. Click . l Add UNI groups and links in bulk. 5. The Search E1/T1 Port window is displayed. 3.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Procedure l Add the IMA group and the IMA link individually. Select SubrackNo. The tab page is displayed. and click . Select a physical NodeB. 1. . The NodeB ATM Transport Layer 2. On the main interface of the CME. . The NodeB In the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. and then click window is displayed.. Click to add an UNI link. 4. as shown in Figure 6-43. click in the configuration object pane. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. 1. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd 6-129 . click ATM Bulk Link CM window is displayed. Select an E1/T1 port. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. and then click the UNI tab. as shown in Figure 6-44. and then click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. Click ATMPort.

select an E1/T1 port. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 6-44 Configure the UNI links in batches. Adding Fractional ATM Links (Initial) The fractional ATM is a transmission mode over the TC sub-layer of the ATM physical layer and it is an exceptional case of the UNI link.. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional 6-130 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Table 6-32 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 Description Available E1/T1 port for the UNI link on the configured Iub interface board E1/T1 port assigned to the UNI link 2. ----End In area 1. This describes how to add fractional ATM links. and then click to add one UNI link.

refer to 6.2. Ltd 6-131 . UNI links and Fractional ATM links on the same baseboard does not exceed eight. If port 0 is configured. the timeslots must be reserved for timeslot cross connection.. as described in 6.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial). Prerequisite l The physical NodeB is configured. as described in 6. The total number of IMA groups. Value range: TS1 to TS31 1 TS24 to TS31 BaseBoar d Example 13 Source Internal planning Port No. UNI links and Fractional ATM links on the same baseboard does not exceed eight.2 Adding a BBU (Initial). l l Preparation Table 6-33 Negotiation and planned data of the fractional ATM links Input Data Slot No. The NDTI/NUTI of the Macro NodeB is configured. The total number of IMA links.4. The BBU of the distributed NodeB is configured. One E1/T1 port can be configured with multiple Fractional ATM links if the timeslots occupied by the links do not conflict.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide NOTE 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) l l l l The Fractional ATM link can be configured on only the E1/T1 port 0 through 1 on the baseboards in slots 12 through 15.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial).2. For details. E1T1No 0 Negotiatio n with the destinatio n Internal planning Negotiatio n with the destinatio n Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Field Name SlotNo Description Number of slot where the NDTI or NUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15 hold only the NUTI) Value range: 12 through 15 Sub-board type SubBdType Type of the sub-board with the E1/ T1 port available for the fractional ATM link Optional parameters: Baseboard Number of the E1/T1 port available for the fractional ATM link Value range: 0 through 1 Link number Timeslots LinkNo TSBitMap Value range: 0 through 7 The fractional ATM link provides timeslots for the 3G equipment.

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Scramble mode Field Name ScrambleMo de Description Optional parameters: l Example ENABLE Source DISABLE (unavailable. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken into account. To perform this function. Value range: 0 through 20 4 Discard rate threshold HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frame loss ratio is not higher than this threshold. you can infer that the link is not congested.) AUTO_A DJUST_F LOW_CT RL l HSDPA switch HsdpaSwitch Optional parameters: l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by R99 users. the reverse flow control switch must be enabled by the RNC. The RNC uses the R6 switch to perform this function. l Internal planning l Time delay threshold HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower than this threshold. AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTR L: According to the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken into account. Value range: 0 through 1000 1 6-132 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . the scramble mode is disabled) ENABLE (The scramble mode must be enabled if the E1/T1 transmission uses AMI line codes. NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or delay on the Iub interface. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the Uu interface reported by the NodeB. It is recommended that the RNC be used in compliance with the R6 protocol.

The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. and then click . . and then click ATM links. Figure 6-45 Adding a fractional ATM link Step 5 Select SubrackNo. The available timeslots appear yellow. ----End Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. and then click the Fractional ATM tab. NOTE The CME automatically filters the timeslot that is already occupied or reserved on the same E1/T1 port. as shown in Figure 6-45. The TimeSlot Select dialog box is displayed. Step 7 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data. The tab page is displayed. and then click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. and then click displayed. click in the configuration object pane. Step 4 Click ATMPort. The used timeslots appear dark green. Select an E1/ T1 port. The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. Ltd to add fractional 6-133 . and click . The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. Select the timeslot to be used. Step 6 Select TSBitMap. The Search E1/T1 Port window is displayed. and click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. Step 2 Click .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME.

The formula (unit: kbit/s. This describes how to configure the SDT CES or UDT CES link. l Preparation Table 6-34 Negotiation and planned data of the SDT CES Input Data Port type Field Name Type Description Type of the interface that carries the SDT CES channels Optional parameters: l l l l Example FRAATM Source FRAATM IMA UNI STM1 12 Internal planning Source slot No. The CES links use either Structured Data Transfer (SDT) mode or Unstructured Data Transfer (UDT) mode. The SDT CES and the UDT CES are only configured in the macro NodeB.2.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).2. For details. as described in 6. The NUTI of the macro NodeB is configured. This describes how to configure the SDT CES or the UDT CES link. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional NOTE l l l The SDT CES and UDT CES can be configured only on E1/T1 0 through 1 of the NDTI baseboard. PortNo Number of the slot that holds the NDTI Value range: 12 through 13 6-134 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The UDT CES link occupies relatively high bandwidth. The Circuit Emulation Service (CES) provides the transmission channel for GSM services to be transmitted over the 3G network.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial). refer to 6. each cell has 53 bytes) to calculate the CES links is as follows: l l l UDT CES: 64 x 32 x bytes of a cell/partial fill rate SDT CES: 64 x selected timeslots except for slot 0 x bytes of a cell/partial fill rate Prerequisite l The physical NodeB is configured. The CES links use either Structured Data Transfer (SDT) mode or Unstructured Data Transfer (UDT) mode. Only the IMA link can be used as the physical bearer link.. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Adding SDT CES or UDT CES Link (Initial) The Circuit Emulation Service (CES) provides the transmission channel for GSM services to be transmitted over the 3G network. The SDT CES and the UDT CES exclusively occupy an E1/T1 port. The bandwidth of the SDT or UDT CES link must be lower than that of the physical bearer link.

Ltd 6-135 . The number of filling bytes is that of valid bytes filled in each ATM cell..NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Source sub-board type Source port No. Except for the first byte. Value range: TS1 to TS31 TS1 to TS7 13 Destinatio n slot No. 47 Timeslots TSBitMap Timeslot 0 is unavailable. Field Name SubBdTyp e Description Type of the sub-board where the source E1/T1 port is located by the SDT CES channel Optional parameters: Baseboard Number of the source E1/T1 ports for the SDT CES channel Value range: 0 through 1 Example BaseBoar d Source PortNo 0 Partial fill level PFL ATM cell has 48-byte payloads. and the value should be greater than the number of selected timeslots except for slot 0. Value range: 4 through 47. SlotNo Number of slot where the NDTI or NUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15 hold only the NUTI) Value range: 12 through 15 Destinatio n subboard type SubBdTyp e Type of the sub-board where the destination E1/T1 port is located by the SDT CES channel Optional parameters: l l l BaseBoar d Baseboard E1 CoverBoard: E1 coverboard Channelled CoverBoard: channelized optical sub-board Unchannelled CoverBoard: unchannelized optical sub-board l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Each timeslot occupies one byte. the other 47 bytes can be used to transmit timeslot signals.

When Type is set to UNI and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is Channelled CoverBoard. When Type is set to UNI and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is BaseBoard or E1 CoverBoard. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) ./ IMA ID LinkNo/ IMAId Number of the fractional ATM or UNI link. the value range is 0 through 1. Field Name E1T1No Description Number of the destination E1/T1 port for the SDT CES channel (This parameter is valid only when Type is set to FRAATM or UNI). the value range is 0 through 62.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Destinatio n port No. When Type is set to UNI and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is BaseBoard or E1 CoverBoard. l Example 0 Source When Type is set to FRAATM and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is BaseBoard. the value range is 0 through 7. the value range is 0 through 62. or of the STM1 optical port that carries the SDT CES channel. the value range is 0 through 3. the value range is 0 through 7. the value range is 0 through 1. the value range is 0 through 7. the value range is 0 through 7. When Type is set to IMA and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is Channelled CoverBoard.. When Type is set to IMA and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is BaseBoard or E1 CoverBoard. l When Type is set to FRAATM and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is BaseBoard. l l l l l 6-136 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. of the IMA group. When Type is set to UNI and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is Channelled CoverBoard. 0 l l Link No. When Type is STM1.

When the interface board is the NUTI..NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Virtual channel identifier Field Name VPI Description Identifier of the virtual channel for the SDT CES channel. the value range is 32 through 127. PortNo Number of the slot that holds the NDTI Value range: 12 through 13 SubBdTyp e Type of the sub-board where the source E1/T1 port is located by the UDT CES channel Optional parameters: Baseboard Number of the source E1/T1 ports for the UDT CES channel Value range: 0 through 1 BaseBoar d PortNo 1 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Source sub-board type Source port No. l Table 6-35 Negotiation and planned data of the UDT CES Input Data Port type Field Name Type Description Type of the interface that carries the UDT CES channel Optional parameters: l l Example IMA Source IMA STM1 12 Internal planning Source slot No. l 32 When the interface board is the NDTI. Value range: 0 through 31 (six successive values from 0 to 31) Example 1 Source Virtual channel identifier VCI Identifier of the virtual channel for the SDT CES channel. the value range is 32 through 255. Ltd 6-137 .

When the value reaches the maximum of 47.. Value range: 4 through 47 Example 47 Source Tx Clock Mode TxClockM ode Optional parameters: l ACM NOACM (non-adaptive clock mode) NOACM (adaptive clock mode) 14 l Destinatio n slot No. SlotNo Number of slot where the NDTI or NUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15 hold only the NUTI) Value range: 12 through 15 Destinatio n subboard type SubBdTyp e Type of the sub-board where the destination E1/T1 port is located by the UDT CES channel Optional parameters: l l l Channelle d CoverBoa rd Baseboard E1 CoverBoard: E1 coverboard Channelled CoverBoard: channelized optical sub-board Unchannelled CoverBoard: unchannelized optical sub-board l 6-138 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and the transmission delay is reduced. In order not to affect the transmission bandwidth. set the default value to 47. when the value is smaller than 47. the transmission bandwidth is not affected.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Partial fill level Field Name PFL Description The value of the partial fill level affects both the transmission bandwidth and the transmission delay. and the transmission delay reaches the maximum value. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . the transmission bandwidth equals to the original transmission bandwidth x (53/ PFL).

On the main interface of the CME.. and then click window is displayed. Ltd 6-139 . l 32 When the interface board is the NDTI. the value range is 0 through 1. Click Network. The NodeB ATM Transport Layer 2. When the interface board is the NUTI. . Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. Value range: 0 through 31 (six successive values from 0 to 31) Virtual channel identifier VCI Identifier of the virtual channel for the UDT CES channel.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Optical port No. 3. the value range is 0 through 3./ IMA ID Field Name LinkNo/ IMAId Description Number of the IMA group or STM1 optical port that carries the UDT CES channel. When Type is set to IMA and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is Channelled CoverBoard. the value range is 32 through 255. 4. When Type is STM1. 1. Select a physical NodeB. The tab page is displayed. and then click the SDT tab. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. Click . l Example 0 Source When Type is set to IMA and SubBdType(destination sub-board type) is BaseBoard or E1 CoverBoard. click in the configuration object pane. l Procedure l Configure the SDT CES links. the value range is 32 through 127. 1 l l Virtual channel identifier VPI Identifier of the virtual channel for the UDT CES channel. the value range is 0 through 1. as shown in Figure 6-46. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.

Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) 6-140 . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE The SDT and UDT CES each inclusively occupies an E1/T1 port.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 6-46 Configuring the SDT CES links Table 6-36 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 Description Physical bearer link SDT CES configuration area 5. NOTE The CME automatically filters the timeslot that is already occupied or reserved on the same E1/T1 port. The used timeslots appear dark green. click the UDT tab. to add an Configure the UDT CES links. 6. and then click . as shown in Figure 6-47. The TimeSlot Select dialog box is displayed. select a physical bearer link. and then click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. and thus the CME automatically filters the E1/T1 port that is already used by the UDT CES link. In area 2. Select an E1/T1 port. The available timeslots appear yellow. In the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. select SubrackNo and then click . and click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. 7. 1. Select the timeslot to be used. Select TSBitMap. and then click SDT CES link. the Search E1/T1 Port window is displayed.. In area 1. l Configure other parameters based on the prepared data.

and then click SDT CES link. 3. select SubrackNo. Select an E1/T1 port. ----End Configure other parameters based on the prepared data. select an IMA link as the physical bearer link providing bandwidth for the UDT link. and thus the CME automatically filters the E1/T1 port that is already used by the SDT CES link.. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In area 2.) UDT CES configuration area 2.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Figure 6-47 Configuring the UDT CES links Table 6-37 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 Description Physical bearer link (The system automatically filters the IMA link. The Search E1/T1 Port window is displayed. to add an Adding a Timeslot Cross Channel (Initial. In area 1. and click . and click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. NOTE The SDT and UDT CES each inclusively occupies an E1/T1 port. Ltd 6-141 . over ATM) This describes how to add a timeslot cross channel for the 2G equipment so as to transmit the data of services on the 3G network.

PortNo Number of the source E1/T1 ports for timeslot cross links Value range: 2 through 3 Source timeslots Destinatio n slot No. the fractional ATM link timeslot that is configured to E1/T1 0 cannot conflict with the fractional ATM link timeslot that is configured to either E1/T1 2 or 3. and the same E1/T1 port cannot be repeatedly used. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . That is. Field Name SlotNo Description Number of the slot that holds the NDTI or NUTI Value range: 12 through 15 Source port No. DestPortN o Number of the destination E1/T1 ports for timeslot cross links Value range: 0 0 TS16 to TS23 13 Internal planning 3 Example 13 Source 6-142 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Preparation Table 6-38 Negotiation and planned data of the timeslot cross links Input Data Source slot No. Prerequisite The negotiation and planned data is ready. the timeslots of both links do not conflict. When both E1/T1 2 and 3 use the timeslot cross channel. TSBitMap DestSlotN o Value range: TS1 to TS31 Number of the slot that holds the NDTI or NUTI (The number must be identical with that of the SlotNo) Value range: 12 through 15 Destinatio n port No. The source and destination ports of the timeslot cross channel must be different.. No IMA or UNI links can be added to the source E1/T1 link where the timeslots cross channel is configured.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Mandatory/ Optional Optional NOTE l l l l The timeslot cross channel can be configured on only the E1/T1 port 2 through 3 on the baseboards in slots 12 through 15.

and then click the TSCross tab. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. click in the configuration object pane. and then click . Select the timeslot to be used. The TimeSlot Select dialog box is displayed. and then click displayed. Step 6 Select TSBitMap. select a destination port. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. and click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. Select an E1/T1 port. . the Search E1/T1 Port window is displayed. Ltd 6-143 . Step 4 Click Network. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed.. In area 2. The tab page is displayed. and then click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. as shown in Figure 6-48. Figure 6-48 Configuring the timeslot cross channel Table 6-39 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 Description Area for the destination port Configuration area of the timeslot cross channel Step 5 In area 1. Step 2 Click . and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. and then click . select TScrossNo.

.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NOTE NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide The CME automatically filters the timeslot that is already occupied or reserved on the same E1/T1 port. the total number of transmission groups over ATM and IP. and then click cross channel. The used timeslots appear dark green. The configuration is required only when the SAAL links. refer to 6. which is used to allocates the bandwidth of the physical link to the transmission resource group for carrying the data on the control plane. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . ----End to add a timeslot 6. and the OM channel. the AAL2 Optional PATH or the OMCH links join the transmission resource group.5. The transmit bandwidth of the transmission resource group should be not greater than the idle bandwidth at the physical links. Prerequisite The physical layer data is configured. Each Iub interface board or BBU supports a maximum of 16 transmission resource groups over ATM or 8 transmission resource groups over IP. Preparation Table 6-40 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group (over ATM) Input Data Port type Field Name Type Description Type of the interface that carries the transmission resource group Optional parameters: l l l l Exampl e IMA Source FRAATM IMA UNI STM1 Internal planning 6-144 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. that is. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional. Each group occupies one portion of the bandwidth and has separate access control. NOTE l l l Each physical link can be configured with a maximum of four transmission groups.1 Adding Links at the Physical Layer (Initial). congestion control and HSPA flow control.5. The available timeslots appear yellow. the user plane. Step 7 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data.2 Adding Transmission Resource Group (Initial. over ATM) This describes how to add the transmission resource group.

The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. click in the configuration object pane..NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Resource group number Transmit bandwidth Field Name RscgrpNo Description Value range: 0 through 3 Exampl e 1 Source TxBandwidt h The transmit bandwidth of the resource group cannot exceed the bandwidth of the port to which the resource group belong. Step 4 Click RSCGroup. and then click displayed. Ltd 6-145 . Step 2 Click . . Value range: 30 through 20000 5000 Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. as shown in Figure 6-49. Value range: 32 through 15800 5000 Receive bandwidth RxBandwid th Receive bandwidth of the resource group.

select RscgrpNo and then click Step 6 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data..3 Adding SAAL Links (Initial) This describes how to add SAAL links.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 6-49 Configuring the transmission resource group Table 6-41 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 Description Configured physical link list Configuration area for the transmission resource group Step 5 In area 1. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional 6-146 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. select a physical bearer link. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . In area 2. ----End .5. and then click resource group over ATM. to add a transmission 6. The SAAL links are used to carry the NBAP and ALCAP when the Iub interface is over ATM.

refer to 6. The transmission resource group is configured. over ATM). Value range: l Macro NodeB: 32 through 255 (NDTI) or 32 through 127 (NUTI) Distributed NodeB: 32 through 127 l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the PCR of the SAAL should be less than or equal to the bandwidth of the transmission resource group. l Preparation Table 6-42 Negotiation and planned data of the SAAL links Input Data Port type Field Name Type Description Type of the interface that carries the SAAL links Optional parameters: l l l l Exampl e IMA Source FRAATM IMA UNI STM1 1 Negotiati on with the destinatio n Virtual channel identifier VPI Identifier of the virtual channel for the SAAL links.5. The PCR value of the SAAL link should be less than or equal to the available bandwidth of the physical link that carries this SAAL link.2 Adding Transmission Resource Group (Initial.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide NOTE 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) l l l The PCR value should be greater than the SCR value for the SAAL.5. Value range: l Macro NodeB: 0 through 31 (six successive values from 0 to 31) Distributed NodeB: 0 through 29 34 l Virtual channel identifier VCI Identifier of the virtual channel for the SAAL links.1 Adding Links at the Physical Layer (Initial). refer to 6. Prerequisite l The physical layer link is configured.. If the SAAL is added to the transmission resource group. Ltd 6-147 .

Optional parameters: l Exampl e RTVBR Source CBR (applicable to the CES channel) RTVBR (applicable to services carried on the AAL2 path) NRTVBR (applicable to services carried on the AAL5 path) UBR+ (unspecified bit rate.. - l Minimum cell rate MCR The value of the MCR of the ATM channel should be smaller than that of the PCR. When the service type is RTVBR. NRTVBR or UBR+. you need to set parameters SCR and PCR. the value range is 30 to 6760. This parameter is valid only when the service type is UBR+. NRTVBR or UBR+. the value of this parameter should be greater than that of the SCR or MCR. provides cell rate guarantee) UBR (unspecified bit rate) 200 l l l l Peak cell rate PCR Peak cell rate of the ATM channel When the service type is RTVBR. the value range is 31 to 6760. you need to set only the parameter PCR. Value range: 30 through 6759 Sustainable cell rate SCR The value of the SCR of the ATM channel should be smaller than that of the PCR. you need to set parameters PCR and MCR.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Service type Field Name ServiceTyp e Description When this parameter is set to CBR or UBR. when this parameter is set to UBR+. This parameter is valid only when the service type is RTVBR or NRTVBR Value range: 30 through 6759 180 6-148 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . l When the service type is CBR or UBR. when this parameter is set to RTVBR or NRTVBR.

as shown in Figure 6-50.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Join the resource group Field Name JoinRscgrp Description Specify whether this link should be added to the resource group. Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.. . Figure 6-50 Configuring the SAAL Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Optional parameters: l l Exampl e ENABL E Source DISABLE ENABLE 1 Internal planning Resource group number RscgrpNo Number of the ATM transmission resource group Value range: 0 through 3 Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. Step 4 Click SAAL. click in the configuration object pane. Ltd 6-149 . The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. and then click displayed. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed.

select the physical bearer link.5. In area 3. click SAALNo. the standby one should be configured on the SCTP. and click .5. the Search Resource Group window is displayed. Step 6 (Optional) Set JoinRscgrp to ENABLE. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Step 7 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data..3 Adding SAAL Links (Initial). Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional NOTE l l l One NodeB can be configured with the active and the standby NCPs or CCPs. NOTE The physical bearer type of the transmission resource group is identical with that of the SAAL link.4 Adding an NBAP (Initial) This describes how to configure the NodeB Control Port (NCP) and Communication Control Port (CCP). Then the transmission resource group carried on this physical link is displayed in area 2. Otherwise the configuration is invalid. and click . and click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. Select a transmission resource group. if the active one is configured on the SAAL. and then click link. 6-150 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 6-50 and Table 6-43 show the matching relation. For example. Prerequisite The SAAL links are configured. ----End to add an SAAL 6. The active and the standby NCPs or CCPs should be configured on different links. Select RscgrpNo. These two ports are carried on the SAAL links.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Table 6-43 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 Description Configured physical link list Transmission resource group carried on the corresponding physical link Configuration area for the SAAL links Step 5 In area 1. Each SAAL link can be configured with only one NCP or CCP. as described in 6.

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Preparation Table 6-44 Negotiation and planned data of the NBAP Input Data Port type Field Name PortType Description Optional parameters: l l Exampl e NCP Source NCP CCP 1 Internal planning Negotiati on with the destinati on SAAL number NCP Flag SAALNo SAAL number that carries the NCP Value range: 0 through 63 Flag Master/slave flag for the transmission channels Optional parameters: l l MASTE R SLAVE MASTER CCP Internal planning Port type PortType Optional parameters: l l NCP CCP 0 Internal planning Port No. PortNo Number of the CCP port. This parameter is valid only when PortType is set to CCP. Ltd 6-151 . Value range: 0 through 65535 CCP SAAL number SAALNo SAAL number that carries the CCP Value range: 0 through 63 2 Negotiati on with the destinati on Flag Flag Master/slave flag for the transmission channels Optional parameters: l l MASTE R SLAVE MASTER Internal planning Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. in area 2. and then click displayed. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. as shown in Figure 6-51. Figure 6-51 Configuring the NCP and the CCP Table 6-45 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 Description Configured SAAL link list Configuration area of the NBAP Step 5 In area 1.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. Step 4 Click NBAP. click in the configuration object pane. select PortType and then click parameters based on prepared data. select an SAAL link. . .. Configure related 6-152 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. and then click to add an NCP link. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Step 2 Click .

5 Adding an ALCAP (Initial) This describes how to configure an AAL2 node to the NodeB so that the ALCAP is added at the NodeB. Ltd 6-153 . as described in 6. The exchange node cannot be carried on the SAAL link on the NDTI. The ALCAP allocates the micro channels of the AAL2 path. select PortType and then click parameters based on prepared data.5..5. Therefore. The distributed NodeB can be configured with only the nodes of type.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Step 6 In area 1. and then click ----End to add an CCP link. indicating that the NodeB has a lower-level NodeB) ADJNODE (adjacent node. indicating the lower-level NodeB) Internal planning l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Adding SAAL Links (Initial). An exchange node cannot be configured on the SAAL over the NDTI. The ATM address must begin with 39/45/47 and end with that in accordance with the protocol. Optional parameters: l l Example LOCAL Source LOCAL (peer node) HUB (switch node. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional NOTE l l l l One NodeB can be configured with multiple adjacent nodes. One NodeB can be configured with either one end node or one exchange node. you need to configure the SAAL over the NUTI before you configure the exchange node if required. . Configure related 6. select an SAAL link. in area 2. Preparation Table 6-46 Negotiation and planned data of the ALCAP Input Data Node type Field Name NodeType Description The exchange node must be configured before configuring the adjacent node. Prerequisite l l The SAAL links are configured.

Step 4 Click ALCAP. H'390101 01010101 01010101 01010101 01010101 01 SAAL number SAALNo SAAL number that carries the ALCAP Value range: 0 through 63 3 Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. click in the configuration object pane. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . The address is a hexadecimal with a length of 20 bytes (excluding the prefix H'). This parameter is valid only when the parameter NodeType is set to ADJNODE. and then click displayed. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. as shown in Figure 6-52.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Adjacent node identifier Field Name ANI Description Identify an adjacent node. The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. When the NodeB uses ATM transmission. the NSAP is the address of the NodeB that is connected to the AAL2 path. Step 2 Click . . Value range: 0 through 31 Example - Source Network service access point NSAP The full name is: Net service access point. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. 6-154 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

The AAL2 path carries the user plane data between the RNC and other equipment. Click NOTE to add an AAL2 node.6 Adding AAL2 Path Data (Initial) This describes how to add AAL2 PATH data over ATM. The NodeType is set to :NSAP can be configured only at the NodeB side. select the node type of the AAL2 link. Step 6 In the drop-down list. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l l l The NodeType is set to :NSAP must be the same as the NSAP of the logical NodeB created at the RNC side. select an SAAL link. select NodeType and then click .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Figure 6-52 Adding the AAL2 node Table 6-47 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 Description Configured SAAL link list Configuration area of the ALCAP Step 5 In area 1. in area 2..5. Ltd 6-155 . The NodeType is set to :NSAP needs no configuration. and configure other parameters based on prepared data. ----End 6.

5. and the links are not in a resource group. Each NUTI board can be configured with a maximum of 32 AAL2 PATH.5 Adding an ALCAP (Initial). If a physical port is configured with the transmission resource groups. The transmission resource group is configured. over ATM). refer to 6. HSPA_RT. Optional parameters: RT. No transmission resource group can be added to this physical port.5.2 Adding Transmission Resource Group (Initial. refer to 6. For an AAL2 path. l Prerequisite l l The AAL2 nodes are configured.. all the AAL2 paths should be added to a certain transmission resource group. NRT. and the PCR of the AAL2 path should be less than the bandwidth of the transmission resource group. Preparation Table 6-48 Negotiation and planned data of the AAL2 PATH Input Data Port type Field Name Type Description Type of the interface that carries the AAL2 PATH Optional parameters: l l l l Example IMA Source FRAATM IMA UNI STM1 RT Negotiat ion with the destinati on PATH type PathType Type of the AAL2 path.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NOTE NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide l l l l l Each NDTI board can be configured with a maximum of 16 AAL2 PATH. The PCR value of the AAL2 path should be less than or equal to the available bandwidth of the physical link that carries the AAL2 path. If a physical port is configured with AAL2 path links or IP path links. Value range: l Virtual channel identifier VPI 1 Macro NodeB: 0 through 31 (six successive values from 0 to 31) Distributed NodeB: 0 through 29 l 6-156 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. HSPA_NRT Identifier of the virtual channel for the AAL2 path. For details. the PCR value should be greater than the SCR value. which indicates the desired service type carried on the path. The sum of the IP paths and AAL2 paths configured on one NodeB should be less than or equal to 16. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .

the value range is 31 through 15800.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Virtual channel identifier Field Name VCI Description Identifier of the virtual channel for the AAL2 path.or UBR+. When the sub-board type is Channelled CoverBoard or Unchannelled CoverBoard. and the service type is CBR or UBR. NRTVBR. This parameter should be one of the bandwidth parameters for the transmission direction. l When the sub-board type is BaseBoard. l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NRTVBR or UBR+. the value of this parameter should be greater than that of the SCR. provides cell rate guarantee) UBR (unspecified bit rate) 1920 l l l l Peak cell rate PCR Peak cell rate of the ATM channel When the service type is RTVBR.. Value range: l Example 37 Source Macro NodeB: 32 through 255 (NDTI) or 32 through 127 (NUTI) Distributed NodeB: 32 through 127 RTVBR l Service type ServiceTyp e Optional parameters: l CBR (applicable to the CES channel) RTVBR (applicable to services carried on the AAL2 path) NRTVBR (applicable to services carried on the AAL5 path) UBR+ (unspecified bit rate. Ltd 6-157 . the value range is 30 through 15800. and the service type is RTVBR.

. Whether or not this parameter is correctly configured will affect the effect of flow control. Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE 1 Internal planning Resource group number RscgrpNo Number of the ATM transmission resource group Value range: 0 through 3 Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. 6-158 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Sustainabl e cell rate Field Name SCR Description The value of the SCR of the ATM channel should be smaller than that of the PCR. Value range: 64 through 20000 Join the resource group JoinRscgrp Specify whether AAL2 path should be added to the resource group. This parameter acts as an important factor in flow control by the NodeB receive bandwidth. click in the configuration object pane. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. When the sub-board type is Channelled CoverBoard or Unchannelled CoverBoard. the value range is 30 through 6759. Step 2 Click . and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. l Example 960 Source When sub-board type is BaseBoard. 2048 l Received cell rate RCR This parameter must be consistent with the downlink bandwidth configured by the RNC. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. This parameter is valid only when the service type is RTVBR or NRTVBRThis parameter should be one of the bandwidth parameters for the transmission direction. the value range is 30 through 15799.

Figure 6-53 Configuring the AAL2 PATH Table 6-49 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 4 Description Configured AAL2 node list Configured physical link list Transmission resource group carried on the corresponding physical link Configuration area for the AAL2 path Step 5 In area 1. select an AAL2 node. the Search Resource Group window is displayed. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The physical bearer type of the resource group is the same as that of the AAL2 PATH.. The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window is Step 4 Click AAL2PATH. click AAL2PathId. and then click displayed. and click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. in area 2. Select a transmission resource group.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. Select RscgrpNo. Then the transmission resource group carried on this physical link is displayed in area 3. select the physical bearer link. Ltd 6-159 . as shown in Figure 6-53. and click NOTE . . In area 4. Figure 6-53 and Table 6-49 show the matching relation. and click . Step 6 (Optional) Set JoinRscgrp to ENABLE.

the value of the parameter should meet the following condition: MCR<PCR and 0<MCR<PCR<=bandwidth configured for the RSCGRP ----End 6. it takes effect as the active channel. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional NOTE l In ATM transport mode.5. l 6-160 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the value of the parameter should meet the following condition: 0 < SCR < PCR ≤ RSCGRP configuration bandwidth. refer to 6. the PCR of the OMCH should be less than or equal to the bandwidth of the transmission resource group. only one OMCH can be configured. For an OMCH. the PCR value should be greater than the SCR value.5. The PCR value of the OMCH should be less than or equal to the available bandwidth of the physical link that carries the OMCH. the configuration does not take effect. The transmission resource group is configured. If the service type is UBR+.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Step 7 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data.1 Adding Links at the Physical Layer (Initial). It can be either active or standby. refer to 6. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Local IP addresses of two OMCH channels cannot be on the same network segment.2 Adding Transmission Resource Group (Initial. if the configured OMCH is standby. If the configured OMCH is active.5. over ATM). NOTE to add an AAL2 l l If the service type is either RTVBR or NRTVBR. over ATM) This describes how to add an Operation and Maintenance Channel (OMCH) of the NodeB.. l l l l l Prerequisite l The physical layer link is configured. and then click path link.7 Adding an OMCH of the NodeB (Initial. If the OMCH is added to the transmission resource group. The local IP address and the destination IP address of the OMCH must be in the same network segment.

the value of this parameter should be greater than that of the SCR.. the value range is 30 to 6760. When the service type is RTVBR. the value range is 31 to 6760.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Preparation Table 6-50 Negotiation and planned data of the OMCH (ATM) Input Data Port type Field Name Type Description Type of the interface that carries the OMCH Optional parameters: l l l l Example UNI Source FRAATM IMA UNI STM1 1 Virtual channel identifier VPI Virtual channel for the OMCH Value range: l Macro NodeB: 1 or within the VPI range of the actual board configuration Distributed NodeB: 0 through 29 33 l Virtual channel identifier VCI Virtual channel for the OMCH Value range: l Macro NodeB: 32 through 255 (NDTI) or 32 through 127 (NUTI) Distributed NodeB: 32 through 127 CBR l Service type ServiceTy pe Optional parameters: l CBR (applicable to the CES channel) RTVBR (applicable to services carried on the AAL2 path) NRTVBR (applicable to services carried on the AAL5 path) UBR+ (unspecified bit rate. l When the service type is CBR or UBR. Ltd . NRTVBR or UBR+. 6-161 l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NRTVBR or UBR+. provides cell rate guarantee) UBR (unspecified bit rate) 512 Negotiati on with the destinati on l l l l Peak cell rate PCR Peak cell rate of the ATM channel When the service type is RTVBR.

1. Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE 2 Internal planning Resource group number Flag RscgrpNo Number of the ATM transmission resource group Value range: 0 through 3 Flag Master/slave flag for the remote OM channels Optional parameters: l l MASTE R SLAVE MASTER Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME.1.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Sustainable cell rate Field Name SCR Description The value of the SCR of the ATM channel should be smaller than that of the PCR.0 JoinRscgrp Specify whether AAL2 path should be added to the resource group. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane.2. 6-162 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. that is.255. Subnet mask of the destination IP address for NodeB remote maintenance 10. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. click in the configuration object pane. Step 2 Click . 255. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . the IP address configured on the ATM interface board at the RNC. This parameter is valid only when the service type is RTVBR or NRTVBR Value range: 30 through 6759 Example - Source Local IP address of the OMCH Destination IP address of the OMCH Destination subnet mask of the OMCH Join the resource group LocalIP IP address for NodeB remote maintenance Destination IP address for NodeB remote maintenance. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.1 DestIPMas k 255..2.10 DestIP 10.

Select RscgrpNo. The IP and IP Mask dialog box is displayed. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. select the physical bearer link. The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window is Table 6-51 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 Description Configured physical link list Transmission resource group carried on the corresponding physical link OMCH configuration area Step 5 In area 1. and then click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. and click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. Select a transmission resource group. the Search Resource Group window is displayed. the LocalIP & Mask dialog box is displayed. and then click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. select LocalIP. Figure 6-54 Adding an OMCH . and click . and click . Step 7 Select DestIP. as shown in Figure 6-54. and click . Step 6 In area 3..NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. Ltd 6-163 . and then click displayed. Then the transmission resource group carried on this physical link is displayed in area 2. Step 8 (Optional) Set JoinRscgrp to ENABLE. Set the peer IP address and the mask of the OMCH. Set the peer IP address and the mask of the OMCH. Step 4 Click OMCH.

the treelink PVC added to the Hub NodeB can provide the data transmission channel between the upper-level NE and the lower-level NE. Preparation Table 6-52 Negotiation and planned data of the treelink PVC Input Data Source port type Field Name SourceType Description Type of the interface that carries the source port of the treelink PVC Optional parameters: l l l l Exampl e FRAAT M Source FRAATM IMA UNI STM1 Internal planning 6-164 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When the NodeB are cascaded.5. refer to 6. the PCR value should be greater than the SCR value. For the treelink PVC. Prerequisite The physical layer link is configured.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NOTE NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide The physical bearer type of the resource group is identical with that of the OMCH. Figure 6-54 and Table 6-51 show the matching relation. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional NOTE l l l The source port and the destination port must be different. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) ..5.1 Adding Links at the Physical Layer (Initial). Step 9 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data. The bandwidth of the treelink PVC should be less than or equal to the bandwidth of the physical port (such as the types of IMA group and UNI link) that bears the treelink PVC.8 Adding a Treelink PVC (Initial) This describes how to add a treelink PVC to the Hub NodeB. ----End to add an OMCH 6. and then click link.

Ltd 6-165 . For the VC switching. the source port VPI must be within the VPI configured to the board. and the value can be 1.. Optional parameters: l DISABLE (disable the ByPassMode) ENABLE (enable the ByPassMode) 1 l Source VPI SourVPI Virtual channel used by the upper level network link l For the VP switching. the source port VPI must be beyond the VPI configured to the board. The treelink PVC is set using the ByPassMode that thus guarantees the connection between the lower node and the RNC. l For the macro NodeB. and the value cannot be 1. the value range is 32 through 255 (NDTI) or 32 through 127 (NUTI) For the distributed NodeB. 33 l l Negotiati on with the destinatio n Source VCI SourVCI Identifier of the virtual channel for the upper-level links. the E1/T1 can be connected to the lower node by switching to the ByPassMode. For the VC switching. the SourVPI and the DestVPI must meet the conditions of the source board and the destination board respectively. This parameter is valid for VC switching. the value range is 32 through 127 l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Destinatio n port type Field Name DestinationT ype Description Type of the interface that carries the destination port of the treelink PVC Optional parameters: l l l l Exampl e UNI Source FRAATM IMA UNI STM1 DISABL E ByPassMo de ByPassMode When the NodeB is powered off or exceptions occur to the NodeB.

the SourVPI and the DestVPI must meet the conditions of the source board and the destination board respectively. the value range is 32 through 255 (NDTI) or 32 through 127 (NUTI) For the distributed NodeB. l For the macro NodeB. the value of this parameter should be greater than that of the SCR. When the service type is RTVBR. and the value can be 1. the value range is 31 to 6760. the value range is 30 to 6760.. NRTVBR or UBR+. NRTVBR or UBR+. This parameter is valid for VC switching. the value range is 32 through 127 RTVBR l Service type ServiceType Optional parameters: l l l l RTVBR NRTVBR UBR (unspecified bit rate) UBR+ (unspecified bit rate. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . the destination port VPI must be beyond the VPI configured to the board. l When the service type is UBR. 32 l l Destinatio n VCI DestVCI Identifier of the virtual channel for the lower-level links. For the VC switching. For the VC switching. l 6-166 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. provides cell rate guarantee) 400 Peak cell rate PCR Peak cell rate of the ATM channel When the service type is RTVBR.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Destinatio n VPI Field Name DestVPI Description Virtual channel used by the lowerlevel network link l Exampl e 1 Source For the VP switching. the destination port VPI must be within the VPI configured to the board. and the value cannot be 1.

click in the configuration object pane. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. as shown in Figure 6-55. Step 4 Click Network. This parameter is valid only when the service type is RTVBR or NRTVBR Value range: 30 through 6759 Exampl e 380 Source Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME..NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Sustainabl e cell rate Field Name SCR Description The value of the SCR of the ATM channel should be smaller than that of the PCR. Step 2 Click . . Figure 6-55 NodeB ATM Transport Layer (Treelink PVC) window Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and then click displayed. The tab page is displayed. Ltd 6-167 . The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. and then click the TreeLink PVC tab. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed.

and the value can be 1.255 192.1.168. between baseband boards. For details. 10.255.0 to 192.21. Step 6 In area 3. and the value cannot be 1.255. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . the reserved IP addresses are as follows: l l l l 10.*: local loop address 10.255 127.255. ServiceType.22.2. The CME automatically allocates parameters SourVPI.21.15/16: reserved for DBS3800 or iDBS3800 local maintenance. Click NOTE to add a treelink PVC. and DestVCI. and the value cannot be 1. Set the other parameters such as VCXType.0. For the VC switching.0 to 172. SourVCI. and SCR. the CME reserves the following IP addresses: l l The data of the equipment layer of the NodeB is configured.0 to 10.255. the CME reserves the following IP addresses: l l To configure the macro NodeB.. To configure the distributed NodeB.0.0.16. and then click to add a TreeLink PVC.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Table 6-53 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 Description Source port list: shows all configured physical links Destination port list: shows all configured physical links Treelink PVC configuration area Step 5 Select a source port in area 1.22. l For the VP switching.31. 17.*/24: reserved for inter-BBU communication 17.6 Manually Adding Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over IP) This describes how to configure the transport layer data of the NodeB in IP transport mode. l ----End 6. PCR. and the value can be 1.*.*. The destination port VPI must be out of the VPI range configured to the board. Prerequisite NOTE In the TCP/IP protocol.0. refer to: 6-168 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. select VCXNo.15/16: reserved for BTS3812A/BTS3812E/BTS3812AE local maintenance. the source port VPI must be out of the VPI range configured to the board.*/24: reserved for communications between the NMPT and the standby NMPT.2.1. the source port VPI must be within the VPI range configured to the board.255 172. and between the NMPT and the NodeB Iub interface board.168. select a destination port in area 2. DestVPI. the destination port VPI must be within the VPI range configured to the board.

Each resource group has its separate access control. Ltd 6-169 .1 Adding a Link at the Data Link Layer (Initial) This describes how to configure the data at the data link layer of the NodeB. and the timeslot cross channel.2 Adding an IP Route (Initial) This describes how to add an IP route for transmitting the NodeB IP data of the transmission control plane.7 Adding an OMCH of the NodeB (Initial.6.6. The data link layer consists of the PPP link. PPPoE link.6 Adding IP Path Data (Initial) This describes how to add an IP PATH for transmitting the user plane data. congestion control. 6.1 Adding PPP Link Data (Initial) Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The SCTP links are used to carry the IPCP. over IP) This describes how to add the transmission resource group. The NodeB can obtain the clock signals from the clock server through the IP link. MLPPP link. 6. and IP address of the FE port. These two ports are carried on the SCTP links. And you can configure only one type or configure all the types. 6..4 Adding an IPCP (Initial) This describes how to configure the NodeB Control Port (NCP) and Communication Control Port (CCP). MLPPP link. the user plane.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide l l 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) 6.2 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A (Initial) 6. PPPoE link.8 Adding A Bound Destination Network Segment to the Transmission Resource Group (Initial.6. the NBAP at the IP transport layer. 6.1 Adding a Link at the Data Link Layer (Initial) This describes how to configure the data at the data link layer of the NodeB. PPPoE link.6. 6.10 Modifying IP QoS Data (Initial) This describes how to modify the signaling and Operation and Maintenance (OM) priorities.4 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the DBS3800 (Initial) The process of configuring the NodeB transport layer data over IP is as follows: 6. IP address of the FE port. 6. The data link layer consists of the PPP link. 6. that is. 6. You need to configure at least one type from the PPP link.6. MLPPP link.9 Adding IP Clock Links (Initial) This describe how to add IP clock links.3 Adding SCTP Links (Initial) This describes how to add SCTP links. IP address of the FE port.6. over IP) This describes how to configure an OMCH of the NodeB in IP transport mode. which is used to allocates the bandwidth of the physical link to the transmission resource group for carrying the UE data.1. 6.5 Adding Transmission Resource Group (Initial. PPPoE link. and the timeslot cross channel. 6.6. 6.6.6. and the management plane. And you can configure only one type or configure all the types.6. IP) This describes how to add a bound destination network segment to the transmission resource group. and HSPA flow control. You need to configure at least one type from the PPP link. All data to the subnet from the port of the transmission resource group will be calculated in the transmission resource group. and IP address of the FE port. MLPPP link.6.6.

3 Adding PPPoE Data (Initial) This describes how to add PPPoE data when multiple NodeBs connect to the RNC through the Access Concentration (AC) in PPP over Ethernet network topology. For details. Adding PPP Link Data (Initial) This describes how to add PPP data. 6. or Ethernet.4 Adding DEVIP Data (Initial) This describes how to add the device IP address to the IP port.1.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial) The distributed NodeB is configured with the BBU. over ATM) This describes how to add a timeslot cross channel for the 2G equipment so as to transmit the data of services on the 3G network. Local IP addresses of the PPP link. This task is optional when the NodeB uses the E1/T1 cables.4. 6. refer to 6. refer to 6.2 Adding a BBU (Initial). This task is optional when the NodeB uses the E1/T1 cables. The MLPPP group combines multiple PPP links into a logical link.6.1. the MLPPP group. l Preparation Table 6-54 Negotiation and planned data of the ppp links Input Data Slot No. Ltd Example 13 Source Internal planning Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . One E1/T1 port can be configured with multiple PPP links and MLPPP links if the timeslots occupied by the links do not conflict.1.6.6.1. MLPPP. Prerequisite l The macro NodeB is configured with the NUTI board. and the bearer type of the BBU is set to IPV4. and the bearer type of the NUTI is set to IPV4. and the PPPoE link cannot be on the same network segment.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide This describes how to add PPP data. Field Name SlotNo Description Number of the slot that holds the NUTI Value range: 12 through 15 6-170 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 6.5 Adding a Timeslot Cross Channel (Initial. For details. This task is optional when the NodeB uses the E1/T1 cables.. The IP ports can be any of the following types: PPP.6. 6.2 Adding MLPPP Data (Initial) This describes how to add PPP data. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional NOTE l l l Local IP addresses of various PPP links cannot be on the same network segment.2.

Local IP address of the PPP link.17.17. this field is mandatory.17. If a timeslot is selected. The map is presented in binary format or the chart. l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Destination IP address of the PPP link l TS1 to TS15 Local IP address LocalIP 17. this parameter specifies the IP address of a lowerlevel cascaded node. Field Name PortNo Description Number of the E1/T1 ports for PPP links Value range: 0 through 7 Example 0 Source Link number LinkNo Each PPP link and each MLPPP link must have a unique number. Value range: 0 through 15 0 Authentica tion type AuthType Optional parameters: l NONAUTH (without authentication) PAP (with PAP authentication) CHAP (with CHAP authentication) NONAU TH l l User name UserName When AuthType is not set to NONAUTH. In non-cascading mode..NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Port No. Otherwise.0.0.17. 17 Negotiati on with the destinatio n In cascading mode. Value range: not greater than 64 characters - Timeslot map TSBitMap A map of the timeslots for PPP links.0. ENABLE: The UDP/IP header of the peer end is compressed. ENABLE Internal planning l IP header compressi on IPHC Optional parameters: l DISABLE: The IP header of the peer end is not compressed. When the value is 0. when the value is 0. it is not in use. otherwise. Ltd 6-171 . 111 Destinatio n IP address PeerIP 17. it is in use. it indicates that the parameter needs to be negotiated with an upper-level node. it indicates that the parameter needs to be negotiated with the RNC. the authentication fails.

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data PPP multiframe multiplexi ng Maximum received unit Restart timer of packet request response Protocol field compress Address & control field compress Field Name PPPMux Description Optional parameters: l l Example DISABL E Source ENABLE DISABLE MRU Expected value sent from the peer end Value range: 128 through 1500 1500 RestartTimer Value range: 1 through 65535 3000 PFC Optional parameters: l l ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE ACFC Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE 6-172 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .

Ltd 6-173 . AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL : According to the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL. It is recommended that the RNC be used in compliance with the R6 protocol. you can infer that the link is not congested. l l Time delay threshold HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower than this threshold. NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or delay on the Iub interface. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken into account. Value range: 0 through 1000 1 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the Uu interface reported by the NodeB. The RNC uses the R6 switch to perform this function. the reverse flow control switch must be enabled by the RNC. To perform this function. Value range: 0 through 20 4 Discard rate threshold HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frame loss ratio is not higher than this threshold. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken into account.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data HSDPA switch Field Name HsdpaSwitch Description Optional parameters: l Example AUTO_A DJUST_F LOW_CT RL Source SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by R99 users..

and click . the LocalIP & LocalMask dialog box is displayed. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The tab page is displayed. Step 8 Select PeerIP. Step 6 Select TSBitMap.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. The available timeslots appear yellow. Select an E1/ T1 port. the PeerIP dialog box is displayed. The used timeslots appear dark green. and click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. Set the local IP address and mask for the PPP link. click in the configuration object pane. and click . Step 7 Select LocalIP . The NodeB IP Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. Set the local IP address and mask for the PPP link. and then click the PPP tab. and then click . . 6-174 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 4 Click IPPort. The Search E1/T1 Port window is displayed. as shown in Figure 6-56. and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. Select the timeslot to be used. and click . NOTE The CME automatically filters the timeslot that is already occupied or reserved on the same E1/T1 port. Step 2 Click . The TimeSlot Select dialog box is displayed. and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. and then click displayed. Figure 6-56 Adding a PPP link Step 5 Select SubrackNo..

the MLPPP group. Adding MLPPP Data (Initial) This describes how to add PPP data. Each Iub interface board or BBU can be configured with a maximum of four MLPPP groups. Field Name SlotNo Description Number of the slot that holds the NUTI Value range: 12 through 15 MLPPP group number Authentica tion type GroupNo MLPPP group number Value range: 0 through 3 AuthType Optional parameters: l Exampl e 13 Source 0 Internal planning NONAUTH (without authentication) PAP (with PAP authentication) CHAP (with CHAP authentication) NONAU TH l l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and the bearer type of the BBU is set to IPV4. This task is optional when the NodeB uses the E1/T1 cables. refer to 6. Prerequisite l The macro NodeB is configured with the NUTI board. refer to 6. and each MLPPP group can be configured with a maximum of 16 MLPPP links.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial) The distributed NodeB is configured with the BBU.. One E1/T1 port can be configured with multiple PPP links and MLPPP links if the timeslots occupied by the links do not conflict. Ltd 6-175 . For details.4.2 Adding a BBU (Initial). and the bearer type of the NUTI is set to IPV4. and then click ----End to add a PPP link. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional NOTE l l l l Local IP addresses of various MLPPP groups cannot be on the same network segment.2. Local IP addresses of the PPP link. For details. l Preparation Table 6-55 Negotiation and planned data of the MLPPP group and MLPPP links Input Data Slot No. and the PPPoE link cannot be on the same network segment. The MLPPP group combines multiple PPP links into a logical link.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Step 9 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data.

Each MLPPP and each PPP link must have a unique number.0 16. otherwise.255. Optional parameters: l TS24 to TS31 Negotiati on with the destinati on IP header compressi on IPHC DISABLE: The IP header of the peer end is not compressed. ENABLE: The UDP/IP header of the peer end is compressed. this field is mandatory. ENABL E l PPP multiframe multiplexi ng Multi-class PPP PPPMux Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE DISABL E Internal planning MCPPP Optional parameters: l l ENABLE (using the MCPPP) DISABLE (not using the MCPPP) ENABL E 6-176 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. it is not in use.16. The map is presented in binary format or the chart. 111 255.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data User name Field Name UserName Description When AuthType is not set to NONAUTH.. 16 0 Negotiati on with the destinati on PeerIP PortNo Number of the E1/T1 ports for MLPPP links Value range: 0 through 7 Link number LinkNo Number of the MLPPP link that joins the MLPPP group.16. the authentication fails. LocalIP LocalMask Local IP address of the MLPPP group Subnet mask of the local IP address for the MLPPP group Peer IP address of the MLPPP group 16. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . 255. If a timeslot is selected. Value range: 0 through 15 1 Internal planning Timeslot map TSBitMap A map of the timeslots for MLPPP links.16.16. it is in use. Otherwise. Value range: not greater than 64 characters Exampl e - Source Local IP address Local subnet mask Destinatio n IP address Port No.

AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL: According to the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken into account. NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or delay on the Iub interface.. Ltd 6-177 . AUTO_ ADJUST _FLOW _CTRL l l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Maximum received unit Restart timer of packet request response Protocol field compress Address & control field compress HSDPA switch Field Name MRU Description Expected value sent from the peer end Value range: 128 through 1500 Exampl e 1500 Source RestartTimer Value range: 1 through 65535 3000 PFC Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE ENABL E ACFC Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE ENABL E HsdpaSwitch Optional parameters: l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by R99 users. To perform this function. The RNC uses the R6 switch to perform this function. the reverse flow control switch must be enabled by the RNC. It is recommended that the RNC be used in compliance with the R6 protocol. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken into account. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the Uu interface reported by the NodeB.

The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. and then click displayed. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. click in the configuration object pane. The tab page is displayed. and then click the MP tab. Value range: 0 through 20 Exampl e 4 Source Discard rate threshold HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frame loss ratio is not higher than this threshold. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. you can infer that the link is not congested.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Time delay threshold Field Name HsdpaTD Description When the time delay is lower than this threshold. Figure 6-57 Adding the MLPPP group and the MLPPP link 6-178 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 4 Click IPPort. .. Value range: 0 through 1000 1 Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Step 2 Click . as shown in Figure 6-57. The NodeB IP Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB.

and click . and click . and click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. and click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. The TimeSlot Select dialog box is displayed. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Select an E1/T1 port.. the NUTIs configured to slots 12 and 13 are displayed. Step 6 Select LocalIP . and then click group. select SubrackNo. Select an interface board. The Search Iub Board window is displayed. and click . as shown in Figure 6-58. The Search E1/T1 Port window is displayed. Select the timeslot to be used. Figure 6-58 Search Iub Board window NOTE In the Search Iub Board window. the LocalIP & LocalMask dialog box is displayed.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Table 6-56 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 Description Configuration area of the MLPPP group Configuration area of the MLPPP links Step 5 In area 1. Step 7 Select PeerIP. the PeerIP dialog box is displayed. Set the local IP address and mask for the MLPPP group. Set the local IP address and mask for the MLPPP group. and then click . to add an MLPPP Step 9 In area 2. Step 8 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data. Ltd 6-179 . Step 10 Select TSBitMap. and click . and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. select SubrackNo.

the MLPPP group. Prerequisite l The NUTI of the Macro NodeB is configured. and the PPPoE link cannot be on the same network segment. as described in 6. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional NOTE l l l l Local IP addresses of various PPPoE links cannot be on the same network segment. ----End to add an MLPPP Adding PPPoE Data (Initial) This describes how to add PPPoE data when multiple NodeBs connect to the RNC through the Access Concentration (AC) in PPP over Ethernet network topology. The available timeslots appear yellow. Step 11 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data.2. Local IP addresses of the PPP link. The PPPoE link and the ETH link can use the same FE port.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NOTE NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide The CME automatically filters the timeslot that is already occupied or reserved on the same E1/T1 port. Field Name SlotNo Description Number of the slot that holds the NUTI Value range: 12 through 15 Port No.4.. PortNo Number of the FE port for the PPPoE link Value range: 0 through 1 0 Exampl e 13 Internal planning Source 6-180 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The PPPoE links are configured to FE port 0 or 1 on the NUTI boards of slots 12 through 15. The BBU of the distributed NodeB is configured.2 Adding a BBU (Initial). and then click link. as described in 6. l Preparation Table 6-57 Negotiation and planned data of the PPPoE links Input Data Slot No.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial). The used timeslots appear dark green.

Value range: not greater than 64 characters - Local IP address Local subnet mask IP header compressio n LocalIP LocalMask Local IP address of the PPPoE link Subnet mask of the local IP address 12.0.0 ENABL E Negotiati on with the destinati on IPHC Optional parameters: l DISABLE: The IP header of the peer end is not compressed.255.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Authentica tion type Field Name AuthType Description Optional parameters: l l l Exampl e NONAU TH Source NONAUTH (without authentication) PAP (with PAP authentication) CHAP (with CHAP authentication) User name UserName This parameter is valid only when AuthType is set to PAP or CHAP.3.1 255. Ltd 6-181 . ENABLE: The UDP/IP header of the peer end is compressed. 255.. l Maximum received unit Restart timer of packet request response PPP multiframe multiplexi ng MRU Expected value sent from the peer end Value range: 128 through 1500 1450 Internal planning RestartTim er Value range: 1 through 65535 3000 PPPMux Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE DISABL E Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

6-182 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the Uu interface reported by the NodeB. the reverse flow control switch must be enabled by the RNC.. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or delay on the Iub interface. To perform this function. you can infer that the link is not congested. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken into account.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data HSDPA switch Field Name HsdpaSwit ch Description Optional parameters: l Exampl e AUTO_ ADJUST _FLOW_ CTRL Source SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by R99 users. It is recommended that the RNC be used in compliance with the R6 protocol. l l Time delay threshold HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower than this threshold. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. Value range: 0 through 1000 1 Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken into account. The RNC uses the R6 switch to perform this function. Value range: 0 through 20 4 Discard rate threshold HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frame loss ratio is not higher than this threshold. click in the configuration object pane. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL: According to the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL.

. the LocalIP & LocalMask dialog box is displayed. and click . Step 7 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. and then click the PPPoE tab.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Step 2 Click . and then click displayed. Set the local IP address and mask for the PPPoE link. . Adding DEVIP Data (Initial) This describes how to add the device IP address to the IP port. and click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. The Search Ethernet Port window is displayed. MLPPP. and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. or Ethernet. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Select an FE port. Step 4 Click IPPort. Step 6 Select LocalIP . as shown in Figure 6-59. Figure 6-59 Adding a PPPoE link Step 5 Select SubrackNo. The IP ports can be any of the following types: PPP. and click . Ltd 6-183 . The tab page is displayed. The NodeB IP Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. and then click ----End to add a PPPoE link.

and PPPoE. IP addresses for different ports cannot be on the same network segment. The PPP link. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . as described in 6. The BBU of the distributed NodeB is configured. MLPPP group.11. For details. PortNo represents the port number for the configured PPP link. l l Preparation Table 6-58 Negotiation and planned data of the DEVIP Input Data Slot No. IP addresses for the same port can be on the same network segment. and the PPPoE link are configured. Prerequisite l The NUTI of the Macro NodeB is configured. A maximum of four IP addresses can be added to one IP port. For the ETH link.6. PPP. as described in 6. PortNo l Exampl e 13 Source For the PPP link. the port value ranges from 0 to 1. MLPPP: indicates the configured MLPPP group.. 0 l Port type PortType The port types consist of the following items: l ETH Internal planning ETH: indicates the available FE port on the NUTI. MLPPP.1 Adding a Link at the Data Link Layer (Initial). 12 Negotiati on with the destinatio n l l l Local IP address LocalIP Local IP address of the device IP 6-184 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NOTE NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide l l l The four IP port types are: ETH.4. refer to 6.2 Adding a BBU (Initial). the MLPPP group. PPPoE: indicates the configured PPPoE link.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial). and the PPPoE link. PPP: indicates the configured PPP link. and the PPPoE link.12. the MLPPP group.2. 12. Field Name SlotNo Description Number of the slot that holds the NUTI Value range: 12 through 15 Port No.

Exampl e 255.255. . and then click displayed. Ltd 6-185 . use the default mask. The NodeB IP Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB.. click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. Figure 6-60 Configuring the DEVIP Table 6-59 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Description Configuration area for the device IP address Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. 255. and then click the DEVIP tab. The tab page is displayed. as shown in Figure 6-60. and then click Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. Step 4 Click IPPort.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Subnet mask of the local IP address Field Name LocalMask Description If the network is not divided into subnets.0 Source Procedure in the configuration object pane. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed.

Select an IP port. and click . and click mapping according to the actual network planning. The source and destination ports of the timeslot cross channel must be different. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Click ----End Adding a Timeslot Cross Channel (Initial. Step 6 Select LocalIP . and the same E1/T1 port cannot be repeatedly used. . and click .6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Sequence of data configuration 2 Description Configuration area for the VLAN service priority Step 5 In area 1. Step 7 Click to add the device IP address. When both E1/T1 2 and 3 use the timeslot cross channel. Set VLAN service priority to save the settings. the timeslots of both links do not conflict. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional NOTE l l l l The timeslot cross channel can be configured on only the E1/T1 port 2 through 3 on the baseboards in slots 12 through 15. Set the local IP address and mask for the device. Then. and click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. select TrafficType. That is. The Search Ethernet Port window is displayed. over ATM) This describes how to add a timeslot cross channel for the 2G equipment so as to transmit the data of services on the 3G network. and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. 6-186 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. select SubrackNo. Prerequisite The negotiation and planned data is ready. the fractional ATM link timeslot that is configured to E1/T1 0 cannot conflict with the fractional ATM link timeslot that is configured to either E1/T1 2 or 3. the LocalIP & LocalMask dialog box is displayed. No IMA or UNI links can be added to the source E1/T1 link where the timeslots cross channel is configured. Step 8 (Optional) In area 2..

The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. Ltd 6-187 . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. as shown in Figure 6-61. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. PortNo Number of the source E1/T1 ports for timeslot cross links Value range: 2 through 3 Source timeslots Destinatio n slot No. click in the configuration object pane. . The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. Step 4 Click Network. and then click the TSCross tab. TSBitMap DestSlotN o Value range: TS1 to TS31 Number of the slot that holds the NDTI or NUTI (The number must be identical with that of the SlotNo) Value range: 12 through 15 Destinatio n port No.. and then click displayed. Step 2 Click . Field Name SlotNo Description Number of the slot that holds the NDTI or NUTI Value range: 12 through 15 Source port No.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Preparation Table 6-60 Negotiation and planned data of the timeslot cross links Input Data Source slot No. DestPortN o Number of the destination E1/T1 ports for timeslot cross links Value range: 0 0 TS16 to TS23 13 Internal planning 3 Example 13 Source Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. The tab page is displayed.

and then click cross channel. Scenario NodeB initial configuration 6-188 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 6-61 Configuring the timeslot cross channel Table 6-61 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 Description Area for the destination port Configuration area of the timeslot cross channel Step 5 In area 1. The available timeslots appear yellow. the user plane. The TimeSlot Select dialog box is displayed. the Search E1/T1 Port window is displayed. ----End to add a timeslot 6. Select the timeslot to be used. The used timeslots appear dark green.2 Adding an IP Route (Initial) This describes how to add an IP route for transmitting the NodeB IP data of the transmission control plane. In area 2. and click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. and the management plane..6. Step 6 Select TSBitMap. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . NOTE The CME automatically filters the timeslot that is already occupied or reserved on the same E1/T1 port. and then click . and then click . select a destination port. Select an E1/T1 port. select TScrossNo. and then click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. Step 7 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data.

11.17. l l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. except the default route 0.0 IP AND mask must be equal to the IP address.255. 1 Stays on the same network segment as the LocalIP of the bearer link.255.1 Adding a Link at the Data Link Layer (Initial). Has valid IP address of classes A. 0 is not allowed to precede 1.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional Prerequisite The physical links at the IP transport layer are configured. This parameter must meet all the following requirements: IP AND mask must be equal to the IP address. The value cannot be 255. Preparation Table 6-62 Negotiation and planned data of the IP route Input Data Port type Field Name ItfType Description Interface type of the route Optional parameters: l l l l Exampl e ETH Source ETH MLPPP PPP PPPoE 17.0.255. This parameter is valid only when the parameter InsertFlag is set to ETH. and C. 0 Destinatio n network DestNet This parameter must meet all the following requirements: Valid network address.12. B.18.255. 255. For details..0.6. refer to 6.0 Network planning Next hop IP address NextHop 12. If the mask is converted into binary value. Ltd 6-189 . This parameter meets the following requirements: l Destinatio n mask DestMask 255.

select DestNet and then click . Step 4 Click IPRoute. Set the IP address and the mask for the destination network. The NodeB IP Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. the user plane. Figure 6-62 Adding an IP route Table 6-63 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 Description Physical link list of the configured IP transport layer Configuration area of the IP route on the control plane. In area 2. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. . click in the configuration object pane. as shown in Figure 6-62.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. and the management plane Step 5 In area 1. and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. and then click displayed. select a physical bearer link.. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. the DestNet & DestMask dialog box is displayed. 6-190 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

NOTE If the Iub interface is in layer 3 networking. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional NOTE A complete piece of information of an SCTP link contains the local IP address. In area 1. Ltd . For details. the next hop IP address is the IP address of the router connecting to the NodeB. or the IP address of the port on the layer 3 switch connecting to the NodeB. the peer IP address of the second SCTP link. the NBAP at the IP transport layer. the local IP address of the second SCTP link. refer to 6. the peer IP address. Step 6 Select NextHop.3 Adding SCTP Links (Initial) This describes how to add SCTP links. the port number of the local SCTP link. The SCTP links are used to carry the IPCP.6. that is. For details.2 Adding an IP Route (Initial). Set the IP address of the next hop.6. the NextHop dialog box is displayed. and the port number of the peer SCTP link. refer to 6. that is. ----End 6. The two SCTP links must be different in content.. that is DestIP & DestMask = DestNet.1 Adding a Link at the Data Link Layer (Initial). Destination IP address AND subnet mask is the IP address of the destination network. the out port of the route is determined. select the physical link.6. and return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. and click . Prerequisite l The physical links at the IP transport layer are configured. The route to the destination IP address is configured.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide NOTE 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) l l DestNet is the IP address of the destination network. l Preparation Table 6-64 Negotiation and planned data of the SCTP links Input Data Port type Field Name ItfType Description Type of the interface that carries the SCTP links Optional parameters: l l l l Example PPP Source Internal planning ETH MLPPP PPP PPPoE 6-191 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

0.4 Source DestIP SecLocalIP 0. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. The IP address 0. At the RNC.0..0 indicates that this address is not in use.0.17.1. the IP address of the standby physical link that carries the SCTP link.0.0 The second destination IP address SecDestIP At the RNC. The IP address 0. 6-192 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Optional parameters: l l ENABLE Internal planning ENABLE DISABLE Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. 111 14. Step 2 Click .0.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Local IP address Destination IP address The second local IP address Field Name LocalIP Description At the NodeB. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.0 indicates that this address is not in use. the services can be automatically switched back to the master IP address.0. Example 17. the IP address of the standby physical link that carries the SCTP link. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane.0. click in the configuration object pane. the IP address of the primary physical link that carries the SCTP link. 0.1.17.0 Negotiatio n with the destinatio n Local port number and destination port number Destination port number Automatical ly switches back to the master IP address LocalPort Local port number of the SCTP Value range: 1024 through 65535 1024 DestPort Destination port number of the SCTP Value range: 1024 through 65535 8021 IPAutoCha nge After the fault of the master IP address is rectified. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .0. At the NodeB. the IP address of the primary physical link that carries the SCTP link.

In area 1. Click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. The Destination IP Address & Local IP Interface window is displayed. as shown in Figure 6-64. as shown in Figure 6-63. Figure 6-63 Adding an SCTP link . The NodeB IP Transport Layer window is Table 6-65 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 Description Configuration area for the SCTP links Physical link list of the configured IP transport layer Configured SCTP route list Step 5 In area 1. Ltd 6-193 . and click . and click . and then click displayed. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 6 Select DestIP.. click SCTPNo. select the network segment route. and set the peer IP address of the SCTP link in the upper middle part of the window.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. Step 4 Click SCTP.

the CME automatically traces route related physical link. l Step 7 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data. (DestNet and LocalIP use the route of the same network segment. and then click NOTE to add an SCTP link. and the CME automatically traces the SCTP physical link and its related SCTP route. Select the configured SCTP link. the IP address of the destination network and the local IP address of the data link are on the same network segment. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .) After the route is determined. After the data link layer is configured.. The peer IP address of the SCTP link is on the same network segment with DestNet. as shown in area 2 and 3 of Figure 6-63. ----End 6-194 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. That is.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 6-64 Configuring the destination IP address of the SCTP link Table 6-66 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 Description Configuration area for the destination IP address of the SCTP Physical link list at the IP transport layer NOTE l l The local IP address of the SCTP link is the local IP address in area 1 of Figure 6-64. As shown in area 2 of Figure 6-64. the CME automatically adds the network segment route that is on the same network segment as the local IP address of the data link. For details. this physical link cannot be changed. refer to area 1 in Figure 6-64.

Each SCTP link can be configured with only one NCP or CCP. if the active one is configured on the SAAL. as described in 6. These two ports are carried on the SCTP links. The active and the standby NCPs or CCPs should be configured on different links. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional NOTE l l l One NodeB can be configured with the active and the standby NCPs or CCPs. Otherwise the configuration is invalid.4 Adding an IPCP (Initial) This describes how to configure the NodeB Control Port (NCP) and Communication Control Port (CCP). Prerequisite The SCTP links are configured. Preparation Table 6-67 Negotiation and planned data of the IPCP Input Data Port type Field Name PortType Description Optional parameters: l l Exampl e NCP Source Internal planning NCP CCP 1 SCTP number NCP Flag SCTPNo SCTP number that carries the NCP Value range: 0 through 19 Negotiati on with the destinati on Internal planning Flag Master/slave flag for the transmission channels Optional parameters: l l MASTE R SLAVE MASTER CCP Internal planning Port type CCP PortType Optional parameters: l l NCP CCP Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6. For example. Ltd 6-195 .3 Adding SCTP Links (Initial).NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) 6. the standby one should be configured on the SCTP.6..

The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. The NodeB IP Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB.. click in the configuration object pane.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Port No. and then click displayed. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Field Name PortNo Description Number of the CCP port. as shown in Figure 6-65. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. Step 2 Click . 6-196 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. . Step 4 Click IPCP. This parameter is valid only when PortType is set to CCP. Value range: 0 through 65535 Exampl e 0 Source SCTP number SCTPNo SCTP number that carries the CCP Value range: 0 through 19 2 Negotiati on with the destinati on Flag Flag Master/slave flag for the transmission channels Optional parameters: l l MASTE R Internal planning SLAVE MASTER Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME.

Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. select an SCTP link.5 Adding Transmission Resource Group (Initial. over IP) This describes how to add the transmission resource group. select an SCTP link.6. Configure related Step 6 In area 1. select PortType and then click parameters based on prepared data. CCP) Step 5 In area 1. Each resource group has its separate access control. which is used to allocates the bandwidth of the physical link to the transmission resource group for carrying the UE data.. congestion control. and then click to add an NCP link. in area 2. Scenario NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Mandatory/ Optional. . Configure related 6.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Figure 6-65 Configuring the NCP and the CCP Table 6-68 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 Description Configured SCTP link list Configuration area for the IPCP links (NCP. . in area 2. and HSPA flow control. Ltd 6-197 . select PortType and then click parameters based on prepared data. This configuration is required when the IP path joins the transmission Optional resource group. and then click ----End to add an CCP link.

The transmit bandwidth of the transmission resource group should be not greater than the idle bandwidth at the physical links. the value range is 8 through 1984. refer to 6. Preparation Table 6-69 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group (over IP) Input Data Port type Field Name ItfType Description Type of the interface that carries the IP transmission resource group Optional parameters: l l l l Example ETH Source ETH MLPPP PPP PPPoE 0 Internal planning Resource group number Transmit bandwidth RscgrpNo Value range: 0 through 3 TxBandwi dth The transmit bandwidth of the resource group cannot exceed the bandwidth of the port to which the resource group belong.. the value range is 8 through 100000.6. Each Iub interface board or BBU supports a maximum of 16 transmission resource groups over ATM or 8 transmission resource groups over IP. When the port type is PPPoE. the total number of transmission groups over ATM and IP. When the port type is PPP. that is. Prerequisite The physical links at the IP transport layer are configured.1 Adding a Link at the Data Link Layer (Initial). When the port type is MLPPP. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . the value range is 8 through 31744. For details.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NOTE NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide l l l Each physical link can be configured with a maximum of four transmission groups. the value range is 8 through 100000. l 10000 When the port type is ETH. l l l 6-198 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

the value range is 8 through 1984. When the port type is MLPPP. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. When the port type is PPP. When the port type is PPPoE. Figure 6-66 Adding the IP transmission resource group Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and then click Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. Ltd 6-199 . Step 4 Click RSCGroup.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Receive bandwidth Field Name RxBandwi dth Description Receive bandwidth of the resource group. l l l Procedure in the configuration object pane. The NodeB IP Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. Step 2 Click . l Example 10000 Source When the port type is ETH. the value range is 8 through 100000. . the value range is 8 through 100000. click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. as shown in Figure 6-66. the value range is 8 through 31744.. and then click displayed.

----End . If an IP link is configured with a transmission resource group. The transmission resource group is configured. If a physical port is configured with AAL2 paths or IP paths. In area 2.5 Adding Transmission Resource Group (Initial.6 Adding IP Path Data (Initial) This describes how to add an IP PATH for transmitting the user plane data. as described in 6.6. The total number the configured IP paths and AAL2 paths of the HSPA type cannot exceed 16. Prerequisite l The IP routes to destination addresses are configured. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional NOTE l l l l l l One Iub interface board can be configured with a maximum of 16 IP paths. Each NodeB can be configured with a maximum of 32 IP paths.2 Adding an IP Route (Initial). Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Table 6-70 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 Description Physical link list of the configured IP transport layer Configuration area for the transmission resource group Step 5 In area 1. l 6-200 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The values of the parameters DSCP and TrafficType configured for the IP path in the same transport layer link must differ.6. No transmission resource group can be added to this physical port. all IP path links configured at this IP link must join the transmission resource group of the IP link. refer to 6. select RscgrpNo and then click Step 6 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data..6. The destination IP addresses for the IP PATH configured at the same transport layer link must be the same. to add a transmission 6. select a physical bearer link. over IP). and the links are not in a resource group. and then click resource group over IP.

18. l When the port type is PPP. When the port type is ETH. the value range is 8 through 31744. the value range is 8 through 100000. when PATH does not join the resource group. the receive bandwidth doe not exceed the bandwidth of the physical port. When the port type is MLPPP.. the value range is 8 through 1984. l l l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 121 Negotiati on with the destinatio n Network planning Destinatio n IP address DestIP Destination IP address of the IP path DSCP priority Service type DSCP TrafficType Value range: 0 through 63 Optional parameters: l l l l 60 RT RT NRT HSPA_RT HSPA_NRT 1000 Negotiati on with the destinatio n Receive bandwidth RxBandwith When PATH joins the resource group.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Preparation Table 6-71 Negotiation and planned data of the IP PATH Input Data Port type Field Name ItfType Description Type of the interface that carries the IP PATH Optional parameters: l l l l Example ETH Source Internal planning ETH MLPPP PPP PPPoE 17. the receive bandwidth does not exceed the bandwidth of the resource group. When the port type is PPPoE.17. the value range is 8 through 100000. Ltd 6-201 .

When the port type is ETH.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Transmit bandwidth Field Name TxBandwith Description When PATH joins the resource group. 500000 l l l Transmit committed burst size TxCBS Value range: 15000 to 155000000. the receive bandwidth doe not exceed the bandwidth of the physical port. the receive bandwidth does not exceed the bandwidth of the resource group.. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . l Example 1000 Source When the port type is PPP. the value range is 8 through 100000. Unit: bit Transmit excessive burst size Path check TxEBS Value range: 0 through 155000000 Unit: bit 1000000 PathCheck Optional parameters: l l ENABLE: Path check is enabled. DISABL E Internal planning Join the resource group JoinRscgrp Specify whether the IP PATH should be added to the resource group. when PATH does not join the resource group. the value range is 8 through 100000. The recommended value is 1/2 of the transmit bandwidth. the value range is 8 through 1984. DISABLE: Path check is disabled. the value range is 8 through 31744. When the port type is PPPoE. When the port type is MLPPP. Optional parameters: l l ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE 0 Resource group number RscgrpNo Number of the IP transmission resource group Value range: 0 through 3 6-202 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Step 4 Click IPPath. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. Ltd 6-203 . The NodeB IP Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. click in the configuration object pane. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. Step 2 Click . . Figure 6-67 Configuring the IP PATH Table 6-72 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 4 Description Configuration area for the IP path Physical link list of the configured IP transport layer Transmission resource group carried on the corresponding physical link Configured IP path route list Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and then click displayed.. as shown in Figure 6-67.

this IP transmission resource group cannot be changed. the IP address of the destination network and the local IP address of the data link are on the same network segment. and click . and set the peer IP address of the IP path in the upper middle part of the window. Step 6 Select DestIP. For details. Click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . the CME automatically adds the network segment route that is on the same network segment as the local IP address of the data link. and click . As shown in area 2 of Figure 6-68. click PathId. The peer IP address of the IP PATH is on the same network segment with DestNet. select the network segment route. (DestNet and LocalIP use the route of the same network segment. After the data link layer is configured.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Step 5 In area 1.. The Destination IP window is displayed. That is. as shown in Figure 6-68. refer to area 1 in Figure 6-68.) After the route is determined. l 6-204 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 6-68 Configuring the destination IP address of the IP PATH Table 6-73 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 Description Configuration area for the destination IP address of the IP PATH Physical link list at the IP transport layer NOTE l l The local IP address of the IP PATH is the local IP address in area 1 of Figure 6-68. the CME automatically traces route related IP transmission resource group. In area 1.

Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional NOTE l A maximum of two OMCH channels are added. and then the CME automatically traces the related IP transmission resource group and the IP path route. The IP routes to destination addresses are configured. the data will not take effect. Step 8 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data. Select the configured IP path. as described in 6.. over IP) This describes how to configure an OMCH of the NodeB in IP transport mode. l Prerequisite l The physical links at the IP transport layer are configured. the master and the slave channels.6. Select a transmission resource group. NOTE The physical bearer type of the resource group is identical with that of the IP path. and click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. Local IP addresses of two OMCH channels cannot be on the same network segment. For details. that is. Figure 6-67 and Table 6-72 show the matching relation.1 Adding a Link at the Data Link Layer (Initial). if it acts as the slave channel. the Search Resource Group window is displayed. and then click NOTE to add an IP path.7 Adding an OMCH of the NodeB (Initial.6. and click . ----End 6. Select RscgrpNo. as shown in areas 3 and 4 of Figure 6-67. refer to 6. the data takes effect.6. You can also configure only one OMCH channel.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Step 7 (Optional) Set JoinRscgrp to ENABLE. Ltd 6-205 . l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Adding an IP Route (Initial). If it acts as the master channel.

Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . BindDestIP Mask NextHop This parameter is valid only when the parameter BindRouteValid is set to YES. Route binding is necessary when the peer IP address of the OMCH is on different network segments from the DestNet in the 6.11.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Preparation Table 6-74 Negotiation and planned data of the OMCH (IP) Input Data Bind the route Field Name BindRoute Valid Description Determine whether to bind the route.12. 0. 12 MASTE R LocalIP Mask DestIP Flag MASTER (primary mode) SLAVE (secondary mode) Internal planning 6-206 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6..0 11. 255. IP address at the NodeB for the OMCH Mask of the IP address at the NodeB for the OMCH Destination IP address of the OMCH. that is.11. This parameter is valid only when the port type is ETH.12.10. 12 255. Optional parameters: l l 255.255.0 12. Optional parameters: l l Example YES Source NO YES ETH Port type ItfType Type of the interface that carries the bound routes Optional parameters: l l l l ETH MLPPP PPP PPPoE 11.11.255. 1 11. 0 Negotiati on with the destinatio n Bound IP address on the destination network Bound destination mask Bound next hop IP address Local IP address Local subnet mask Destinatio n IP address Flag BindDestIP This parameter is valid only when the parameter BindRouteValid is set to YES.11.11. the IP address of the LMT or the M2000.2 Adding an IP Route (Initial).

Set 6-207 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. select the parameter BandDestIP and click Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . The NodeB IP Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. Then. Ltd . Step 4 Click OMCH.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. as shown in Figure 6-69. click in the configuration object pane.. the BandDestIP & BandDestIPMask dialog box is displayed. and then click displayed. Step 2 Click . and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. . Figure 6-69 Adding an OMCH Table 6-75 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 Description OMCH configuration area Type of the interface that carries the bound routes Configured OMCH route list Step 5 (Optional) Set the parameter BandRouteValid to YES. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed.

The destination IP address of the OMCH can be either on the same network segment as the DestNet in 6.. the CME system automatically generates the route to the bound destination network.0. the network IP address of Figure 6-70 is 11. or on the same network segment as the BandDestIP. and click .2 Adding an IP Route (Initial). Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Step 6 In area 1. NOTE l l The destination network segment of the binding route must differ from the network segment of the DestNet in 6.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide the IP address and the mask for the binding destination network of the OMCH. l Step 8 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data.10. and click . and then click link. the LocalIP & Mask dialog box is displayed. and the interface type is ETH. Select the network segment route. as shown in Figure 6-70. Step 7 Select DestIP. For instance.6. and set the peer IP address of the IP OMCH in the upper middle part of the window. and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. to add an OMCH 6-208 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. select LocalIP. Set the local IP address and the mask for the OMCH. The destination IP address of the OMCH can use the network segment where the binding route is located.2 Adding an IP Route (Initial).11.6. and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. Click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. The Destination IP Address window is displayed. Figure 6-70 Adding a destination IP address of the OMCH NOTE l If the BandRouteValid is set to YES(the route is bound).

6.8 Adding A Bound Destination Network Segment to the Transmission Resource Group (Initial. The transmission resource group (IP as the bearer mode) to which the bound destination network segment is added is already configured. as shown in area 3 of Figure 6-69. Prerequisite The IP transmission resource group is configured. refer to 6. IP) This describes how to add a bound destination network segment to the transmission resource group.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide NOTE 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Select the configured OMCH. the CME automatically traces the related OMCH route.6.5 Adding Transmission Resource Group (Initial. Otherwise. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional. This configuration is required when the SCTP link or the OMCH link Optional joins the transmission resource group. Preparation Table 6-76 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group whose destination IP network segment is bound Input Data Port type Field Name ItfType Description Type of the interface that carries the resource group Optional parameters: l l l l Example ETH Source ETH MLPPP PPP PPPoE 0 Internal planning Resource group number RscgrpNo Number of the IP transmission resource group that corresponds to the physical bearer port Value range: 0 through 3 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. All data to the subnet from the port of the transmission resource group will be calculated in the transmission resource group. the binding fails to proceed. NOTE l l Two transmission resource groups of the same physical port cannot be bound to the same destination network segment. Ltd 6-209 . over IP).. ----End 6.

as shown in Figure 6-71. Figure 6-71 Adding a bound destination network segment to the transmission resource group (initial.2 55.1 0 Source Destinatio n mask IPMask 255. that is. Step 2 Click . . click in the configuration object pane. over IP) 6-210 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.10.. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. Step 4 Click IP2RSCGroup.3 Adding SCTP Links (Initial).255. the IP address on the same network segment with BindDestIP in 6. The NodeB IP Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . over IP) or the destination IP address of the SCTP link of 6.255 Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME.6.7 Adding an OMCH of the NodeB (Initial.11.6. Bound destination mask Example 11.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Destinatio n IP address Field Name DestIP Description Bound destination IP address. and then click displayed.

. click SubrackNo. The DestIP & Step 6 In area 3. the DestIP is the bound destination IP address of the OMCH link. in area 2.9 Adding IP Clock Links (Initial) This describe how to add IP clock links.6. NOTE l l l DestIP & DestMask = DestNet & DestMask. When the IP clock link is added. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional CAUTION l The timeslot cross channel over IP cannot be configured to the NUTI that uses the parameter IPClockSwitch. l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. . you need to set the current ClockSource (clock resource type) to the IP (IP clock resource) mode before the NodeB is used by the IP clock. and click Mask dialog box is displayed. DestIP & IPMask = DestIP. Click network segment to the transmission resource group. Ltd 6-211 . and click . click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Table 6-77 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 Description Configured IP transmission resource group Configured route mapping the IP transmission resource group Configuration area for adding a bound destination network segment to the transmission resource group Step 5 In area 1. (The bound destination IP address and BindDestIP are on the same network segment). select the IP address of the bound destination network. If the OMCH link joins the resource group. If the SCTP link joins the resource group. Step 7 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data.2. select an IP transmission resource group. The NodeB can obtain the clock signals from the clock server through the IP link. ----End to add a bound destination 6. Select DestIP. the DestIP is the destination IP address of the SCTP link. For details. To add a destination IP address.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial). refer to 6.

The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Prerequisite l The parameter IPClockSwitch on the NUTI is enabled. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. refer to 6.1 Adding a Link at the Data Link Layer (Initial). The NodeB CM Express window is displayed.3.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial).10 Network planning IP address at the client IP address at the server Priority ClientIP ServerIP Obtain the NodeB IP address of the IP clock IP address at the IP clock server Priority The clock links that has the highest priority is used first.0. The number is in a negative relation with the priority level.2 Adding an IP Route (Initial).6. For details. 6-212 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 Click .3. The IP routes to the server are configured.6. l l Preparation Table 6-78 Negotiation and planned data of the IP clock links Input Data Port type Field Name ItfType Description Type of the interface that carries the IP clock links Optional parameters: l l l l Example PPPoE Source Internal planning ETH MLPPP PPP PPPoE 12. click in the configuration object pane.1 12. The physical links at the IP transport layer are configured. For details. refer to 6..0.2. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . as described in 6. Value range: 0 through 1 0 Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME.

as shown in Figure 6-73. and click .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. . as shown in Figure 6-72. select the network segment route. Ltd 6-213 . The NodeB IP Transport Layer window is Step 4 Click IPCLKLNK. In area 1. and set the server IP address of the IP clock link in the upper middle part of the window. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and click Address & Local IP Interface window is displayed.. Click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window. click SubrackNo. Select ServerIP. and then click displayed. Figure 6-72 Adding an IPCLKLNK link Table 6-79 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 Description Configuration area for the IP clock link Physical link list of the configured IP transport layer Configured IP clock link route list . The Destination IP Step 5 In area 1.

That is.) After the route is determined. the CME automatically traces route related physical link. this physical link cannot be changed. ----End 6-214 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. (DestNet and LocalIP use the route of the same network segment. the CME automatically adds the network segment route that is on the same network segment as the local IP address of the data link. refer to area 1 in Figure 6-73. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . the IP address of the destination network and the local IP address of the data link are on the same network segment. Select the configured IP clock link. and the CME automatically traces the IP clock link and its related IP clock route. After the data link layer is configured. As shown in area 2 of Figure 6-73. For details.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 6-73 Configuring the IP address at the IP clock link server Table 6-80 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 Description Configuration area for the destination IP address of the IP clock link Physical link list at the IP transport layer NOTE l l The client IP address of the IP clock link is the local IP address in area 1 of Figure 6-73. and then click NOTE to add a clock link. as shown in areas 2 and 3 of Figure 6-72. l Step 6 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data. The server IP address of the IP clock link is on the same network segment with DestNet..

Preparation Table 6-81 Negotiation and planned data of the IPQoS Input Data Priority rule Field Name PriRule Description Optional parameters: l l Example IPPRECE DENCE Source IPPRECEDENCE DSCP In IPPRECEDENCE rule. Signaling priority SigPri l 7 Network planning 7 l Operation and Maintenanc e (OM) priority OMPri l l Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. the value range is 0 through 63. and MPLS. IP QoS supports the switching between the IP precedence and DSCP.10 Modifying IP QoS Data (Initial) This describes how to modify the signaling and Operation and Maintenance (OM) priorities. the value range is 0 through 7. Ethernet.6. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In DSCP rule. SDH. ATM. l Prerequisite None. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Optional Optional NOTE l IP QoS is an IP network capability to provide specific services over the IP network that uses multiple bottom-layer network technologies such as MP. click in the configuration object pane. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane.. In DSCP rule.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) 6. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. the value range is 0 through 7. In IPPRECEDENCE rule. Ltd 6-215 . The IP QoS configuration is flexible depending on actual requirements. FR. the value range is 0 through 63.

6. Step 4 Click IPQos. Scenario NodeB initial configuration (The RNC and the NodeB is directly connected without ATM switch inbetween. and then click displayed. . it is not applied to all scenarios. and select a priority rule from the drop-down list. The CME can simultaneously update the Iub data at the RNC and the NodeB sides.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Step 2 Click . as shown in Figure 6-74. Figure 6-74 Configuring the Diffserv priority on the transport layer Step 5 Select PriRule. Therefore. Step 6 Select SigPri and OMPri. The NodeB IP Transport Layer window is Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. Step 7 Click ----End to save the settings.) Mandatory/ Optional. Thus. If the Iub interface data is configured at the RNC side. and then set the signaling and OM priorities. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . the Iub data at both the RNC and the NodeB sides can be consistent. the data at the NodeB side is updated at the same time. This function is customized.. Optional 6-216 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.7 Refreshing the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (Initial) This describes how to refresh the transport layer data of the NodeB.

Before the refreshing.. CME). refer to 6. the equipment layer is configured with the NDTI or the NUTI with bearer type of ATM or IPv4. For the matching relations. Ensure that the VPI of the PVC at the RNC side is in the VPI value range defined in the baseband interface board at the NodeB side. l Figure 6-75 Matching relations Prerequisite l The Iub interface data at the RNC is configured. For details. The Iub refreshing function determines that the NodeB and the RNC are directly connected. the data over the Iub interface on the RNC side can be synchronized to the NodeB side. l l l Preparation l For the macro NodeB. Therefore. The Iub refreshing function does not check whether the RNC and the NodeB are directly connected. use the ATM switch with caution. consistency check will be executed over the Iub interface. For details.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial). The Iub refreshing function is supported. That is. over ATM. however. For the distributed NodeB. the equipment layer is configured with the BBU with bearer type of ATM or IPv4.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide NOTE 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) l l Whether to connect the RNC and the NodeB directly depends on actual scenarios.2 Adding a BBU (Initial).4. the physical NodeB is configured. If the versions on both the NodeB and the RNC sides match. check that the version of the RNC matches that of the NodeB.2. refer to Adding Iub Interface Data to the RNC (Initial. The accuracy of refreshed data. ensure that the NUTI is configured with the corresponding sub-board.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial). For details. l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. refer to 6. If the optical interface board is adopted. To execute the refresh function. refer to 6. When data on both the RNC and the NodeB is carried over E1/T1 or optical port in the ATM transport mode and the RNC is connected to the NodeB through an ATM switch. For details. refer to Figure 6-75. Ltd 6-217 .2. cannot be guaranteed owing to the ATM switch.

The NodeB Selection window is displayed. at a time. and then click Step 4 Determine the target NodeB to be refreshed. select multiple physical NodeBs. More than one target NodeB needs to be 1. Click Close to return to the NodeB Selection window. In the NodeB Selection dialog box. Step 3 Select a physical NodeB.. and click . click Filter.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. click in the configuration object pane. displayed. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed. Step 2 Click . The Select NodeB window is refreshed at a time. as shown in Figure 6-76. The physical NodeBs are added to area 1. 6-218 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3. 2. . Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. In area 2. and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. Option Description Only one target NodeB can be refreshed Go to Step 5.

NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Figure 6-76 NodeB Selection window Table 6-82 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 Description List of candidate physical NodeBs List of target physical NodeBs Step 5 Click Next. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The PortMatch window is displayed. as shown in Figure 6-77. Ltd 6-219 ..

remote sectors. 6. 6. Each module at a specific place can be planned as a site. and that in green refers to the data at the NodeB side. Step 6 (Optional) Select NCN. and distributed sectors in a macro NodeB. From the hardware perspective. ----End 6. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .8. and click to modify the interconnection data at the NodeB side. The Finish dialog box is displayed telling that the data is successfully refreshed. Step 8 Click Finish to return to the Physical NodeB Basic Information window. and the Confirmation dialog box is displayed.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 6-77 Port Match window NOTE l l The data in dark blue refers to the data at the RNC side. and adding local cells.2 Adding Sectors and Cells (Macro NodeB) This describes how to configure cells in local sectors.8. The NodeB modules that are in the charge of the same main module are called a NodeB. and NPN (port number) at the NodeB side. and the remote and the distributed sector needs the support from the MRRU 6-220 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. You can also reallocate the data as required.8 Adding Radio Layer Data This describes how to configure radio network layer data for the NodeB..1 Adding Sites This describes how to add a NodeB site. Before the Iub refreshing. They can be located in different places and connected to each other through optical fibers and standard interfaces. the local sector needs the support from the MTRU and MAFU. the CME automatically allocates the interconnection data such as NCN (cabinet number). Step 7 Click Next.Click OK to execute data synchronization. NSN (slot number). NSBN(subrack number). adding sectors. The related activities involve adding sites.

6. Ltd 6-221 . They can be located in different places and connected to each other through optical fibers and standard interfaces. . Preparation Table 6-83 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB Input Data Site name Field Name Site Name Description The site is usually named after the geographical location. Step 3 Select a physical NodeB. Each module at a specific place can be planned as a site. and then click as shown in Figure 6-78.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial). and then click Step 1 On the main interface of the CME. remote sectors. click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane.8. The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Adding Sectors and Cells (Distributed NodeB) This describes how to add the remote sectors and distributed sectors for a distributed NodeB. The cells can be configured only in remote sectors or distributed sectors.2. Step 2 Click . Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional Prerequisite The physical NodeB is configured. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) or the PicoRRU (PRRU). For details. or distributed sectors.8. The NodeB Radio Layer window is displayed. refer to 6. The distributed NodeB supports only remote and distributed sectors. In terms of hardware support.1 Adding Sites This describes how to add a NodeB site. 6. The cells can be configured in the local sectors. Example Shanghai Source Network planning Procedure in the configuration object pane.. The NodeB modules that are in the charge of the same main module are called a NodeB. the remote sector and the distributed sector need the MRRU or PRRU (PicoRRU) RF unit.

and the remote and the distributed sector needs the support from the MRRU or the PicoRRU (PRRU). remote sectors. and click to the prepared data. From the hardware perspective. Configure parameters SiteId and Site Name according SiteId is unique in one NodeB. NOTE .. or distributed sectors. remote sectors.8. Scenario 6-222 NodeB initial configuration Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 6. The cells can be configured in the local sectors. and distributed sectors in a macro NodeB.2 Adding Sectors and Cells (Macro NodeB) This describes how to configure cells in local sectors.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 6-78 Adding Sites Sequence of data configuration 1 Description Configuration area for sites Step 4 In area 1. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . the local sector needs the support from the MTRU and MAFU. select SiteId. Step 5 Click ----End to add a site.

or PRRU must be at the same frequency band.2. and not greater than 5 MHz (25 x 0.2 MHz (21 x 0. The frequency difference between two local cells should not be smaller than 4. MRRU. refer to 6.2 MHz). refer to 6. The frequency difference between two local cells should not be smaller than 4. Macro NodeB)..2 MHz). or BTS3812E is configured. Prerequisite l The physical NodeB. l l l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. B represents RX antenna. the carriers are on the same PA. refer to 6. For details.2 MHz). For details. l If the PA supports two carriers. If the PA supports four carriers. BTS3812A.8. The uplink and downlink frequencies of the cell configured in the same MAFU.4 Adding an RRU (Initial. and not greater than 15 MHz (75 x 0. refer to 6. For details.2. the carriers are on the same PA. The local sectors can use only the antenna channel on the MAFU module.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional NOTE l l The MAFU or MRRU supports four carrier frequencies and the PRRU supports two carrier frequencies. l l l A represents TX/RX antenna.2.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial). and the difference of frequency between cells should meet certain conditions. For details.2 MHz (21 x 0.that is the BTS3812AE.1 Adding Sites. The remote and distributed sectors can be configured only when the BTS3812AE.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).2 MHz). The sites are configured. or BTS3812E is configured with the MRRU or PRRU (PicoRRU). Ltd 6-223 . BTS3812A.

the sector can work only in no transmit diversity mode. TX_DIVERSITY (transmit diversity): one sector uses two TX channels.. TX_DIVE RSITY l Transmit diversity mode TxDiversity Mode Diversity mode of the sector. Optional parameters: l Network planning NO_TX_DIVERSITY (no transmit diversity): one sector uses one TX channel.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Preparation Table 6-84 Negotiation and planned data of the sector Input Data Number of RX antennas Field Name RxAntennaN um Description The number of RX antennas in a sector is associated with the parameter DemMode set at the NodeB equipment layer. You can define the number of RX antennas before configuring antenna channels for the sectors. HALFFREQ (0.5 frequency mode. only one or four RX antennas can be configured. which can be configured before the antenna channel is configured. You need to. If DemMode is set to twoway demodulation mode.. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . 6-224 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. however. which can be configured only in remote sectors) l l When the number of configured RX antennas is one.5/0. only one or two RX antennas can be configured. adhere to the following principles: l Example 2 Source If DemMode is set to fourway demodulation mode or four-way economical demodulation mode.

It is valid only when the transmit diversity mode is HALFFREQ.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Coverage type Field Name Cover Type Description This parameter is required for the remote sector. Optional parameters: l Example - Source SAMEZONE (same coverage type) DIFFZONE (different coverage type) l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd 6-225 ..

Offset:0 Special frequencies: {782. Offset:0 Special frequencies: None. 262. 162. Offset:670. 212. 1712. 1787.1 l Band 3 Common frequencies: 937 through 1288 inclusive. Ltd . Offset: 0 l Band 2 Common frequencies: 9262 through 9538 inclusive. 1862}. Offset:0 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) 6-226 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Offset:1380. Offset:1450 Special frequencies: {1662. 1837.1 l Band 5 Common frequencies: 4132 through 4233 inclusive. 1812.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Table 6-85 Negotiation and planned data of the cell Input Data Uplink frequency Field Name UARFCNUp Link Description The UL and DL frequencies of a cell must be at the same frequency band. 807. 87. 787. 812. Offset:1525 Special frequencies: None. 187. 837.1 l Band 6 Common frequencies: 4162 through 4188 inclusive. 37. 62. Offset:0 Network planning l Band 4 Common frequencies: 1312 through 1513 inclusive. 287}. 237. Offset: 0 Special frequencies: {12. Offset:1850. 1762. 1737. 1687. 112.. Frequency (MHz) = (Frequency / 5) + offset Value range: 0 through 65535 l Example 9612 Source Band 1 Common frequencies: 9612 through 9888 inclusive. 137. 862}.

Offset:670. 2612. Offset:0 Special frequencies: None. 2387.837}. 2687}.1 l Example Source Band 7 Common frequencies: 2012 through 2338 inclusive. 2437.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Field Name Description Special frequencies: {812. Offset:2100 Special frequencies: {2362. 2537. 2587. 2412. 2637. 2512. 2562.1 l Band 8 Common frequencies: 2712 through 2863 inclusive. 2662. Offset:2030. 2462. Offset:0 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Offset:0 l Band 9 Common frequencies: 8762 through 8912 inclusive.. Offset:340 Special frequencies: None. Ltd 6-227 . 2487.

Offset:1805 Special frequencies: {1887. 1937.1 l Band 6 Common frequencies: 4387 through 4413 inclusive. Offset:0 Special frequencies: None. 512. 1087}. 687}. 487. 1012.. 537. 1962.1 l Band 5 Common frequencies: 4357 through 4458 inclusive. Offset:0 Special frequencies: {1007. Frequency (MHz) = (Frequency / 5) + offset Value range: 0 through 65535 l Example 10562 Source Band 1 Common frequencies: 10562 through 10838 inclusive.1 l Band 3 Common frequencies: 1162 through 1513 inclusive.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Downlink frequency Field Name UARFCNDo wnLink Description The UL and DL frequencies of a cell must be at the same frequency band. 2087}. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .1 6-228 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1037. 1032. 587. 2012. Offset:670. 1912. Offset:0 l Band 4 Common frequencies: 1537 through 1738 inclusive. Offset:1735. Offset:0 l Band 2 Common frequencies: 9662 through 9938 inclusive. Offset:0 Special frequencies: {412. Offset:0 Special frequencies: {1037. 612. 2062. 462. 1062. 637. Offset:1575 Special frequencies: None. 662. Offset:1850. 1987. Offset:670. 437. 562. 1062}. 2037.

If the UL resource group has highspeed movement cells. 2787. which consists of the boards located at slot 0 through slot 9. 2837. Offset:340 Special frequencies: None. you need to select the downlink resource group.1 l Band 8 Common frequencies: 2937 through 3088 inclusive. 2662.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Field Name Description l Example Source Band 7 Common frequencies: 2237 through 2563 inclusive. When adding local cells. Offset:0 Special frequencies: None. 2912}. Offset:2175 Special frequencies: {2587. it supports a maximum of three cells. Optional parameters: GEN_POOL: general resource pool.. One local cell is only carried on a board of its downlink resource group. 2637. 2687. 2762. Ltd 6-229 . Offset:0 Uplink resource group ID ULResource GroupId The cells within an uplink resource group share the uplink resources. 2712. 0 Downlink resource group ID DLResource GroupId 0 Baseband resource pool type BbPoolType GEN_POO L Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Offset:2105. 2612. Offset:0 l Band 9 Common frequencies: 9237 through 9387 inclusive. 2812. One UL resource group has a maximum of six cells. 2737. 2887. 2862.

5/0.. TOC2 maximum output power + 3 dB].10 dB. the maximum transmit power range of the cell is: [TOC maximum output power of the power amplifier . The transmit power must be within the range that is supported by the power amplifier lest the cell is unavailable. l Value range: 0 through 500 Cell radius CellRadius The coverage is affected by the cell radius. Value range: 0 through 180000 0 29000 6-230 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. which is recommended to be set as designed according to the network planning.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Maximum transmit power Field Name MaxTxPower Description The maximum transmit power of a local or remote cell refers to that on the TOC. TOC1 maximum output power + 3 dB] and [TOC2 maximum output power 7dB.7 dB. Value range: 150 through 180000 Inner handover radius CellInnerHan doverRadidus The inner handover radius of the cell should not be greater than the cell radius. l Example 430 Source When the sector works in NO_TX_DIVERSITY mode. It is recommended to be set as designed according to the network planning. TOC maximum output power of the power amplifier] When the sector works in transmit diversity mode or 0. the maximum transmit power range of the cell is: An intersection of [TOC1 maximum output power . Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .5 frequency mode.

that is. and the tab page is displayed. This value is not used when the sector is a distributed one. The data is determined in the network planning. It is the ratio of uplink noise intensity to background noise of the receiver. The data is determined in the network planning. Value range: 0 through 30 High-speed movement mode Hispm The data is determined in the network planning. click the Local Sector tab. as shown in Figure 6-79. Optional parameters: l l FALSE FALSE (not high speed) TRUE (high speed) - Rate in highspeed movement mode Spr This parameter is valid when the Hispm is set to TRUE. Value range: 10 through 100 Procedure l Configure local sectors and cells. In the NodeB Radio Layer window. 1. MAFU. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE The local sector uses only the RF board.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Desensitizati on intensity Field Name Desensy Description Example Source This parameter needs to be set 0 only in cells of local and remote sectors. and it is consistent with that at the RNC. and it is consistent with that at the RNC. and it is consistent with that at the RNC. Optional parameters: l l l 250 400 500 100 Ratio of the default transmit power to the RRU DefPowerLvl Cells in distributed sectors need the configuration.. Ltd 6-231 .

Then. click SectorNo. and click . the available antenna channels that can be used by the local sectors are filtered out. In area 4. and click click to add a local sector. In area 1. and then click the antenna channel used by the local sector. In area 2. Set parameters based on prepared data. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . 6-232 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. .. click LoCell.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 6-79 Configuring local sectors and cells Table 6-86 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Configuration area for the local sectors Antenna channel list for the local sectors Used antenna channel list Cell configuration areas for the local sectors List of available RF channels for cells Used RF channel list 2. to configure 4. 5. Set parameters UARFCNUpLink and UARFCNDownLink for the cell. 3. Select the antenna channel.

Select an uplink or a downlink resource group. 7. The ULGroup or DLGroup window is displayed..NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) 6. as shown in Figure 6-80. and click . Modify Mac-hs and Mac-e related parameters. The Mac Params Confige Form window is displayed. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then. Select ULResourceGroupId or DLResourceGroupId. Modify Mac-hs resource limit parameters. and click . and click Close to return to the NodeB Radio Layer window. Figure 6-80 Modifying Mac-hs and Mac-e related parameters Table 6-87 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 Description Modify Mac-hs scheduling parameters. Select INHBOARD. click Close to return to the NodeB Radio Layer window. Modify Mac-hs SPI scheduling parameters. Ltd 6-233 . and click .

only the RX/TX antenna channels on the MRRU/ PRRU configured on the main line of the RRU chain/ring can be used. Select the RF channel. The INHBOARD can only be INHBOARD. if you deselect the HSDPA Capability check box.. click the Remote Sector tab. Configure other parameters based on the prepared data. to configure the RF channel used by l Configure remote sectors and cells. and then click the cell. if the previously mentioned parameters for the specified local cells are modified. 1. you must select the HSDPA Capability check box. the check box can only be selected. and then click cell. NOTE l l When the number of receive antennas is 2 or 4. that is. When the number of receive antennas is 1. the tab page is displayed. 9.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NOTE NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide l For the BTS3812AE. or BTS3812E. In the NodeB Radio Layer window. BTS3812A. the INHBOARD is UNLIMITED. and the INHBOARD is INHBOARD. Figure 6-81 Configuring remote sectors and cells 6-234 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. as shown in Figure 6-81. the status of the HSDPA Capability check box is unchangeable. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . For the DBS3800. to add a In area 5. l 8. only the RX/TX antenna channels on the MRRU configured on the main line of the RRU chain/ring can be used. the available RF channels that can be used by the cell are filtered out.

1. In the NodeB Radio Layer window. Ltd 6-235 . Configure distributed sectors and cells NOTE l l The TX/RX mode of distributed sectors is always unidirectional (TX/RX). 3. Figure 6-82 Configure distributed sectors and cells Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. click the Distribute Sector tab. as shown in Figure 6-82. the tab page is displayed.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Table 6-88 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Configuration area for the remote sectors Available antenna channel list for remote sectors Used antenna channel list Configuration area for the cells of the remote sectors List of available RF channels for cells Used RF channel list 2. The distributed sector uses only the RX/TX antenna channels on the MRRU or PRRU (including the PRRU configured on the RHUB) configured on the RRU chain/ring. l Perform Step 2 through Step 3 to configure remote sectors.. Perform Step 4 through Step 9 to configure cells of the remote sectors.

6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Table 6-89 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Configuration area for the distributed sectors Available antenna channel list for distributed sectors Used antenna channel list Configuration area for the cells of the distributed sectors List of available RF channels for cells Used RF channel list 2.2 MHz). The distributed NodeB supports only remote and distributed sectors.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial). Perform Step 4 through Step 9 to configure cells of the distributed sectors.3 Adding Sectors and Cells (Distributed NodeB) This describes how to add the remote sectors and distributed sectors for a distributed NodeB.8. The uplink and downlink frequencies of the cell configured in the same MRFU.2 MHz (21 x 0. or PRRU must be at the same frequency band. For details. 6.2 MHz). and the difference of frequency between cells should meet certain conditions. the remote sector and the distributed sector need the MRRU or PRRU (PicoRRU) RF unit.2 MHz). and not greater than 5 MHz (25 x 0. MRRU. ----End Perform Step 2 through Step 3 to configure the distributed sectors. the carriers are on the same PA. The cells can be configured only in remote sectors or distributed sectors. In terms of hardware support. If the PA supports four carriers. refer to 6.2 MHz (21 x 0. Prerequisite l The DBS3800 related physical NodeB is configured. B represents RX antenna. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) 6-236 .2. The frequency difference between two local cells should not be smaller than 4.2 MHz). the carriers are on the same PA. l l l A represents TX/RX antenna. l If the PA supports two carriers. 3. Scenario NodeB initial configuration Mandatory/ Mandatory Optional NOTE l l The MRRU supports four carrier frequencies and the PRRU supports two carrier frequencies. the uplink frequencies must be smaller than the downlink frequencies. and not greater than 15 MHz (75 x 0.. The frequency difference between two local cells should not be smaller than 4.

refer to 6. You can define the number of RX antennas before configuring antenna channels for the sectors. l Preparation Table 6-90 Negotiation and planned data of the sector Input Data Number of RX antennas Field Name RxAntennaN um Description The number of RX antennas in a sector is associated with the parameter DemMode set at the NodeB equipment layer. TX_DIVE RSITY l Transmit diversity mode TxDiversity Mode Diversity mode of the sector. which can be configured before the antenna channel is configured. refer to 6.1 Adding Sites.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide l 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) The RRU sites are configured.. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The sites are configured.5 frequency mode. only one or two RX antennas can be configured. TX_DIVERSITY (transmit diversity): one sector uses two TX channels. however. For details. Ltd 6-237 .8. adhere to the following principles: l Example 2 Source If DemMode is set to fourway demodulation mode or four-way economical demodulation mode. only one or four RX antennas can be configured. the sector can work only in no transmit diversity mode. Distributed NodeB). If DemMode is set to twoway demodulation mode.5/0. which can be configured only in remote sectors) l l When the number of configured RX antennas is one. HALFFREQ (0.4 Adding an RRU (Initial.4. For details. You need to. Optional parameters: l Network planning NO_TX_DIVERSITY (no transmit diversity): one sector uses one TX channel..

Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Optional parameters: l Example - Source SAMEZONE (same coverage type) DIFFZONE (different coverage type) l 6-238 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Coverage type Field Name Cover Type Description This parameter is required for the remote sector. It is valid only when the transmit diversity mode is HALFFREQ..

1762. 812. Offset:1525 Special frequencies: None. Offset:1850. 1787. Ltd . 87. Frequency (MHz) = (Frequency / 5) + offset Value range: 0 through 65535 l Example 9612 Source Band 1 Common frequencies: 9612 through 9888 inclusive. 162. 237. 807. Offset:0 Network planning l Band 4 Common frequencies: 1312 through 1513 inclusive. Offset:0 6-239 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Offset: 0 l Band 2 Common frequencies: 9262 through 9538 inclusive. 1687. 112. 862}. 187. Offset:1380. 1862}. 62.. 1837.1 l Band 6 Common frequencies: 4162 through 4188 inclusive. 787. 1737. 262.1 l Band 3 Common frequencies: 937 through 1288 inclusive.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Table 6-91 Negotiation and planned data of the cell Input Data Uplink frequency Field Name UARFCNUp Link Description The UL and DL frequencies of a cell must be at the same frequency band. Offset:1450 Special frequencies: {1662. 1812. Offset:0 Special frequencies: {782. 287}. 37. Offset: 0 Special frequencies: {12. 837. 212.1 l Band 5 Common frequencies: 4132 through 4233 inclusive. Offset:670. Offset:0 Special frequencies: None. 1712. 137.

Offset:670. Offset:2030. 2412. Offset:2100 Special frequencies: {2362. Offset:0 l Band 9 Common frequencies: 8762 through 8912 inclusive. 2662. 2687}. 2387.. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Offset:340 Special frequencies: None. 2437. Offset:0 6-240 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2612. Offset:0 Special frequencies: None.1 l Example Source Band 7 Common frequencies: 2012 through 2338 inclusive. 2637. 2487.1 l Band 8 Common frequencies: 2712 through 2863 inclusive. 2512.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Field Name Description Special frequencies: {812. 2537. 2562. 2587.837}. 2462.

612.1 l Band 5 Common frequencies: 4357 through 4458 inclusive. 537. Offset:0 Special frequencies: {1037. 1962. 1912. 1062}. Offset:670. 1062. Offset:0 l Band 2 Common frequencies: 9662 through 9938 inclusive. 687}. Offset:0 Special frequencies: None.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Downlink frequency Field Name UARFCNDo wnLink Description The UL and DL frequencies of a cell must be at the same frequency band. 1987.1 l Band 6 Common frequencies: 4387 through 4413 inclusive. 462. 2012. 562. 1037. 662. 2062. Offset:1575 Special frequencies: None. Offset:0 Special frequencies: {412. 587. Offset:1850. 437.1 l Band 3 Common frequencies: 1162 through 1513 inclusive. Offset:1805 Special frequencies: {1887. Offset:1735. Offset:0 l Band 4 Common frequencies: 1537 through 1738 inclusive.. Frequency (MHz) = (Frequency / 5) + offset Value range: 0 through 65535 l Example 10562 Source Band 1 Common frequencies: 10562 through 10838 inclusive. 487. 637. 1012. 2087}. Offset:670.1 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1937. 1032. Ltd 6-241 . Offset:0 Special frequencies: {1007. 1087}. 2037. 512.

2887. 2612. One UL resource group has a maximum of six cells. Offset:0 Special frequencies: None. 2662. One local cell is only carried on a board of its downlink resource group. 2712.1 l Band 8 Common frequencies: 2937 through 3088 inclusive. 2787. 2637. Optional parameters: GEN_POOL: general resource pool. When adding local cells. Offset:0 l Band 9 Common frequencies: 9237 through 9387 inclusive. you need to select the downlink resource group. Offset:2175 Special frequencies: {2587. 2912}. 0 Downlink resource group ID DLResource GroupId 0 Baseband resource pool type BbPoolType GEN_POO L 6-242 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2762. 2837.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Field Name Description l Example Source Band 7 Common frequencies: 2237 through 2563 inclusive. it supports a maximum of three cells. 2812.. If the UL resource group has highspeed movement cells. which consists of the boards located at slot 0 through slot 9. 2862. Offset:340 Special frequencies: None. Offset:2105. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . 2737. Offset:0 Uplink resource group ID ULResource GroupId The cells within an uplink resource group share the uplink resources. 2687.

TOC maximum output power of the power amplifier] When the sector works in transmit diversity mode or 0. TOC2 maximum output power + 3 dB]. which is recommended to be set as designed according to the network planning. Value range: 0 through 180000 0 29000 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Value range: 0 through 500 Cell radius CellRadius The coverage is affected by the cell radius.. the maximum transmit power range of the cell is: [TOC maximum output power of the power amplifier . The transmit power must be within the range that is supported by the power amplifier lest the cell is unavailable. the maximum transmit power range of the cell is: An intersection of [TOC1 maximum output power .5 frequency mode.7 dB. l Example 430 Source When the sector works in NO_TX_DIVERSITY mode.5/0.10 dB. Value range: 150 through 180000 Inner handover radius CellInnerHan doverRadidus The inner handover radius of the cell should not be greater than the cell radius. It is recommended to be set as designed according to the network planning. TOC1 maximum output power + 3 dB] and [TOC2 maximum output power 7dB. Ltd 6-243 .NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Input Data Maximum transmit power Field Name MaxTxPower Description The maximum transmit power of a local or remote cell refers to that on the TOC.

Optional parameters: l l FALSE FALSE (not high speed) TRUE (high speed) - Rate in highspeed movement mode Spr This parameter is valid when the Hispm is set to TRUE. only the RX/TX antenna channels on the MRRU configured on the main line of the RRU chain/ring can be used. The data is determined in the network planning.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Input Data Desensitizati on intensity Field Name Desensy Description Example Source This parameter needs to be set 0 only in cells of local and remote sectors. When the number of receive antennas is 1.. The data is determined in the network planning. only the RX/TX antenna channels on the MRRU/ PRRU configured on the main line of the RRU chain/ring can be used. Value range: 0 through 30 High-speed movement mode Hispm The data is determined in the network planning. and it is consistent with that at the RNC. In the NodeB Radio Layer window. and it is consistent with that at the RNC. Optional parameters: l l l 250 400 500 100 Ratio of the default transmit power to the RRU DefPowerLvl Cells in distributed sectors need the configuration. 6-244 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. It is the ratio of uplink noise intensity to background noise of the receiver. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . This value is not used when the sector is a distributed one. click the Remote Sector tab. 1. NOTE l l When the number of receive antennas is 2 or 4. as shown in Figure 6-83. and it is consistent with that at the RNC. the tab page is displayed. Value range: 10 through 100 Procedure l Configure remote sectors and cells.

NOTE Configure distributed sectors and cells l l The TX/RX mode of distributed sectors is always unidirectional (TX/RX).8. click the Distribute Sector tab..2 Adding Sectors and Cells (Macro NodeB) to add remote sectors. the tab page is displayed.2 Adding Sectors and Cells (Macro NodeB) to add cells of the remote sectors. The distributed sector uses only the RX/TX antenna channels on the MRRU or PRRU (including the PRRU configured on the RHUB) configured on the RRU chain/ring. 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. as shown in Figure 6-84. 3.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Figure 6-83 Configuring remote sectors and cells Table 6-92 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 4 5 6 2. Ltd 6-245 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . l Description Configuration area for the remote sectors Available antenna channel list for remote sectors Used antenna channel list Configuration area for the cells of the remote sectors List of available RF channels for cells Used RF channel list Perform Step 2 through Step 3 in the 6. In the NodeB Radio Layer window.8. Perform Step 4 through Step 9 in the 6.

----End Description Configuration area for the distributed sectors Available antenna channel list for distributed sectors Used antenna channel list Configuration area for the cells of the distributed sectors List of available RF channels for cells Used RF channel list Perform Step 2 through Step 3 in the 6. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .8. 6-246 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Adding Sectors and Cells (Macro NodeB) to add distributed sectors. 3.8.2 Adding Sectors and Cells (Macro NodeB) to add cells of the distributed sectors.6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 6-84 Configure distributed sectors and cells Table 6-93 Description of the configuration pane Sequence of data configuration 1 2 3 4 5 6 2.. Perform Step 4 through Step 9 in the 6.

2 ATM Protocol-Related Terms This describes the terms related to the ATM protocol. 7. Ltd 7-1 . and logical cells. and transport network layer when the Iub interface uses the IP transport. cells. The three planes are control plane. that is. it describes the configuration differences between these two connections.3 IP Protocol-Related Terms This describes the terms related to the protocols of the data link layer. ATM layer. 7. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration About This Chapter This provides the related concepts to be referenced during the process of the NodeB initial configuration. local cells. In addition. The three function layers are physical layer.4 NodeB Treelink PVC The function of a NodeB treelink PVC is similar to that of the ATM switching. including those of the sectors.. so as to switch the PVC from one physical bearer to another.5 NodeBs in Direct/Cascading Connections This defines the NodeBs in direct and cascading connections. carriers. physical resources of cells. 7. and ATM adaptation layer (AAL). This describes how to add a treelink PVC to the NodeB.1 Cell Related Concepts This provides the cell related concepts. network layer. to add an ATM switching route to the NodeB (over ATM). 7. The reference model of the ATM protocol consists of three planes and three function layers. user plane. 7. and management plane.

Number of cells supported by a NodeB = number of sectors x number of carriers in each sector. and cell.1. 7-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .1 Sector. and Cell This describes the sector. In fact. 7. A sector and a carrier form a cell that is the smallest serving unit for UE access. and therefore there is overlap between the sectors. the inter-cell interference is reduced. Frequency multiplexing is allowed in a WCDMA system if different downlink primary scrambling codes are used in neighboring cells of different sectors that use the same frequency. local cells.2 Physical Resources of Cells This describes the physical resources of cells from the perspectives of RF resources of sectors and resource pools of cells. The area is split into sectors 0. and Cell This describes the sector. cells. In this way. including those of the sectors. each set of directional antenna covers a 120o area. Each sector has two carriers. The directional sectors are covered by directional antennas. which is covered by one or more radio carriers. 7.1 Cell Related Concepts This provides the cell related concepts. and logical cells. When there are six directional sectors.3 Local Cell and Logical Cell This describes local and logical cells. Sectors are classified into omnidirectional sectors and directional sectors. A sector is the smallest radio coverage area unit. and cell. There are six cells in total. Carrier.1. the omnidirectional sector is split into three or six directional sectors. and 2. An omnidirectional sector is used in small traffic areas.. carrier. 1. A sector is the smallest radio coverage area unit. a serving cell is called local cell and logical cell at the implementation layer of physical layer and the management layer of logical resources respectively. the omnidirectional sector covers 360o circular areas. carrier. the azimuth of the antenna is greater than the theoretical value. physical resources of cells.1 Sector. When the traffic increases. A sector and a carrier form a cell that is the smallest serving unit for UE access. For example. 7. and each carrier forms a cell. 7. Each radio carrier occupies a frequency. when there are three directional sectors. Each radio carrier occupies a frequency. Centered around the omnidirectional RX/TX antenna.7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7. Figure 7-1 shows the typical 3 x 2 configuration. which is covered by one or more radio carriers. each set of directional antenna covers a 60o area. Carrier.1. carriers.1. In the 3GPP protocols.

The MAFU and MTRU work in pairs. Each sector uses one directional antenna. and cell 7. Figure 7-2 shows the physical RF resources mapped to a NodeB from sectors. and the two channels work in mutual receive diversity mode.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration Figure 7-1 Relations among a sector.2 Physical Resources of Cells This describes the physical resources of cells from the perspectives of RF resources of sectors and resource pools of cells. RF modules of a macro NodeB are the MAFU and MTRU.1. l l RF modules of a distributed NodeB are the RRU and PicoRRU (PRRU). carrier. RF Resources of Sectors The NodeB provides RF resources of cells.. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd 7-3 . Each directional antenna provides 2-way receive channels to enhance the receiving sensitivity.

7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 7-2 Physical RF resources mapped from sectors onto NodeB Figure 7-2 shows the mapping between the sectors and the RF module for a 2-carrier NodeB in 2-way receive diversity mode. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) l 7-4 .. This mode supports 1carrier or 2-carrier 1T2R configuration. This mode supports 1-carrier or 2-carrier 1T2R or 2T2R configuration. Figure 7-3 shows the rules of the mapping between BTS3812E sectors and MAFUs and MTRUs. l 1MAFU+1MTRU for one sector: The NodeB supports 6 sectors. The mapping may vary with the NodeB configuration. 2MAFUs+2MTRUs for one sector: The NodeB supports three sectors. and 3-carrier or 4-carrier 1T2R Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

This mode supports 3-carrier or 4-carrier 2T4R configuration. which are called uplink baseband resource groups. Keep the number of resource groups as small as possible. l 4MAFUs+4MTRUs for one sector: The NodeB supports one to three sectors. and HDLP.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration configuration. Each uplink baseband resource group supports a maximum of three cells in 4-way and economic 4-way modes. divide the resource pool into two groups. When the resource pool is used. GRP_POOL: indicates the uplink and downlink baseband resource pool that consists of the HBOI in slot 15. Each uplink baseband resource group supports a maximum of 6 cells in 2-way and enhanced 2-way modes. for a 3 x 4 NodeB. The cells in one uplink baseband resource group share the uplink resources. You need to add the intra-frequency cells to the same group. This type of resource pool is commonly used. Figure 7-3 Rules of the mapping between NodeB sectors and MAFUs or MTRUs Resource Pools of Cells The macro NodeB sends the uplink or downlink signal processing resources to the resource pool. You may change the external interface connections of the MTRUs and MAFUs so that this sector mode can support 1-carrier or 2-carrier 2T4R configuration. For example. you do not need to specify uplink baseband resource groups. each of which supports 6 cells. One uplink processing unit corresponds to one HBBI/HBOI/HULP board or one BBU module.. you must specify uplink baseband resource groups. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd 7-5 l l l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Cells in the resource pool can share the resources. l The NodeB divides the uplink baseband resources into different groups. When the resource pool is used. HULP. The softer handover can be performed between the cells in the same uplink baseband resource group. specify the type of resource pool that the cell belongs to. When you configure the cell. A combined cabinet is required when there are more than one sector. The uplink baseband resource groups have the following features and requirements: l One uplink baseband resource group consists of one or more uplink processing units. Two types of resource pools are as follows: l GEN_POOL: indicates the uplink and downlink baseband resource pool that consists of the HBBI.

2. ATM Control Plane. the concept of logical cell is proposed in the 3GPP to ensure that the RNC can control the radio resources in certain cells through the standard Iub interface. in a cell of a NodeB. a serving cell is called local cell and logical cell at the implementation layer of physical layer and the management layer of logical resources respectively. These cells are carried on NodeBs from different vendors.. such as hardware and software resources. Logical Cell A logical cell is a standard logical model that helps the RNC control the radio resources in a cell.2 ATM Protocol-Related Terms This describes the terms related to the ATM protocol. The reference model of the ATM protocol consists of three planes and three function layers.1 ATM User Plane.7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7. and ATM adaptation layer (AAL). user plane. Therefore. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Local Cell A local cell is a combination of physical resources. The parameters of a logical cell are configured at and managed by the RNC. A local cell is related to the physical implementation of a device.1. The parameters of a local cell are configured at and managed by the NodeB.3 Local Cell and Logical Cell This describes local and logical cells. The model is independent of the implementation of local cells in the NodeB. Figure 7-4 Reference model of the ATM protocol 7. and ensures that the Iub interface is an open interface. Figure 7-4 shows the reference model of the ATM protocol. The three function layers are physical layer. In the 3GPP protocols. A logical cell and a local cell have the one-to-one correspondence. and management plane. ATM layer. The three planes are control plane. NodeBs from different vendors have different ways of providing physical resources for cells. and ATM Management Plane 7-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 7.

ATM layer. process the data on the two planes in the same way. such as protocol data and voice data. Table 7-2 describes the layers and functions of the reference model of the ATM protocol. The control plane transfers signaling messages.2 ATM Physical Layer. ATM control plane. The management plane transfers network OM data. and ATM management plane. Ltd . Table 7-1 Functions of the ATM user plane. This plane is classified into the layer management part and the plane management part.2. It segments data from the upper layer into SDUs. such as connection setup and connection release. the AAL and higher layers process the data on the control plane and the user plane in different ways. and the latter for inter-layer management. 7. The former is responsible for intra-layer management. 7. Table 7-2 Layers and functions of the reference model of the ATM protocol Protocol Layer CS AAL Function The AAL is a higher layer of the ATM layer and performs the adaptation from the upper layer applications to the ATM layer. and ATM management plane. and AAL. ATM layer. and AAL. 7. The ATM layer and the physical layer. ATM Layer.2 ATM Physical Layer. and AAL This describes the functions of the physical layer. Table 7-1 describes the functions of the ATM user plane. The AAL reassembles and 7-7 Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration This describes the functions of the ATM user plane. ATM control plane. and AAL This describes the functions of the physical layer. NOTE As stated in the ATM protocols. ATM control plane. For various types of services. ATM control plane. and ATM management plane Plane User plane Control plane Management Plane Function The user plane transfers user data. however. and ATM Management Plane This describes the functions of the ATM user plane. Each SDU has 48 bytes. ATM Control Plane.1 ATM User Plane. and ATM management plane.2.2. ATM Layer. the AAL performs the adaptation in different ways..

the physical layer adds the overhead to the ATM cells sent by the ATM layer to form a consecutive bit stream. During data transmission. During data reception. and transport network layer when the Iub interface uses the IP transport. or STM-1 mode) PM (PDH over E1/T1. the physical layer selects valid ATM cells from the bit stream on the transport channel and then transfers these cells to the ATM layer. Then..7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Protocol Layer SAR Function restores the SDUs from the ATM layer. l l l l Generic traffic control Cell header generation and extraction VPI and VCI translation Cell multiplexing and demultiplexing TC (UNI. ATM layer - ATM switching is a fast packet switching technology. The physical layer consists of the PM sublayer and the TC sublayer. the ATM layer communicates with the peer layer through ATM cells. The SAR layer performs the segmentation and reassembly. the physical layer puts the stream on a transport channel.1 Data Link Layer Protocols 7-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 7. network layer. IMA. At the physical layer. In ATM switching. each 53-byte packet is called a cell. The TC sublayer performs the following functions: l Generation and recovery of transmission frames l l l l Adaptation of transmission frames Cell delimitation Generation and verification of HEC header sequence Decoupling of cell rate The PM sublayer performs the following functions: l Bit timing l Physical medium 7. Fractional IMA. SDH) Physical layer The physical layer provides channels for bit streams of ATM cells. The CS layer performs the convergence.3. Fractional ATM. and then transfers them to the upper layer.3 IP Protocol-Related Terms This describes the terms related to the protocols of the data link layer. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) .

the MP emerges as an extended protocol of the PPP. It provides a connectionless service between networks and defines the rules and details for data communication.1. With the wide application of the PPP. The PPP is used at the data link layer.1 Data Link Layer Protocols This describes the data link layer protocols related to IP transport. multiple NodeBs are connected to the RNC through the access equipment..3. It is connected to the Ethernet.3.4 EtherIP This describes the EtherIP link. PPP This describes the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP). When the PPPoE is used in the RAN system. 7. These datagrams include IP. It is used along with the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) to provide guaranteed data transfer.3. 7.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration This describes the data link layer protocols related to IP transport. The PPP is used at the data link layer. 7. In addition. 7.1 PPP This describes the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).3.1. and Apple Talk. The PPP provides standard methods for encapsulating the multi-protocol datagrams on point-to-point links. 7. and the relay boards use the FE ports. The PPP provides standard methods for encapsulating the multi-protocol datagrams on point-to-point links. The MP provides a large bandwidth to enable quick data transfer. It is mainly used for transmitting reliable datagrams through an unreliable network.1.2 IP This describes the Internet Protocol (IP). the MP dynamically allocates the link resources to effectively save the valuable resources. 7.3. and Apple Talk. IPX. Figure 7-5 shows the hierarchy of the PPP.2 MP This describes the Multilink PPP (MP).3 SCTP This describes the Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP). 7.3. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd 7-9 . These datagrams include IP.3. It is a standard that defines how multiple hosts are connected to a remote Access Concentration (AC) in a broadcasting-type network (for example Ethernet).1. IPX.3 PPPoE This describes the PPPoE protocol.

In this network topology. thus providing a large bandwidth and enabling fast data transfer. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . With the development of network technologies. network control protocol (NCP). The MP provides a large bandwidth to enable quick data transfer. such as the multilink protocol (MP): The PPP combines multiple physical links into a logical link through the MP. and the bandwidth of the virtual link is the sum of bandwidths of the N (N ≥ 1) physical links. each host should be able to set up a unique point-to-point session with the AC. 7-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. bandwidth is no longer a bottleneck. In addition. The MP can flexibly arrange multiple independent physical links between point-to-point systems. Huawei RNC implements the MP by adding MLPPP data. multiple NodeBs are connected to the RNC through the access equipment. Extended protocols. the MP emerges as an extended protocol of the PPP. With the wide application of the PPP. the extended protocols of the PPP are not required. NCP: used to configure parameters at the network layer for communications between the equipment. and extended protocols. To set up and maintain the pointto-point relations between hosts and the AC in a broadcasting-type network. They are described as follows: l l LCP: used to configure. It provides a virtual link for the whole system. When the PPPoE is used in the RAN system.. It is a standard that defines how multiple hosts are connected to a remote Access Concentration (AC) in a broadcasting-type network (for example Ethernet). the MP dynamically allocates the link resources to effectively save the valuable resources. all hosts can independently initialize PPP protocol stacks. Therefore. l MP This describes the Multilink PPP (MP). and perform charging and management for the subscribers on this network.7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 7-5 Hierarchy of the PPP The PPP consists of the link control protocol (LCP). or remove a data link. PPPoE This describes the PPPoE protocol. test.

In the application of the RAN.3. and then transfer the network layer datagrams over this point-to-point logical channel. It is used along with the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) to provide guaranteed data transfer. During this phase. EtherIP This describes the EtherIP link. the host selects an AC based on the services provided by the AC or the settings predefined by the subscribers. but those of classes D and E are invalid. After an AC is selected. and C are valid. comply with the following principles when planning the IP addresses: l IP addresses and subnet masks must be valid. and the relay boards use the FE ports. the two sides with point-to-point connection exchange the datagrams by using the PPP to complete a series of PPP processes. PPPoE session phase starts after the session is set up.X. Compared with IPv4. B. 7. PPPoE and EtherIP links are connected to the Ethernet.2 IP This describes the Internet Protocol (IP). which was launched in 1981.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration The procedure for setting up a PPPoE session is as follows: 1. 4. Do not set the IP address to a loopback address of 127. The IP addresses of classes A. If multiple ACs exist on the network. which was launched in 1995. the NodeB can be configured with the following four links: l l l l PPP MP PPPoE EtherIP PPP and MP links are connected to the dedicated line network. is gradually going to replace IPv4. 3. Ltd 7-11 l l Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . and the relay boards use the E1/ T1 ports. IPv4 and IPv6 The current and most popular network layer protocol of the TCP/IP is IPv4. IPv6. the host starts to set up a PPPoE session with the AC and assigns a unique process ID. 2. each communication entity needs an IP address. IPv6 has much more address space to meet more requirements for IP addresses. When IP_RAN is selected as the transmission mode of the NodeB.X.. Principles for IP Address Planning When using the TCP/IP protocol for communication. It provides a connectionless service between networks and defines the rules and details for data communication. and the relay boards use the FE ports. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. It is connected to the Ethernet. it searches for an AC in the network. When a host wants to start a PPPoE session.X. The network number is not all-zero and that the host number is not all-zero or all-one.

7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide IP Address Structure In an IP network. and C are most commonly used. For details. IP addresses of class E are reserved. you need to apply for an IP address from the Internet Service Provider (ISP). l IP Address Classification IP addresses are categorized into five classes. 7-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. IP addresses should be assigned to hosts. You can identify an IP address class by its first few bits. as shown in Figure 7-6. refer to the RFC1166 Internet Numbers released by IETF. Table 7-3 describes the ranges of IP addresses.. If you connect a computer to the Internet. Host number (host-id): indicates different hosts in the same network. The length of the IP address is 32 bits. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . B. IP Address Range Some IP addresses are reserved for special purposes. The IP address consists of the following parts: l Network number (net-id): The first bits are called class segments (class bits) that are used to identify the class of an IP address. Figure 7-6 Five classes of IP addresses The IP addresses of classes A. IP addresses of class D are used for multicasting.

X.0.0 to 126.0.255.X format are reserved for loopback testing.0.. Ltd 7-13 .255 192.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration Table 7-3 Classification and range of IP addresses Net wor k Typ e A Address Range Available Range Description 0.0 l l C 192.255.254.0 to 223.255. IP addresses of class D are used for multicasting. An all-zero host number means that the IP address is the network address for network routing.0 l An all-zero host number means that the IP address is the network address for network routing.255.0. the local host can take 0.0 to 239.0.0.0 as the temporary IP address but never as the valid destination address.X.254. The IP address with network number of 0 represents the current network that can be referenced by other computers without knowing its network number.0.0 to 223. An all-one host number means that the IP address is used to broadcast messages to all the hosts on the network.0.0. The packets are handled internally as input packets. An all-one host number means that the IP address is used to broadcast messages to all the hosts on the network.255.0 to 191.255.255 1.0 to 127.0. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. An all-one host number means that the IP address is used to broadcast messages to all the hosts on the network.255.0. l l l l B 128.0 to 191. When the DHCP is used.0.0. An all-zero host number means that the IP address is the network address for network routing.0.255.0.0.255 None.0. The packets sent to this address are not sent to lines.255.255 128. All the IP addresses in the 127.0.0.0 l l D 224.

0. and reliability. A transport address is defined by the network layer address.255. Provides better real-time performance. All the transport addresses used by an SCTP endpoint must use the same port number but can use multiple IP addresses.255 None.3 SCTP This describes the Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP).0.7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Net wor k Typ e E Address Range Available Range Description 240. It is mainly used for transmitting reliable datagrams through an unreliable network. The SCTP endpoint on a multi-homing host can be either a group of valid destination transport addresses for data transmission to the peer host. the SCTP protocol acts as the transport layer protocol.255. The protocol status data includes verification tag and transport sequence number. The IP address of 255. or a group of valid originating transport addresses for transmitting SCTP packets. Advantages of the SCTP Compared with the TCP Compared with the TCP. SCTP Association SCTP association is the mapping between two SCTP endpoints.255 is used for broadcasting in the LAN. Provides higher security. the SCTP has the following advantages: l l l l l Supports the transmission of datagrams that are not delimitated by the upper layer. SCTP Endpoint The SCTP endpoint is the logical transmitter or receiver of SCTP packets. transport layer protocols. the transport address is defined by the IP address and SCTP port number. Avoids the blocking of line headers. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Reserved.3. security. When the SCTP protocol works on the IP transport layer.. It involves two SCTP endpoints and protocol status data. Provides the signaling transmission of higher requirements for real-time performance.0 to 255. and port number.255. Then.255. 7-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The transport address used by an SCTP endpoint at a time must be unique. Supports the multi-homing function. 7.

SCTP Message Structure The SCTP message consists of the common header and the chunks. thus saving the bandwidth. 7.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration SCTP association is uniquely identified by the transport address of the SCTP endpoint that uses the SCTP association. Figure 7-7 shows the SCTP message structure. that is. Figure 7-7 SCTP Message Structure Multiple chunks can be bundled and transmitted in one datagram.4 NodeB Treelink PVC The function of a NodeB treelink PVC is similar to that of the ATM switching. to add an ATM switching route to the NodeB (over ATM).. This describes how to add a treelink PVC to the NodeB. Networking Principles If a NodeB is connected to a lower-level NodeB. this parent NodeB must be configured with a treelink PVC for transferring ATM cells to the lower-level node. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. so as to switch the PVC from one physical bearer to another. There is a maximum of one SCTP association between two SCTP endpoints. Ltd 7-15 . The red dashed line in Figure 7-8 represents the treelink PVC.

CCP. You need to specify only the source VPI and the destination VPI. l For VC switching. the amount of treelink PVCs depends on that of the PVCs of the upperlevel node. For VP switching. and treelink PVC of the lower-level NodeB correspond to different PVCs. AAL2 PATH. VCI) and the destination (VPI. The VCI is unchanged. ALCAP. The treelink PVCs configured on a hub NodeB should be able to switch all the data of the Iub interface to the upper-level node. you can select either of the following methods: l Through VCI switching: A treelink PVC corresponds to a PVC switching route. the amount of treelink PVCs depends on that of the PVCs of the upperlevel node and the VPI values of all PVCs.. You need to specify the source (VPI. l The amount of treelink PVCs depends on the amount of physical bearers. You need to add switching routes for all PVCs of the lower-level NodeB. VCI). Assume that all the PVCs on the Iub interface Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) l 7-16 . IPoA.7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 7-8 Treelink PVC The purpose of a treelink PVC is to switch the data of the lower-level NodeB to the upper-level one through a hub NodeB. and the amount of the upper-level applications. CES. To add a PVC switching route. Through VPI switching: A treelink PVC corresponds to multiple PVC switching routes. Figure 7-9 Treelink PVC principles Relations Between Iub PVCs of Lower-Level NodeB and Treelink PVCs The NCP. The method of adding a treelink PVC is the same as that of adding a PVC switching route. switching methods (VP or VC).

7. In this sense..2 Configuration Differences Between NodeBs in Direct/Cascading Connections NodeBy in cascading connection is connected to NodeBx through E1. it is similar to configure NodeBs in direct or cascading connection. however. 7. Cascading Connection In cascading mode. the NodeB is connected to the RNC through another NodeB. NOTE By adjusting the interface board of a lower-level NodeB or hub NodeB. only one treelink PVC needs to be configured. This. that is. 7.5 NodeBs in Direct/Cascading Connections This defines the NodeBs in direct and cascading connections. describes the configuration differences between direct and cascading connections. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 7. In this case. Ltd 7-17 . you can meet the requirements for the VPIs and VCIs of treelink PVCs. Figure 7-10 shows an example of direct connection between NodeBx and the RNC. In addition. The configuration based on VC switching is more flexible. in which case NodeBx works as the transmission equipment between NodeBy and the RNC. the slot number.5. and VPI of each PVC are the same as those of other PVCs. link (group) number. Figure 7-10shows an example of cascading connection between NodeBy and the RNC. the NodeB is connected to the RNC directly or through transport equipment.1 Definitions of NodeBs in Direct/Cascading Connections The physical connections between an RNC and a NodeB are of two types: direct and cascading connections.5. link type.1 Definitions of NodeBs in Direct/Cascading Connections The physical connections between an RNC and a NodeB are of two types: direct and cascading connections. NodeBx is called the NodeB that provides cascading connection for NodeBy. In this case.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration of a lower-level NodeB are carried on one ATM physical bearer. Comparison Between VP Switching and VC Switching l l The planning and configuration based on VP switching is easier. Direct Connection In direct connection. it describes the configuration differences between these two connections.5.

Ltd Issue 01 (2008-06-25) . Table 7-4 lists the configuration differences between NodeBs in direct/cascading connections. NodeBx works as the ATM switching equipment. NodeBx must be connected to the RNC over fractional ATM. This. 7. l NodeBy must be connected to NodeBx over fractional ATM and occupies only the redundant timeslots of NodeBx. NodeBy is connected to the RNC through multiple NodeBs that provide cascading connections. providing the VP/VC switching function. By default. l 7-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NodeBx provides the cascading path for NodeBy in either of the following ways: l l NodeBx provides the E1/T1 timeslot cross function. including E1 over SDH. the NodeB that provides cascading connection). which is also called the treelink PVC function. Each cascaded NodeB occupies a portion of the bandwidth between the RNC and the upper-level NodeB (that is. there are redundant timeslots between NodeBx and the RNC. however.. In this sense.5. it is similar to configure NodeBs in direct or cascading connection.7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figure 7-10 Direct and cascading connections NOTE Multi-level cascading is allowed. You need to configure the timeslot cross connection on NodeBx. In multi-level cascading mode. multi-level cascading is not recommended. Table 7-4 Configuration differences between NodeBs in direct/cascading connections NodeBx Cascading Path Timeslot cross. describes the configuration differences between direct and cascading connections. Therefore. The NodeBx works as the equipment that provides the timeslot cross function. in which case NodeBx works as the transmission equipment between NodeBy and the RNC. Besides.2 Configuration Differences Between NodeBs in Direct/ Cascading Connections NodeBy in cascading connection is connected to NodeBx through E1. Prerequisites for NodeBy Configuration l Configuration differences between NodeBy and the NodeB in direct connection l NodeBx is connected to the RNC through E1/T1. The bandwidth is also required by the upper-level NodeB.

NodeBy may also be connected to NodeBx by E1/T1 with the applications as UNI or IMA.NodeB NodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration NodeBx Cascading Path ATM switching Prerequisites for NodeBy Configuration Redundant portions of the bandwidth are available between NodeBx and the RNC.. NodeBx is connected to the RNC by E1/T1 or SDH with the application as UNI. Ltd 7-19 . IMA. Configuration differences between NodeBy and the NodeB in direct connection You need to add a treelink PVC to NodeBx. or STM-1. This type of cascading path for the NodeB is recommended. As the ATM switching equipment. Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful